7102-Flush Truck Expansion - SpecificationsPROJECT MANUAL
for the
FLUSH TRUCK
STORAGE EXPANSION
For the
CITY OF DENTON
Denton, Texas
Project No. NMA 18023
City of Denton
Request for Proposal No.
April 4, 2019 SET NO.
General Information
Project Manual
00010 - 1
Project Consultant Information
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
PROJECT MANUAL
ISSUE FOR BIDDING AND CONSTRUCTION
A New Flush Truck Storage Expansion
for the
City of Denton
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Date: April 4, 2019
Project No. 18023 Issued for Bids
Nelson+Morgan, Architects ARCHITECTS
2717 Wind River Lane, Suite 230
Denton, Texas 76210
Contact: Alan Nelson, Principal in Charge
anelson@nelsonmorgan.com
Phone: (940) 566-0266
HPMB Consulting Engineers, Inc. MECHANICAL /ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS
2828 E. Trinity Mills Rd., Suite 210
Carrollton, Texas 75006
Contact: Dennis Hergenrether, Principal in Charge
dhergenrether@hpmbengineers.com
Phone: (214) 483-6202
Lobsinger & Potts Structural Engineering STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS
1723 E. Southlake Blvd., Suite 200
Southlake, Texas 76092
Contact: Cory Potts, P.E.
potts@lpse.net
(817)-488-9933
00050 - 1
Table of Contents
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Flush Truck Storage Expansion
for the
City of Denton
Nelson + Morgan, Architects
Project No. 18023
CITY of DENTON BIDDING AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Invitation for Bids 22 pages
Exhibit 1 Proposal/submittal Sheet 1 page
Exhibit 2 General Provisions, Terms and Conditions 104 pages
GENERAL INFORMATION
00010 Project Information and Professional Seals 1 page 4April19
00050 Table of Contents 4 pages 4April19
00310 Proposals and Alternates 1 page 4April19
DIVISION ONE: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01010 Summary of Work 3 pages 4April19
01050 Energy Compliance Certificate 30 pages 4April19
01060 Regulatory Requirements 1 page 4April19
01096 ADA/TAS Standards 3 pages 4April19
01100 Job Requirements 7 pages 4April19
01210 Allowances 2 pages 4April19
01250 Contract Modification Procedures 3 pages 4April19
01290 Payment Procedures 4 pages 4April19
01295 Schedule of Values 2 pages 4April19
01310 Project Management and Coordination 6 pages 4April19
01320 Construction Progress Documentation 2 pages 4April19
01340 Submittal Procedures 8 pages 4April19
01420 References 4 pages 4April19
01421 Structural Testing and Inspection Agency Services 9 pages 4April19
01450 Quality Control 3 pages 4April19
01600 Materials and Equipment 10 pages 4April19
01731 Cutting and Patching 2 pages 4April19
01740 Cleaning 2 pages 4April19
01750 Starting and Adjusting 2 pages 4April19
01770 Closeout Procedures 2 pages 4April19
01780 Closeout Submittals 5 pages 4April19
00050 - 2
Table of Contents
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
DIVISION TWO: SITE WORK
02070 Selective Demolition 2 pages 4April19
02110 Geotechnical Report 34 pages 4April19
02115 Site Clearing 2 pages 4April19
02270 Erosion and Sediment Control 3 pages 4April19
02300 Earthwork 6 pages 4April19
02310 Grading 2 pages 4April19
02513 Pavement Markings 2 pages 4April19
02751 Concrete Pavement 5 pages 4April19
02764 Paving Joint Sealants 3 pages 4April19
DIVISION THREE: CONCRETE
03100 Concrete Forming 3 pages 4April19
03200 Concrete Reinforcing 2 pages 4April19
03300 Cast in Place Concrete 7 pages 4April19
03366 Concrete Sealer, Densifier, Hardener 3 pages 4April19
DIVISION FOUR: MASONRY
DIVISION FIVE: METALS
DIVISION SIX: WOOD AND PLASTICS
06100 Rough Carpentry 4 pages 4April19
DIVISION SEVEN: THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION:
07900 Sealants 3 pages 4April19
DIVISION EIGHT: DOORS AND WINDOWS
08110 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 4 pages 4April19
08330 Sectional Overhead Door 5 pages 4April19
08710 Door Hardware 13 pages 4April19
DIVISION NINE: FINISHES
09900 Painting 5 pages 4April19
DIVISION TEN: SPECIALTIES
DIVISION ELEVEN: EQUIPMENT
DIVISION TWELVE: FURNISHINGS: Not used
DIVISION THIRTEEN: SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13600 Pre-Engineered Building Systems 12 pages 4April19
DIVISION FOURTEEN: Not used.
00050 - 3
Table of Contents
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
DIVISION FIFTEEN: MECHANICAL
15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 6 pages 4April19
15075 Mechanical System Identification 3 pages 4April19
15140 Hangers and Supports 7 pages 4April19
15260 Piping Insulation 5 pages 4April19
15290 Ductwork Insulation 5 pages 4April19
15330 Automatic Fire Protection System 9 pages 4April19
15410 Plumbing Piping Systems 14 pages 4April19
15440 Plumbing Fixtures 2 pages 4April19
15480 Domestic Water Heaters 3 pages 4April19
15580 Gas Fired Heaters 2 pages 4April19
15651 Refrigerant Piping 2 pages 4April19
15670 Air Cooled Condensing Units 2 pages 4April19
15675 Ductless AC Split Systems 5 pages 4April19
15760 Electric Heaters 2 pages 4April19
15770 Gas-Fired Furnace Units with Coils 3 pages 4April19
15820 Ductwork Accessories 4 pages 4April19
15830 Power Ventilators 3 pages 4April19
15850 Air Inlet and Outlet Devices 4 pages 4April19
15890 Ductwork and Vents 7 pages 4April19
15940 Sequence of Operations 1 page 4April19
15950 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 7 pages 4April19
DIVISION SIXTEEN: ELECTRICAL
16000 General Electrical Requirements 9 pages 4April19
16060 Grounding and Bonding 3 pages 4April19
16070 Supporting Devices 3 pages 4April19
16080 Electrical Identification 2 pages 4April19
16110 Underground Electrical Conduits 2 pages 4April19
16120 Conductors and Cables 4 pages 4April19
16130 Raceways and Fittings 7 pages 4April19
16136 Wire Basket Tray 5 pages 4April19
16140 Wiring Devices 3 pages 4April19
16405 Enclosed Motor Controllers 3 pages 4April19
16410 Enclosed Disconnect Switches and Circuit Breakers 2 pages 4April19
16415 Automatic Transfer Switches 8 pages 4April19
16420 Lighting and Appliance Panelboards 4 pages 4April19
16430 Distribution Panelboards 3 pages 4April19
16460 Dry Type Transformers 3 pages 4April19
16490 Fuses 3 pages 4April19
16500 Lighting Fixtures 6 pages 4April19
16900 Telephone Service and Distribution 2 pages 4April19
16950 Low Voltage Lighting Control System 5 pages 4April19
16990 Special Systems 3 pages 4April19
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
Division One
General Requirements
01010 - 1
Summary of Work
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Construct work as described in the Contract Documents.
1. Provide the materials, equipment, and incidentals required to make the project completely and
fully operable.
2. Provide the labor, equipment, tools, and consumable supplies required for a complete project.
3. Provide the civil, architectural, structural, mechanical, electrical, instrumentation and all other
work required for a complete and operable project.
4. Test and place the completed project in operation.
5. Provide the special tools, spare parts, lubricants, supplies, or other materials as indicated in
Contract Documents for the operation and maintenance of the Project.
6. Install Owner provided products and place in operation.
7. Drawings and specifications do not indicate or describe all of the work required to complete the
project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be
provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the Architect.
1.02 JOB CONDITIONS
A. The General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, and General Requirements apply to each
specification section.
B. Comply with all applicable state and local codes and regulations pertaining to the nature and
character of the work being performed.
1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work is described in general, non-inclusive terms as construction of site improvements, building,
mechanical, electrical, plumbing work and all appurtenances identified by the Contract Documents as
work to construct an addition to the storage facility located at 804 Texas Street for the City of Denton,
Texas.
B. Work includes, but is not limited to the following general items:
a. Site rough grading and finish grading
b. Selective demolition
c. Site concrete and concrete paving
d. Concrete foundation
e. Rough carpentry
f. Pre-Engineered Metal Building systems-modifications to existing and new systems.
g. Hollow metal doors and frames
h. Overhead coiling doors
i. Door hardware
j. Painting
k. Fire Extinguishers
l. Building Signage
m. Electrical service rough-in and installation
n. Ventilation system
01010 - 2
Summary of Work
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
1.04 INTENT OF THE SPECIFICATIONS:
A. The intent of these specifications is to describe the materials and methods of construction
required for the performance of the work. In general, it is intended that the drawings shall
delineate the detailed extent of the work. When there is a discrepancy between drawings,
referenced specifications, and standards and this specification, this specification shall govern.
B. Material names or manufacturers that have been named in the specification have been selected
to establish a standard of quality and minimum performance criteria. Other manufacturers and
products may be considered for substitution. It is the bidder's responsibility to research and
locate suppliers that meet the performance specifications required by these specifications.
1.05 WORKS BY OWNER
A. The Owner plans to perform the following items of work which are not included in this contract, but
may impact construction scheduling, testing, and start up. These items will require coordination
efforts during construction by the contractor:
1. Access Control System. Owner will furnish the ACS vendor that will coordinate with the
installation of the Finished Hardware.
2. Installation of inventory shelving and racking systems.
B. Owner will provide normal operation and maintenance of the existing adjacent facilities during
construction, unless otherwise stated.
1.06 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PROJECT SITE
A. Limit the use of project site for work and storage to the areas at the site designated and approved by
the Owner.
B. Coordinate the use of the premises with the Architect
C. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products stored at the site.
D. Store products to allow owner access for maintenance and operations.
E. Obtain and pay for the use of any additional storage or work areas needed for construction.
F. Any damage to existing facilities, including contamination, caused by the Contractor's personnel,
visitors, materials, or equipment, shall be repaired or corrected at the Contractor's expense.
G. No alcoholic beverages or illegal substances shall be permitted on the site at any time.
H. No concealed or illegal, weapons shall be permitted on the site at any time.
1.07 OCCUPANCY
A. As soon as any portion of the structure is ready for use, the Owner shall have the right to occupy or
operate that portion upon written notice to the Contractor.
B. Testing of equipment and appurtenances including specified test periods, training, and start up does
not constitute acceptance for operation.
C. Owner may accept the facility for continued use after start-up and testing at the option of the Owner.
If acceptance is delayed at the option of the Owner, shut down facilities per approved Operation and
Maintenance procedures.
D. The execution of bonds is understood to indicate the consent of the surety to these provisions.
E. Provide an endorsement from the insurance carrier permitting occupancy of t he structures and use of
equipment during the remaining period of construction.
01010 - 3
Summary of Work
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
F. Conduct operations to insure the least inconvenience to the Owner and general public.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Provide materials and products per the individual sections of the specifications.
3.00 EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)
END OF SECTION
01060 - 1
Regulatory Requirements
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 01060
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Requirements, bidding documents and drawings.
1.2 TAXES:
Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes required by law, however it
is understood that the it is the policy of the Owner to take advantage of the savings of the tax
exemption status of the City of Denton. When the property (equipment, goods, materials, etc.) is
consigned to the City, its agencies or political subdivision, or when such property is co-signed to
the City, its agency or political subdivisions in care of the Contractor, the Owner shall be tax
exempt. To this end, the contractor agrees to comply with the following. In determining cost of
material and computing charges, DO NOT include Sales Tax for the State of Texas or City sales
taxes. The successful bidder will be furnished an appropriate exemption certificate form by the
Owner and will be authorized to have all shipments of construction materials and equipment
entering to this contract co-signed to the Owner in care of himself, thereby enabling him to take
advantage of the above-mentioned exemption. Said exemption will not apply to shipments of fuel,
lubricants, spare parts or items of construction equipment belonging to the contractor which will not
be incorporated in the construction project and which will not become the property of the Owner.
1.3 PERMITS AND FEES:
The City of Denton Facilities Management department will make all necessary arrangements for
payment of the required building permit fees. Contractor shall apply for and secure all incidental
permits, governmental fees and licenses necessary for proper execution and completion of the
Work. General Contractor shall verify, secure and coordinate any and all permit and inspection
costs, impact fees, government fees, and licenses directly or indirectly related to the project. The
Owner will pay the cost for any permit and impact fees, and tap fees that are directly related to
the project. The General Contractor shall be responsible for any fines, penalties or reinspections
fees, and any required municipal registration fees.
1.4 GOVERNING CODES:
Work performed under this specification shall be in compliance with applicable codes, laws, and
ordinances of the municipal, state, and federal departments concerned. Materials and
workmanship required by such regulations shall be provided by the Contractor whether or not
specifically noted herein or shown on the drawings.
1.5 NOTICES:
The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and
orders of any public authority bearing on the performance of the Work. If Contractor performs
any Work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, without
providing notice to building owner's representative, Contractor shall assume full responsibility
and shall bear all costs.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
State and local building codes.
END OF SECTION
01096- 1
ADA / TAS STANDARDS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 01096
A.D.A. GUIDELINES
AND
TEXAS ARCHITECTURAL STANDARDS
REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL:
The following requirements are from the ADA accessibility guidelines for building and facilities,
and Texas Accessibility Standards 2012 of the Elimination of Architectural Barriers, Texas
Government code, Chapter 469. The information contained in this section is summarized from the
guidelines to provide answers to the majority of the questions which Nelson Morgan Architects
receive. This section is in no way a complete reproduction of the A.D.A. Guidelines or TAS, nor
does it cover all sections. Some requirements vary depending on age or school grade.
EXPLANATION: The following information is provided in sections, which contain similar
information. At the end of each item, there is a number in parenthesis; this number is a reference
to the TAS Guidelines, which can help if there are any questions.
1.02 ACCESSIBLE ROUTE:
A. Sidewalk Slope: Maximum slope, 1:20 or 5%. (402.2)
B. Sidewalk Cross Slope: Maximum slope, 1:48or 2%. (403.3, 405.3)
C. Grate: Openings shall be no greater than 1/2" in one direction, and elongated openings
shall be perpendicular to the direction of travel. (302.3)
D. Parking Spaces: Slope shall not exceed 1:48 or 2% in all directions. (502.4)
E. Parking Signage: Signs shall be located so that they cannot be obscured by a vehicle.
Signs shall be mounted at 60" to the bottom of the lowest lettering or symbol on the sign
above the parking grade. Signs shall be of such a design that designates the parking
space as a space reserved for disabled persons. Signs required to be "Van Accessible",
shall have an additional sign mounted below the symbol of accessibility labeled "Van
Accessible". (502.6)
F. Curb Ramps: Transitions from ramps to walks, gutters or streets shall be flush and free of
abrupt changes. Maximum slope 1:12. (405.2)
G. Curb Ramp Texture: Textures shall consist of exposed crushed stone aggregate,
roughened concrete, rubber, raised abrasive strips, or grooves extending the full width
and depth of the curb ramp. Surfaces that are raised, etched, or grooved in a way that
would allow water to accumulate are prohibited. For purposes of warning, the full width
and depth of curb ramps shall have a light reflective value and texture that significantly
contrasts with that of adjoining pedestrian routes. (302.1, 405.10, 705.1.3)
H. Ramps: Maximum slope 1:12, maximum rise shall be 30. Edge projection shall be
provided on each side of the ramp runs and at each side of the ramp landing. (405.2,
405.6, 405.9, 405.9.1, 405.9.2)
I. Ramp Landing: Landing shall be level Length shall be 60' minimum, width shall be as
wide as ramp.(4057.2, 4057.3)
J. Ramps that change direction: Landing shall be a minimum of 60"x60". (405.7.4)
K. Handrails: Top of handrail shall be mounted between 34-36" above ramp surfaces. Clear
space between handrail and wall shall be 1 1/2”. Handrails shall be continuous. Handrails
shall not rotate within their fittings. (505.4, 505.5, 505.6 505.9)
L. Building Code: If the ramp rises higher than 30" and is open on either side, the rail
openings must be smaller than 4". (IBC 20212: 1013.4, TAS: 405.9, 405.9.2)
01096- 2
ADA / TAS STANDARDS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
1.03 INTERIOR SPACES:
A. Stair Nosings: Radius of nosing shall be a maximum of 1/2". (504.5)
B. Carpet: Shall have a firm cushion, pad, or backing. Maximum pile thickness shall be 1/2".
Exposed edges of carpet shall be fastened to floor surfaces and have trim along the
entire length of the exposed edge. (302.2)
C. Fire Extinguisher: Mounting height shall be determined by the weight of the extinguisher.
For extinguisher weighing 40 pounds or less, extinguisher shall be installed so that their
tops are no more than 5 feet above the floor. For extinguishers weighing more than 40
pounds, extinguishers shall be installed so that their tops are no more than 3.5 feet above
the ground. Wall mounted extinguishers shall not project more than 4" from wall. (IBC/
FIRE CODE 2012: 906.9.1, 906.9.2, 906.3, TAS: 307.2)
1.04 DOORS
A. Clear Width of Doors: Minimum clear opening is 32" (between stops). (404.2.3)
B. Doors and Vestibules: The minimum distance from the end of an open door to the next is
48". (404.2.6)
C. Thresholds: Maximum height of threshold is ½”. Beveled slopes shall be a maximum of
1:2. (404.2.5)
D. Door Hardware: Handles, pulls, latches, locks and other operable parts shall be mounted
34 inches minimum and 48" maximum A.F.F. (404.2.7)
E. Door Closers: The door closer shall be adjusted so that from an open position of 90
degrees, the time required to move the door to a position of 12 degrees from the latch is
5 seconds minimum. Door spring hinges shall be adjusted so that from the open position
of 70 degrees, the door shall move to the closed position in 1.5 seconds minimum.
(404.2.8.1)
F. Door Opening Force: Interior doors shall have a maximum opening force of 5 Ibs.
Exterior doors shall have an open force of 8.5 Ibs, (404.2.9)
G. Door Clearance: Swing doors and gates shall have maneuvering clearances complying
with table 404.2.4.1. (404.2.4, 404.2.4.1)
1.05 TOILET ROOMS:
A. Toilets: Refer mounting heights in sections 604.8 and 604.9.
B. Urinals: Stall-type or wall-hung type with the rim 17 inches maximum A.F.F. (605.2)
C. Lavatories: Sinks shall be installed with the front of the higher of the rim or counter
surface 34 inches maximum A.F.F. (606.3)
D. Grab Bars: Grab bars for water closets shall comply with 609, Grab bars shall be
provided on the side wall closest to the water closet and on the rear wall. (604.5.1,
604.5.2)
E. Flush Controls: Shall be located on the open side of the water closet. (604.6)
F. Exposed Pipes: Exposed pipes below lavatories shall be insulated. There shall be no
sharp or abrasive surfaces under lavatories. (606.5)
G. Faucets: Faucets shall be push type, lever operated, or electronically operated. If faucets
have self-closing valves, they must remain open for at least 10 seconds. (606.4)
H. Coat Hooks: Shall be located within one of the reach ranges specified in section 308.
(308, 604.8.3)
I. Dispensers: Dispensers shall be 7 inches minimum and 9 inches maximum in front of the
water closet measured to the center line of the dispenser. The outlet of the dispenser
shall be 15 inches minimum and 48 inches maximum above finish floor. (604.7)
J. Toilet Stall Doors: 32" clear for accessible doors. (404.2.3)
01096- 3
ADA / TAS STANDARDS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
K. Toilet Stall Door Hardware: Hardware shall be 34 inches minimum and 48 inches
maximum A.F.F. (404.2.7)
L. Toilet Distance from Wall: 16-18" from wall to centerline of toilet. (604.2)
M. Mirrors: Mirrors located above laboratories and countertops shall be installed with the
bottom edge of the reflecting surface 40 inches maximum A.F.F. (603.3)
1.06 ALARMS:
A. Audible Alarms: Shall produce a sound that exceeds the prevailing equivalent sound level in
a room or space by at least 15 dba or exceeds any maximum sound level with a duration of
60 seconds by 5 dba, whichever is louder. Sound levels for alarms signals shall not exceed
110 dba. ( 702, 706.4)
B. Visual Alarms: Visual alarm signal appliances shall be integrated into the building or facility
fire alarm system. Visual alarm signal appliances shall flash. For more detailed requirements
on fire alarms contact the Architect. (4.28.3)
C. Pull Stations: Reference Chart for mounting heights.
1.07 SIGNAGE
A. Character Proportion: letters and numbers on signs shall comply with chapter 7. (701-708)
B. Raised and Braille Characters and Pictorial Symbol Signs: Shall comply with chapter 7. (701-
708)
C. Finish and Contrast: The characters and background of signs be eggshell, matte, or other
non-glare finish. Characters shall contrast their backgrounds. (703.6.2)
D. Mounting Location: Sign shall be installed on the latch side of the door. Where there is no
wall space to the latch side of the door, including at double leaf doors, signs shall be placed
on the nearest adjacent wall. Mounting height shall be 60" A.F.F. to the centerline of the sign.
Distance from the doorframe shall be 8" maximum. (703.4.2)
END OF SECTION
01100 - 1
Job Requirements
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 01100
JOB REQUIREMENTS
1.1 COOPERATION WITH BUILDING OFFICIALS
A. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner for access into specific work areas and to
make arrangements for time to shut down services pursuant to contract work.
1.2 EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to examine specifications, drawings and job site
for all construction requirements in connection with this work.
B. The Contractor shall examine the general construction conditions and shall familiarize himself
with all such limitations caused by such conditions and to take cognizance of same in
submitting bid.
1.3 CODES AND REGULATIONS
A. Comply with all local, state, and federal laws, regulations, and ordinances applicable to this
construction.
B. Use the following published codes as minimum requirements in the absence of other
applicable more stringent codes:
1. International Building Codes, 2012 Edition
2. National Electrical Code
3. National Plumbing Code
4. ASHRAE Handbook
5. ASTM Standards
6. Americans with Disabilities Act, Architectural Guidelines (ADAAG)
7. Texas Accessibility Standards.
8. City of Denton Codes and Ordnances
C. General Contractor shall verify, secure and coordinate any and all permit and inspection
costs, impact fees, government fees, and licenses directly or indirectly related to the project.
The Owner will pay the cost for any permit and impact fees and tap fees that are directly
related to the project. The General Contractor shall be responsible for any fines, penalties or
reinspections fees, and any required municipal registration fees.
1.4 COORDINATION AND CONDUCT OF THE WORK
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of all work, and for the coordination
of the operations of all trades, subcontractors and material suppliers, engaged upon or in
connection with the work, as well as the Contractor's employees. He shall exercise every
effort to assure a harmonious, cooperative attitude on the part of all concerned, and be
prepared to guarantee to each subcontractor and foreman the dimensions which they may
require for the fitting of their own adjoining work, and do all fitting and adjusting necessary to
make the several parts of the work come together properly and to fit the work to receive, or to
be received by, the work of other Contractors.
1.5 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
01100 - 2
Job Requirements
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
A. All materials furnished under this contract shall be new and free from defects and approved
by Architect.
B. All work is to be accomplished in a quality workmanship manner and be in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Contractor shall do all cutting and patching necessary for the installation of his work. All
cutting shall be carefully and neatly done so as not to damage or cut away more than
necessary of any existing portions of the structure. All patching shall be done in a neat
workmanlike manner such that patched areas be restored to their original condition.
D. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to keep the work areas in a clean and safe
condition.
1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
A. The General Contractor shall submit for approval seven (7) sets of shop drawings in addition
to the number of sets required by Contractor for his use.
B. Any time delay caused by correcting and submitting shop drawings will be the responsibility
of the Contractor.
C. Consecutively number each transmittal letter for shop drawing submissions.
D. Samples and finishes of materials as required shall be furnished with promptness and will be
accepted or rejected under same conditions as outlined above.
E. Submit schedule of Shop Drawings and sample submittals per Section 01340.
1.7 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Form: Use AIA Document G702A-Continuation Sheet for AIA G702 Application and
Certificate for Payment.
B. Before the first application for Payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect three (3)
copies of the schedule of values of the various portions of the work, aggregating the total
Contract Sum divided so as to facilitate payments to subcontractors. This schedule, when
approved by the Architect shall be used only as a basis for the Contractor's Application for
Payment.
1.8 SUPERINTENDENT
A. The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall
be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall
represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding
as if given to the Contractor. Important communications shall be confirmed in writing. Other
communications shall be similarly confirmed on written request in each case.
1.9 SUBCONTRACTORS
A. Subcontracts shall be made with contractors whose organizations are experienced in their
field of construction, and the subcontractors shall be required to thoroughly familiarize
themselves with the General Conditions and to portions of the Specifications applying in any
01100 - 3
Job Requirements
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
way to their work. The Contractor's superintendent shall review these documents with the
subcontractor's superintendents on the job before that portion of work involved is
commenced.
1.10 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Temporary Utilities:
1. The Contractor will be included in his bid the cost of all water, gas and electricity used
during and expressly for the prosecution of the construction described herein. The
contractor shall establish and maintain the utility account(s) required for this project and
transfer ownership of each utility account upon owner’s acceptance of the project with
receipt of the Certificate of Occupancy and Substantial Completion.
2. The Contractor shall provide for a power welder for welding operations.
3. The plumbing contractor shall provide, protect and maintain an adequate water supply for
the use of all contractors on the project for construction purposes by means of the
permanent water supply shall be made available within fifteen (15) days after written
request has been made to the plumbing and Subcontractor by any Contractor requiring it.
Submit copies of the request to all interested parties including the Architect.
C. Temporary field office:
1. The General Contractor shall provide and maintain a weathertight and safely heated
building at the project site with floors raised well above the ground and of sufficient size to
accommodate his needs. He shall provide the building with light fixtures for night work and
electrical receptacles for the use of business machines.
2. The General Contractor shall, at his expense, extend temporary electrical power to the
office building and shall connect all light fixtures and receptacles, and provide such other
power as required for construction tools, and equipment.
3. The General Contractor shall, at his expense, provide and maintain telephone service for
the field office during the entire construction period.
D. Temporary Toilet Facilities:
Provide single-occupant self-contained toilet units of the chemical, aerated recirculation, or
combustion type, properly vented and fully enclosed with a glass fiber reinforced polyester shell
or similar non-absorbent material.
E. Temporary Open-Mesh Fencing:
Provide No. 11-gauge galvanized chain link fabric fencing 6 feet high with galvanized
steel pipe posts, 1-1/2" I.D. for line posts, and 2-1/2" I.D. for corner posts in locations as
indicated on Drawings. Enclose substantially the entire site or portion thereof
determined to be sufficient to accommodate the entire construction operation. Install in
manner that will prevent persons, dogs, and similar animals from easily entering the
site, except by way of the entrance gates when open.
01100 - 4
Job Requirements
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
1.11 MEASUREMENTS
A. Before doing any work or ordering any materials, the Contractor shall verify all measurements
of any existing and new work and shall be responsible for their correctness. Any differences,
which may be found, shall be submitted to the Architect for consideration before proceeding
with the work. No extra compensation will be allowed because of differences between actual
dimensions and measurements indicated on the Drawings.
1.12 CONFLICTS
A. Where a conflict occurs between or within standards, specifications, codes, ordinances, and
drawings, the more stringent or higher quality requirements shall apply.
B. In the event that information is indicated on either the plans or in the specifications but not in
the other, it will be the same as if this information is included in both.
1.13 MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS AND INSTRUCTIONS
A. Install all manufactured items, materials, and equipment in strict accordance with
manufacturer's recommended specifications except that the Specifications herein, where
more stringent, shall be applicable.
B. At completion of the project and prior to final acceptance by the Owner, provide the Architect
with three complete bound sets of operating and maintenance instructions, and demonstrate
to him procedures for proper operation and maintenance of all equipment. Refer to Section
01771 Closeout Procedures and Section 01780 Closeout Submittals for additional closeout
procedures and requirements.
1.14 JOB MAINTENANCE
A. During the course of their work, all crafts and trades shall protect all work which precedes
theirs from damage and they shall make repairs or replacements to any damage caused
either directly or indirectly by them.
B. Site housekeeping and final cleaning shall be done in accordance with Article 5.15 of the
Uniform General Conditions.
C. The Contractor will be held responsible for any damage to the interior of the building, ceiling
system, or any mechanical or electrical equipment or systems resulting from the demolition or
construction operations, and at completion he shall replace, at his own expense all such
damages.
1.15 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Certain materials, equipment, methods, and services are required by these specifications to
establish the required standard of quality, function and appearance. Generally, other
materials, equipment, methods and services, which are proven by evidence satisfactory to
the Architect to meet the required standards, will be acceptable, in accordance with
Paragraph 5.13 of the Uniform General Conditions and as outlined in Section 01600
Materials and Equipment.
B. Conditions governing substitutions are as follows:
1. No substitution will be allowed without the approval of the Architect in writing.
01100 - 5
Job Requirements
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
2. Architect's approval of any substitution does not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility of providing the specified item. For example, if the substituted item, in the
opinion of the Architect, proves to be inferior to the specified item, in any manner, during
the construction period or the guarantee period, the Contractor shall provide, at no extra
cost, the specified item completely installed including repairs or damages to other
materials necessitated by the change.
3. The phrases "approved, as approved, in an approved manner, satisfactory, approved
equal, similar, equal" and like works and phrases refer to items which, in the opinion of the
Architect, are similar and equal in all respects to the items indicated in the drawings or
specifications.
4. Except as otherwise required by the specifications, substitution requests may be
submitted at any time providing the Contractor allows ample lead time for Architect's
investigation, and for the preparation of shop drawings or submittals, fabrication and
without delaying the work. When not allowed sufficient lead time, the Architect will not
consider substitutions. It is the Contractor's responsibility to accurately ascertain the
amount of lead time required. Proposed substitutions shall be submitted prior to bid
opening if possible, and particularly if they necessitate the changing of design functions,
structural elements, construction details, major dimensions or major parts of the
specifications. Such proposed substitutions shall be submitted for approval prior to bid
opening allowing ample time for the Architect to investigate them, make changes in the
drawings and specifications (if approved), and publish them in an addendum prior to bid
opening. The Architect must receive such substitution requests at least seven (7) days
prior to bid opening or they will not be considered.
5. After execution of the contract agreement, proposed substitutions will be considered only
if the Architect receives the advantage of less cost with no decrease in quality, and only
when submitted by or through the General Contractor.
6. The Architect will reject any materials and/or workmanship, either before or after
installation is completed, which is not indicated in the drawings or specifications or the
substitution of which has not been approved by Architect in writing.
1.16 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS
A. Deliveries of materials to the site of the work shall be so scheduled as to cause a minimum of
interference with construction operations.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper care and protection of all materials,
equipment, etc., delivered at the site. Building materials, contractor's equipment, etc., may
be stored on the premises but the placing of same shall be subject to the approval of the
Architect. When any room in the building is used as a shop, storeroom, etc., the Contractor
will be held responsible for any repairs, patching or cleaning arising from such use. The
Contractor shall protect and be responsible for all damage to his work or material, from the
date of the Contract until the final payment is made, and shall make good without cost to the
Owner, any damage or loss that may occur during this period. The Contractor shall handle all
material as directed, so that the Architect may inspect it.
C. All cement, lime, gypsum, finish lumber and other materials affected by the weather shall be
covered and protected to keep them free from damage while they are being transported to
the job site. The Contractor shall provide the necessary weathertight temporary storage
building, sheds, platforms, etc. No materials shall be stored directly on the ground.
01100 - 6
Job Requirements
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
1.17 EQUIPMENT, SCAFFOLDING, ETC.
A. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall furnish at his own cost and risk, all special
and power tools, scaffolding, apparatus, hoists, derricks including power for same, and all
temporary work and materials required for the proper execution of his work.
1.18 JOB SIGN
A. The General Contractor shall provide a job sign, substantially built and finished to remain in
good condition for the duration of the project.
B. The location and general design shall be as directed by the Architect. The sign shall be four feet
high and eight feet long and shall contain the following:
a. Name of the Project
b. Name of the Architect and Engineers
C. Other signs will not be allowed on the site without the written approval of the Architect.
1.19 USE AND OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER - Refer to Article 9 of the
Uniform General Conditions.
1.20 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. General: Where any part of the General Conditions is modified or voided by this section, the
unaltered provisions of that part shall remain in effect.
B. Related Documents: The general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in the
section.
C. Final Cleaning:
1. Employ experienced workmen, or professional cleaners, for final cleaning.
2. In preparation for substantial completion, conduct final inspection of sight-exposed exterior
surfaces.
3. Repair, patch and touch up marred surfaces to specified finish, to match adjacent
surfaces.
4. Maintain cleaning until project, or portion thereof, is accepted by Owner.
1.21 GUARANTEES, WARRANTIES AND BONDS - Refer to Article 12 of the General Conditions
of the Contract.
1.22 LIST OF REQUIRED GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES
A. Prior to submittal of guarantees and warranties, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect,
in duplicate, a list of required guarantees and warranties. This list shall designate the names
and addresses of the several Subcontractors or parties responsible to the General Contractor
for execution of the work.
01100 - 7
Job Requirements
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
B. Include with the above list a time schedule designating periods of time within which the
General Contractor will accomplish any corrective work necessary that would preclude
Owner's use of equipment or use of the facility.
C. The Architect will review and approve the time schedule in order that the project closeout will
not be delayed.
1.23 AS-BUILT RECORDS - Refer to Article 3.11 of Uniform General Conditions.
1.24 POST CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION
A. Prior to expiration of one year from date of substantial completion, Owner and Contractor will
jointly make visual inspection of the project to determine whether correction of work is
required in accordance with provisions of the Contract.
B. Owner will promptly notify Contractor, in writing, of any observed deficiencies.
END OF SECTION
01250 - 1
Contract Modification Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 01250
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1 Related Documents: Provisions established in General and Supplementary Conditions
of the Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively
applicable to this Section.
2 Section Includes: Procedures for processing Change Orders.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1 Submit name of individual authorized to accept changes, and to be responsible for
informing others in Contractor's employ of changes in the Work.
2 Change Order Forms: AIA G701 Change Order.
1.3 DOCUMENTATION OF CHANGE IN CONTRACT SUM AND CONTRACT TIME
1 Maintain detailed records of work done on a time and material basis. Provide full
information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs of
changes in the Work.
2 Document each quotation for a change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow
evaluation of the quotation.
a. Identify the costs for all subcontractor and vendor furnished items.
b. Identify the cost for any self performed labor.
1. No additional time for general project supervision or coordination will be
allowed unless proposed work scope extends the project thru the critical path
process.
c. Maximum amount allowed for General Contractor overhead markups will be 10%
of Proposed Change subtotal.
d. Maximum amount allowed for General Contractor profit markup will be 5% of
subtotal of Proposed Changes including the overhead markup.
3 On request, provide additional data to support computations:
e. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment.
f. Overhead and profit.
g. Justification for any change in Contract Time.
h. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented.
4 Support each claim for additional costs, and for work done on a time and material basis,
with additional information
a. Origin and date of claim.
b. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom.
c. Time records and wage rates paid.
d. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly
documented.
1.4 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES
1 Architect may submit a Proposal Request including:
a. Statement for the reason for the change.
b. Detailed description of change with supplementary or revised Drawings and
Specifications.
c. Projected time for executing the change.
d. Period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid.
01250 - 2
Contract Modification Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
2 Prepare and submit an estimate within 10 days.
1.5 CHANGE PROCEDURES
1 Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to
Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time by issuing supplemental instructions on AIA Form
G710.
2 Proposal for a change may be made by submitting a request for change to Architect,
describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement
describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum/Price and
Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by
separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance
with Section 01600.
1.6 PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed
changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.
If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and
Specifications.
1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop
work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 20 days, when not otherwise specified,after
receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the
Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish
times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an
extension of the Contract Time.
e. Quotation Form: Use CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form
13.6C,
f. "Proposal Worksheet Detail." or other forms acceptable to Architect.
B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the
Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect.
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change
on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the
effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with
total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey
data to substantiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of
trade discounts.
4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and
finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an
extension of the Contract Time.
6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the
proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or
system specified.
01250 - 3
Contract Modification Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
7. Proposal Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.6A, "Change Order Request
(Proposal)," with attachments CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary,"
and Form 13.6C, "Proposal Worksheet Detail." or other form acceptable to
Architect.
1.7 LUMP SUM CHANGE ORDER
1 Based on Proposal Request and Contractor’s sum quotation, or Contractor's request for
Change Order as approved by Architect.
1.8 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER
1 For predetermined unit prices and quantities, Change Order will be executed on a lump
sum basis.
2 For unit costs or quantities of units of work, which are not predetermined, execute Work
and utilize standard Public Works prices. Changes in Contract Sum or Contract Time
will be computed as specified for time and material Change Order.
1.9 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
1 Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on
AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed
with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
2 Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work.
It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or
the Contract Time.
3 Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required
by the Construction Change Directive.
4 After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary
to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
1.10 EXECUTION OF CHANGE ORDERS
1 Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in Conditions of
the Contract.
1.11 CORRELATION OF CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
1 Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each
authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum as shown
on Change Order.
2 Promptly revise Progress Schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub-
schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit.
3 Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS and PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
01290 - 1
Payment Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 01290
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Payments for Work shall conform to the provisions of the City of Denton General Conditions, the
Supplementary Conditions, the Agreement, and this Section. Apply provisions for payments in the
Section to all Subcontractors and suppliers.
B. Submit Applications for Payment at the amounts indicated in the Agreement:
1. Amounts for each item in the Agreement shall include but not be limited to cost for:
a. Mobilization, demobilization, cleanup, bonds, and insurance.
b. Professional services including but not limited to engineering and legal fees.
c. The products to be permanently incorporated into the Project.
d. The products consumed during the construction of the Project.
e. The labor and supervision to complete the Project.
f. The equipment, including tools, machinery, and appliances required to complete the Project.
g. The field and home office administration and overhead costs related directly or indirectly to
the Project.
1.02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES AND PAYMENTS
A. Submit a detailed schedule of values for the work to be performed on the project.
1. Submit schedule within 10 days prior to submitting t he first request for payment.
2. Line items in the proposal are to be used as line items in the schedule.
3. Payment will be made on the quantity of Work completed per Contract Documents during the
payment period.
B. Format:
1. Type Schedule on AIA Document G703 - Continuation Sheet for Application and Certificate for
Payment, or use media driven printout upon prior approval.
2. Follow Table of Contents of Project Manual for listing component parts. Identify each line item by
number and title of major Specifications section.
C. Content:
1. List installed value of each major item of Work and each subcontracted item of Work as a
separate line item to serve as a basis for computing values for Progress Payments. Round off
values to nearest dollar.
2. For each major subcontract, list products and operations of that subcontract as separate line
items.
3. List allowances in the specified monetary amount for each allowance.
4. Coordinate listings with Progress Schedule.
5. Include a directly proportional amount of Contractor's general office overhead and profit for each
component listing. Use separate line for bonds, insurance, temporary facilities and controls, and
superintendence.
6. Sum of values listed equals total Contract Sum.
1.03 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01290 - 2
Payment Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with
previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion,
and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement
between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for
Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Architect by the last day of the
month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the 25 day
of the month.
1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by
Architect.
D. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms provided by Owner for Applications for Payment or
use forms acceptable to Architect and Owner for Applications for Payment. Submit forms for
approval with initial submittal of schedule of values.
E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete
applications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule.
Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or
not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of
Application for Payment.
3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last
day of construction period covered by application.
4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project
acceleration.
F. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment
purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-
site and items stored off-site.
1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety
to payment, for stored materials.
2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices.
Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead
and profit on stored materials.
3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:
a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous
Applications for Payment.
b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for
Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment.
c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining
stored as of date of current Application for Payment.
G. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to
Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien
and similar attachments if required.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.
01290 - 3
Payment Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's
lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to
the Work covered by the payment.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after
deduction for retainage, on each item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers.
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
waivers.
4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner.
I. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's
liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by
the previous application.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after
deduction for retainage, on each item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers.
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
waivers.
4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every
entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully
entitled to a lien.
5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms, acceptable to Owner.
J. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. Schedule of values.
2. Schedule of unit prices.
3. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final).
4. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
5. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
6. Copies of building permits.
7. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of
the Work.
8. Initial progress report.
9. Report of preconstruction conference.
10. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
11. Performance and payment bonds.
12. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.
K. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of
Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for
portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for
Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
L. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final
Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted
and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
01290 - 4
Payment Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that
taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
5. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
6. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date
of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for
corresponding elements of the Work.
6. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
(Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
(Not Used)
END OF SECTION
01295 - 1
Schedule of Values
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 01295
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Providing a Schedule of Values to be used as a basis for payments.
B. Paragraph 9.2 - General Conditions.
1.02 SUBMITTAL
A. Submit to Architect a Schedule of Values at least 20 days prior to submitting first Application for
Payment. No payments will be made until schedule is submitted and reviewed in form outlined
below.
B. Upon request by Architect, support values given with such data that will substantiate their
accuracy.
C. Review and resubmittal:
1. After review by Architect, revise and resubmit Schedule as required.
2. Resubmit revised Schedule in same manner.
D. Form of Submittal:
1. Submit typewritten Schedule of Values on AIA Form G702A, "Continuation Sheet" of
Application and Certificate for Payment.
2. Use Table of Contents of this Project Manual as an outline for determining itemized cost of
Divisions 2-32. In general, itemize each division by section titles.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARING SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. In addition to line item costs of sections in Divisions 2 thru 32, furnish line item costs for each of
the following general cost items:
1. Bonds
2. Insurance
3. Field Superintendence
4. Temporary Facilities
5. Allowances (itemized in accordance with Section 01210)
6. Project Close Out
7. Trench Safety
8. Contractors Overhead and General Conditions
9. Contractor’s Fee
10. USE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION SECTIONS from DIVISION 2 thru 16 for LINE ITEMS
11. Mechanical
a. Units
b. Controls
c. Ductwork and Rough-In (by floor)
d. Grilles and Diffusers (by floor)
12. Plumbing
a. Service to Building including meter
b. Rough-In (by floor)
c. Top-out
d. Fixtures (by floor)
13. Fire Protection
01295 - 2
Schedule of Values
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
a. Service of Building
b. Rough-in (by floor)
c. Finish-out (by floor)
14. Electrical
a. Service to Building
b. Switch Gear
c. Wiring, Conduit (by floor)
d. Panels (by floor)
e. Fixtures (by floor)
f. Fire Alarm (by floor)
B. List quantities of materials specified under unit price allowance.
C. Use Schedule of Values only as basis for Contractor's Applications for Payment.
D. Sum of total costs of all items listed in Schedule shall equal total Contract Sum.
END OF SECTION
01310 - 1
Project Management and Coordination
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 01310
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. General coordination procedures.
2. Coordination drawings.
3. Requests for Information (RFIs).
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or
clarifications of the Contract Documents.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design. Include the following information in tabular form:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying
products.
2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key
personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project
site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone
numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide
names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence
of individuals assigned to Project.
1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, on Project Web site, and
by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.
1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or
after its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and
accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
01310 - 2
Project Management and Coordination
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required
for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at
meetings.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of
the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Preparation of the schedule of values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Preinstallation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
8. Startup and adjustment of systems.
D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary
utilities to minimize waste.
1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated
into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated
as Owner's property.
1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in
individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop
Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required
to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.
1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate
and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include
the following information, as applicable:
a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural,
civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.
b. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of
components during the life of the installation.
c. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers,
valves, and other controls.
d. Indicate required installation sequences.
e. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to
be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide
alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor
dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the
Contract.
1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)
A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the
Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.
1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with
no response.
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or
work of subcontractors.
01310 - 3
Project Management and Coordination
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or
interpretation and the following:
1. Project name.
2. Project number.
3. Date.
4. Name of Contractor.
5. Name of Architect.
6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.
7. RFI subject.
8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the
Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
12. Contractor's signature.
13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data,
Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe
items needing interpretation.
a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected
materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.
C. RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above,
acceptable to Architect.
1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.
D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow
seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00
p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.
1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:
a. Requests for approval of submittals.
b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.
d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents.
e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.
2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to
Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures."
a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.
E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.
Submit log weekly. Software log with not less than the following:
1. Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
3. Name and address of Architect.
4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn.
5. RFI description.
6. Date the RFI was submitted.
01310 - 4
Project Management and Coordination
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
7. Date Architect's response was received.
F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response
to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor
disagrees with response.
1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and
Proposal Request, as appropriate.
1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and
agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including
Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before
starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after
execution of the Agreement.
1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority,
Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors;
suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the
conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to
the Work.
3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting
minutes.
C. Pre-installation Conferences: Conduct a pre-installation conference at Project site before each
construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or
affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and
installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect,
and Owner's Commissioning Authority of scheduled meeting dates.
2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a. Options.
b. Related RFIs.
c. Related Change Orders.
d. Purchases.
e. Deliveries.
f. Submittals.
g. Sustainable design requirements.
h. Review of mockups.
i. Possible conflicts.
j. Compatibility requirements.
k. Time schedules.
l. Weather limitations.
m. Manufacturer's written instructions.
n. Warranty requirements.
01310 - 5
Project Management and Coordination
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
o. Compatibility of materials.
p. Acceptability of substrates.
q. Temporary facilities and controls.
r. Space and access limitations.
s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
t. Testing and inspecting requirements.
u. Installation procedures.
v. Coordination with other work.
w. Required performance results.
x. Protection of adjacent work.
y. Protection of construction and personnel.
3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including
required corrective measures and actions.
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties
requiring information.
5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.
Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the
Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time
convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 90 days prior to the scheduled date of
Substantial Completion.
1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project
closeout.
2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority,
Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors;
suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the
meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the
Work.
3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout,
including the following:
a. Preparation of record documents.
b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final
inspection for acceptance.
c. Submittal of written warranties.
d. Requirements for completing sustainable design documentation.
e. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data.
f. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts.
g. Requirements for demonstration and training.
h. Preparation of Contractor's punch list.
i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and
for final payment.
j. Coordination of separate contracts.
k. Owner's partial occupancy requirements.
l. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment.
m. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.
4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.
E. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals.
1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.
01310 - 6
Project Management and Coordination
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to
conclude matters relating to the Work.
3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,
in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind
schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so.
Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and
subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
1) Review schedule for next period.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1) Interface requirements.
2) Status of submittals.
3) Status of sustainable design documentation, including review of action plans.
4) Deliveries.
5) Off-site fabrication.
6) Access.
7) Site utilization.
8) Temporary facilities and controls.
9) Progress cleaning.
10) Quality and work standards.
11) Status of correction of deficient items.
12) Field observations.
13) Status of RFIs.
14) Status of proposal requests.
15) Pending changes.
16) Status of Change Orders.
17) Pending claims and disputes.
18) Documentation of information for payment requests.
4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the
meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
(Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
(Not Used)
END OF SECTION
01320 - 1
Construction Progress Documentation
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 01320
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Related Documents: Provisions established in General and Supplementary Conditions of
the Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively
applicable to this Section.
2. Section Includes:
1. Procedures for preparation and submittal of construction Progress Schedules and
periodical updating.
1.2 PROGRESS SCHEDULES
1. Format:
1. Submit a computer generated, horizontal bar chart with separate line for each
major section of Work or operation, identifying first work day of each week.
2. Sequence of Listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of Work.
3. Scale and Spacing: To provide space for notations and revisions.
4. Sheet Size: Minimum 11 by 17 inches.
2. Content:
1. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and
completion of each element of construction.
2. Identify each item by major Specification section number.
3. Indicate the early and late start, early and late finish, float dates, and duration.
4. Identify work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities.
5. Provide sub-schedules for each stage of Work identified in Section 01100.
6. Provide sub-schedules to define critical portions of entire Schedule.
7. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of
Work completed, as of the first day of each month.
8. Indicate submittal dates required for shop drawings, product data, samples, and
product delivery dates, including those furnished by Owner and under Allowances.
9. Show delivery dates for Owner furnished products and products specified under
Allowances.
10. Coordinate content Schedule of Values specified in Section 01290.
3. Revisions to Schedules:
1. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal, and projected completion
date of each activity.
2. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope, and
other identifiable changes.
3. Provide narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on
Schedule. Report corrective action taken, or proposed, and its effect.
4. Distribution:
1. Distribute copies of reviewed Schedules to job site file, subcontractors, suppliers,
and other concerned entities.
2. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections
shown in Schedules.
01320 - 2
Construction Progress Documentation
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Progress Schedule:
1. Submit initial Schedules within 15 days from Notice to Proceed. After review,
resubmit required revised data within 15 days.
2. Submit revised Progress Schedules with each Application for Payment.
3. Submit the number of opaque reproductions, which Contractor requires, plus 2
copies retained by Architect.
4. Submit under transmittal letter specified in Section 01330.
PART 2 PRODUCTS and PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
01340 - 1
Submittal Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 01340
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural
requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's
responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification
Sections as "action submittals."
B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not
require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with
requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification
Sections as "informational submittals."
C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from
another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An
FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and
external users are able to access files.
D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems
used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent
fixed-layout document format.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates
required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing,
fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making
corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and
reviewing submittals required by those corrections.
1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and
Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals
required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain
orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for
manufacture or fabrication.
3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's
construction schedule.
a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for
submittals.
4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:
a. Scheduled date for first submittal.
b. Specification Section number and title.
c. Submittal category: Action; informational.
d. Name of subcontractor.
01340 - 2
Submittal Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
e. Description of the Work covered.
f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
g. Scheduled date of fabrication.
h. Scheduled dates for purchasing.
i. Scheduled dates for installation.
j. Activity or event number.
1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be
provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings
for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings.
a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data
drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.
b. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement form
acceptable to Owner and Architect.
c. The following digital data files will by furnished for each appropriate discipline:
1) Floor plans.
2) Reflected ceiling plans.
B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and
related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial
submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.
3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification
Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.
4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a. The right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals
until related submittals are received.
C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.
Time for review shall commence on receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will
be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit
processing, including resubmittals.
1. Initial Review: Allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if
coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Will advise Contractor when a submittal
being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as
initial submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 21 days for review of each resubmittal.
4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner,
or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal.
5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may
be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 28 days for
review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to before being returned to Contractor.
01340 - 3
Submittal Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as
follows:
1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal
requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling
navigation to each item.
2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a
decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall
include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A).
3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings
and action taken by Architect.
4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner,
containing the following information:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name and address of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
g. Category and type of submittal.
h. Submittal purpose and description.
i. Specification Section number and title.
j. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of
multiple items.
k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
m. Related physical samples submitted directly.
n. Indication of full or partial submittal.
o. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.
p. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
q. Other necessary identification.
r. Remarks.
5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file
metadata:
a. Project name.
b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
c. Manufacturer name.
d. Product name.
e. .
E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.
F. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's
letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by
Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents,
including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related
submittal.
G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1. Note date and content of previous submittal.
2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision.
01340 - 4
Submittal Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action
stamp.
H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action
submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by
individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification
Sections.
1. Send electronic submittals as PDF electronic files to Architect.
a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic
Project record document file.
2. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.
a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic
Project record document file.
3. Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return two copies.
4. Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise
indicated. Architect will not return copies.
5. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by
an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.
a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates
and certifications where indicated.
b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where
indicated.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are
not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
c. Color charts for full available range of colors.
d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
e. Testing by recognized testing agency.
f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
g. Notation of coordination requirements.
h. Availability and delivery time information.
4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:
a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
01340 - 5
Submittal Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
b. Printed performance curves.
c. Operational range diagrams.
d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop
Drawings.
5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
6. Submit Product Data in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless
submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following
information, as applicable:
a. Identification of products.
b. Schedules.
c. Compliance with specified standards.
d. Notation of coordination requirements.
e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.
3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in
one submittal package.
2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a. Generic description of Sample.
b. Product name and name of manufacturer.
c. Sample source.
d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.
e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.
3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic
submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and
identification information for record.
4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control
comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to
determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification
Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property,
are the property of Contractor.
5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
01340 - 6
Submittal Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern,
texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product
line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.
6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from
same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following:
partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of
materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and
pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.
a. Number of Samples: Submit sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets;
remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project
record sample.
1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication
techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be
demonstrated.
2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or
product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show
approximate limits of variations.
E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary
indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the
following information in tabular form:
1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract
Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.
2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.
3. Number and name of room or space.
4. Location within room or space.
5. Submit product schedule in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100
"Project Management and Coordination."
G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200
"Construction Progress Documentation."
H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section
012900 "Payment Procedures."
I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with
requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."
J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified
in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of
firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact
information of architects and owners, and other information specified.
M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply
with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification
and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel
certified.
01340 - 7
Submittal Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is
authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
O. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of
manufacturing experience where required.
P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
R. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements
in the Contract Documents.
S. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation
of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on
comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
T. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.
Include the following information:
1. Name of evaluation organization.
2. Date of evaluation.
3. Time period when report is in effect.
4. Product and manufacturers' names.
5. Description of product.
6. Test procedures and results.
7. Limitations of use.
U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of
product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before
installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation
needed for adhesion.
W. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests
performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for
compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.
Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.
Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for
calculations. Include page numbers.
2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
01340 - 8
Submittal Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a
written request for additional information to Architect.
B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other
required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file paper copies of certificate, signed
and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically
assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the
Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these
services.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other
Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field
dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700
"Closeout Procedures."
C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of
Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and
approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 ARCHITECT’S ACTION
A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will
mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.
B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it
if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.
C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial
submittals has received prior approval from Architect.
D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned
for resubmittal without review.
E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without
action.
END OF SECTION
01420- 1
References
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 01420
REFERENCES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Related Documents: Provisions established in General and Supplementary Conditions of the
Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to
this Section.
2. Section Includes:
1. Reference standards.
2. Explanation of project manual content.
3. Abbreviations and symbols.
4. Definitions.
5. Metric measurements.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Comply with association, trade, federal, commercial, standards generating organization (such
as ANSI and ASTM), and other similar standards referenced within Specification sections,
except where more explicit or stringent requirements are indicated or required by
Specification or applicable codes.
B. Reference standards include their associated amendments and supplements.
C. Except where a specific date is indicated, date of standard is latest edition in effect at date of
Contract Documents, or date of standard required by code.
D. Reference standards have same force and effect as if bound into or copied directly into
Contract Documents; standards are made a part of Contract Documents by reference.
E. Contractual relationship of parties to the Contract shall not be altered from Contract
Documents by mention or inference otherwise in reference standards.
F. Names and titles of standards are frequently abbreviated. Where acronyms or abbreviations
are used in Specifications, they are defined to mean the recognized name of trade
association, standards generating organization, governing authority, or other entity applicable
to context of text provision.
G. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification
from Architect before proceeding.
H. When indicated by individual Specification section, obtain copy of standard. Maintain copy at
Project site during submittals, planning, and progress of specific work, until Substantial
Completion.
I. Units of measurements required by specifications govern regardless of units of measurement
used in reference standards.
1.3 EXPLANATION OF PROJECT MANUAL CONTENT
A. Section Numbering and Titles: Sections are placed in Project Manual in numeric sequence;
refer to Table of Contents at beginning of Project Manual for complete listing of sections and
titles.
B. Page Numbering: Pages are numbered sequentially within each section. Page number is
shown together with section number at bottom of each page.
C. Project Identification: Project name, architect’s project number and date of Contract
Documents are recorded at bottom of each page to minimize possible misuse or confusion
with other project specifications.
01420- 2
References
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
D. Specifying Methods: Techniques or methods of specifying varies throughout text and may
include "prescriptive," "generic-descriptive," "compliance with standards," "performance,"
"proprietary," or a combination of these.
E. Language:
1. Imperative mood of sentence structure is generally used which places verb as first
word in sentence. Except as otherwise indicated, requirements expressed imperatively
are to be performed by Contractor.
2. In certain circumstances, the language of specifications and other contract documents
are of abbreviated type. It implies words and meanings that will be appropriately
interpreted. Words such as "the," "shall," "shall be," "Contractor shall," "a," "all," "an,"
"any," and other similar words are eliminated.
3. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words will be interpreted as
singular where applicable and where full context of Contract Documents so indicates.
4. The words "shall be" are implied wherever a colon (:) is used within a sentence or
phrase.
F. Trades: Using terms such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities
must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name,
such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to
tradespersons of the corresponding generic name.
G. Specialist Assignments:
1. In certain circumstances, Specification text requires or implies that specific elements of
Work are to be assigned to specialists who must be engaged to perform that element
of Work. Such assignments are special requirements of Contract.
2. Such assignments are intended to establish which party or entity involved in a specific
element of Work is considered as being sufficiently experienced in indicated
construction processes or operations to be recognized as "expert" in those processes
or operations. Nevertheless, ultimate responsibility for fulfilling Contract requirements
remains with Contractor.
3. These requirements should not be interpreted to conflict with enforcement of building
codes and similar regulations governing the Work. They are also not intended to
interfere with local trade union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions.
H. Minimum Quality and Quantity: In every instance, quality level or quantity shown or specified
is intended to be minimum for Work to be performed or provided. Except as otherwise
specifically indicated, actual Work may either comply exactly with that minimum within
specified tolerances, or may exceed that minimum within reasonable limits. In complying with
these requirements, indicated numeric values are either minimums or maximums as noted,
or as appropriate for context of requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for
decision before proceeding.
1.4 ABBREVIATIONS
A. Explanation of metric abbreviations is located in ASTM E 380 Practice for Use of the
International System of Units (SI).
1.5 SYMBOLS
A. List of Symbols:
# Number.
% Percent.
°F Degrees Fahrenheit.
°C Degrees Celsius.
’ Feet.
" Inches.
± Plus to Minus; Plus or Minus.
+/- Plus to Minus; Plus or Minus.
01420- 3
References
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
1.6 DEFINITIONS
A. And: Conjunction indicating that items in a series are to be taken jointly. It may also mean
plus or in addition to the preceding items in the series.
B. Approved: Where used in conjunction with Architect’s response or action, the meaning will
be held to limitations of Architect’s responsibilities and duties as specified in General and
Supplementary Conditions. In no case will Architect’s approval be interpreted as release of
Contractor from responsibilities to fulfill requirements of Contract Documents.
3. Custom Color: Refers to color selection by Architect that is not limited to a manufacturer’s
standard color or a manufacturer’s color that is designated by the manufacturer as “custom”,
“premium” or any other designation. Custom color means any color selected by Architect.
4. Directed, Requested: Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected,"
"approved," "required," "accepted," and "permitted" mean "directed by Architect," "requested
by Architect," and similar phrases. However, no such implied meaning shall be interpreted to
extend Architect’s responsibility into area of construction supervision.
5. Finish: The manner or method of completion. The final appearance of a surface, including
texture, smoothness, sheen, and color, after finishing operations have been performed.
Finishing operations include preparation of substrate and application, curing, and protection
of specified finish materials.
6. Furnish: Means to supply, purchase, procure and deliver complete with related accessories,
ready for assembly, application, installation, and similar operations, as applicable in each
instance.
7. Indicated: Refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on Drawings, or other
paragraphs or Schedules in Specifications, and similar requirements in Contract Documents.
Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used to help reader locate
the reference. Location is not limited.
8. Install: Means to construct, assemble, erect, mount, anchor, place, connect, apply and
similar operations, complete with related accessories, as applicable in each instance,
connected, operable, and ready for service or intended use.
9. Installer: Entity (person or firm) engaged to perform a particular unit of Work at Project site,
including installation, erection, application, repair, patching, and similar required operations.
Such entities must be experienced in operations they are engaged to perform.
10. Or: Used to introduce any of the possibilities in a series. Items in the series are not required
to be taken jointly. It does not mean that individual items in the series are optional
requirements.
11. Product: Includes natural and manufactured materials, components, machinery, fixtures,
equipment, devices, furnishings, systems, and their associated accessories to be
incorporated into the Work.
12. Provide: Means to furnish and install, complete and ready for operations and use for
purpose intended.
13. Regulations: Includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities
having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within construction industry
that control performance of the Work.
14. Similar: Interpreted in its general sense and not as meaning identical. Elements defined as
"similar" shall be coordinated in relationship to their location and connection with other parts
of the Work.
15. True to Line, Plumb, Level, and Flat: Install Work within following tolerances, except where
indicated otherwise:
1. True to line: Allowed deviation from straight line within plus or minus 2 mm (1/16 inch)
in 300 mm (1 foot); plus or minus 3 mm (1/8 inch) in 3000 mm (10 feet); plus or minus
6 mm (1/4 inch) in 6000 mm (20 feet); and plus or minus 10 mm (3/8 inch) in lengths
over 6000 mm (20 feet).
01420- 4
References
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
2. Level: Allowed deviation from horizontal plane within plus or minus 2 mm (1/16 inch) in
300 mm (one foot); plus or minus 3 mm (1/8 inch) in 3000 mm (10 feet); plus or minus
6 mm (1/4 inch) in 6000 mm (20 feet); and plus or minus 13 mm (1/2 inch) in lengths
over 6000 mm (20 feet).
3. Plumb: Allowed deviation from vertical plane within plus or minus 2 mm (1/16 inch) in
300 mm (one foot); plus or minus 3 mm (1/8 inch) in 3000 mm (10 feet); plus or minus
6 mm (1/4 inch) in 6000 mm (20 feet); and plus or minus 13 mm (1/2 inch) in lengths
over 6000 mm (20 feet).
4. Flat: Allowed deviation from flat plane in any planar direction within plus or minus 2
mm (1/16 inch) in 300 mm (1 foot); plus or minus 3 mm (1/8 inch) in 3000 mm (10
feet); plus or minus 6 mm (1/4 inch) in 6000 mm (20 feet); and plus or minus 10 mm
(3/8 inch) in lengths over 6000 mm (20 feet).
5. Tolerances are not accumulative.
1.7 METRIC MEASUREMENTS
A. Specifications contain metric units of measurement and conventional inch-pound units of
measurement.
B. When specifications contain metric and inch-pound measurements, inch-pound
measurements are shown in parentheses.
C. Governance of metric and inch-pound measurements, when both appear in individual
specification sections:
1. When Drawings use inch-pound units of measurement, inch-pound measurements
govern over metric measurements; metric measurements are for information only.
2. When Drawings use metric units of measurement, metric measurements govern over
inch-pound measurements; inch-pound measurements are for information only.
3. When metric measurements appear without corresponding inch-pound measurements,
metric measurements govern.
4. When inch-pound measurements appear without corresponding metric measurements,
inch-pound measurements govern.
PART 2 PRODUCTS and PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
01421 - 1
Structural Testing / Inspection Agency Service
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction March 18, 2019
SECTION 01421
STRUCTURAL TESTING I INSPECTION AGENCY SERVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, Division 1 Specifications, and General Provisions and General and
Supplemental Conditions of the Contract apply to work of this section.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. The testing laboratory shall make all inspections and perform all tests in accordance with the
building code, local authorities, ASTM specifications and the Contract Documents.
B. Materials and workmanship not meeting the required standards are to be removed and
replaced. Replacement and subsequent testing shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
C. Testing, inspection, and certifications specified in other sections of these Specifications shall
be paid by the Contractor, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Inspection by the laboratory shall not relieve the Contractor or Fabricator of his responsibility
to furnish materials and workmanship in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.03 SELECTION AND PAYMENT
A. Owner will designate an independent testing laboratory to perform the inspection and testing
service as specified in this section.
B. Payment will be by the Owner under a separate contract.
1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. The latest adopted edition of all standards referenced in this Section shall apply, unless noted
otherwise. In case of conflict between these Contract Documents and a referenced standard,
the Contract Documents shall govern. In case of conflict between these Contract Documents
and the Building Code, the more stringent shall govern.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Laboratory shall meet the requirements of ASTM E329 and ASTM E543.
B. Testing Laboratory shall be insured against errors and omissions by a professional liability
insurance policy having a limit of liability not less than $500,000.
C. Testing Laboratory shall be under the direction of a Registered Engineer who is legally
authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where Project is located and having at least five years
experience in inspection and testing of construction materials.
D. Laboratory staff monitoring concrete work shall be ACI certified inspectors.
E.Laboratory staff performing structural steel inspection shall be currently certified AWS Certified
Welding Inspectors (CWI), in accordance with the provisions of AWS QCI, "Standard and
01421 - 2
Structural Testing / Inspection Agency Service
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction March 18, 2019
Guide for Qualification and Certification of Welding Inspectors". The inspector may be
supported by assistant inspectors who may perform specific inspection functions under the
supervision of the inspector.
F.Assistant inspectors shall be currently certified AWS Certified Associate Welding Inspectors
(CAWI). The work of the assistant inspectors shall be regularly monitored by the inspector,
generally on a daily basis.
G. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable
to either National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants.
1.06 LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings as required to coordinate work with
the Contractor and address quality control issues.
B. Test samples of design mixes submitted by Contractor.
C. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect/Engineer and Contractor in
performance of services.
D. Perform specified inspecting, sampling, and testing of Products in accordance with specified
standards.
E. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.
F. Promptly notify Architect/Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-
conformance of Work or Materials.
G. Perform all inspections and tests in accordance with building code requirements for "Special
Inspection" whether or not such inspections are specified in the Contract Documents.
1.07 LABORATORY REPORTS
A. After each inspection and test, promptly submit copies of laboratory reports to Architect,
Engineer, Owner and to Contractor.
1. Include:
2. Date issued
3. Project title and number
4. Name of inspector
5. Date and time of sampling or inspection
6. Identification of product and specifications section
7. Location in the Project
8. Type of inspection or test
9. Date of test
10. Results of tests
11.Conformance with Contract Documents
1.08 LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY
A. Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
B. Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work, except where such approval is
specifically called for in these specifications.
C. Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor.
D. Laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.
1.09 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
01421 - 3
Structural Testing / Inspection Agency Service
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction March 18, 2019
A. See technical sections of these specifications for specific requirements.
B. Deliver to the laboratory, without cost to the Owner, adequate samples of materials proposed
for use which are required to be tested.
C. Advise laboratory sufficiently in advance of construction operations to allow laboratory to
complete any required checks or tests and to assign personnel for field inspection and testing
as specified.
D. Provide facilities for safe storage and proper curing of concrete test samples on project site for
the first 24 hours and also for subsequent field curing as required by ASTM specifications
C31.
E. Provide incidental labor and equipment as required to assist laboratory personnel in obtaining
and handling samples at the site and in accessing work for inspection.
F. Furnish concrete mix designs, in accordance with ACI 301, section 3.9, made by an
independent testing laboratory or qualified concrete supplier. Where mix designs are required,
the laboratory shall be selected and paid by the Contractor.
G. Provide current welder certifications for each welder to be employed.
H. Furnish fabrication and erection inspection of all welds in accordance with AWS D1.1, Chapter
6.
I. Prequalification of all welding procedures to be used in executing the work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
(NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PIER DRILLING
A. A representative of the Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer shall provide the services specified in
this section.
B. The laboratory representative shall make continuous inspections to determine that the proper
bearing stratum is obtained and that shafts are clean and dry before placing concrete.
3.02 CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL AND EMBEDDED METAL ASSEMBLIES
A. Inspect all concrete reinforcing steel prior to placing of concrete for compliance with the
Contract Documents and approved shop drawings. All instances of noncompliance shall be
immediately brought to the attention of the Contractor for correction. If uncorrected by the
Contractor, they shall be listed in the report.
B. Observe and report on the following:
1. Number and size of bars.
2. Bending and lengths of bars.
3. Splicing.
4. Clearance to forms including chair heights.
5. Clearance between bars or spacing.
6. Rust, form oil, and other contamination.
01421 - 4
Structural Testing / Inspection Agency Service
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction March 18, 2019
7. Grade of Steel.
8. Securing, tying and chairing of bars.
9. Excessive congestion of reinforcing steel.
10. Installation of anchor bolts and placement of concrete around anchor bolts.
11. Fabrication and installation of embedded metal assemblies, including visual inspection
of all welds.
12. Visually inspect studs and deformed bar anchors on embedded assemblies for
compliance with Contract Documents.
C. Provide a qualified, experienced inspector to inspect reinforcing steel. Inspector shall have a
minimum of three years experience inspecting reinforcing steel in projects of similar size.
3.03 CONCRETE INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Secure composite samples of concrete at the jobsite in accordance with ASTM C172.
B. Mold and cure three specimens from each sample in accordance with ASTM C31. The test
cylinders shall be stored in the field 24 hours and then carefully transported to the laboratory
and cured in accordance with ASTM C31.
C. Test specimens in accordance with ASTM C39. Two specimens shall be tested at 28 days for
acceptance and one shall be tested at seven days for information.
D. Make one strength test (three cylinders) for each 100 cubic yards or fraction thereof, of each
mix
design placed in one day.
E. Make one slump test for each set of cylinders following the procedural requirements of ASTM
C143 and ASTM C172. Make additional slump tests whenever the consistency of the concrete
appears to vary. Do not permit placement of concrete having measured slump outside the
limits given on the drawings, except when approved by the Architect. Slump tests
corresponding to samples from which strength tests are made shall be reported with the
strength test results. Other slump tests need not be reported.
F. Determine total air content of air entrained normal-weight concrete sample for each strength
test in accordance with ASTM C231 .
G. Determine air content and unit weight of lightweight concrete sample for each strength test in
accordance with ASTM C173 and ASTM C567.
H. Determine temperature of concrete IN Accordance with ASTM C1064. Take one test hourly
when temperature is 40 deg F and below. Take one test for each set of compressive strength
tests when temperature is 80 deg F and above.
I. Monitor the addition of water at the jobsite and the length of time the concrete is allowed to
remain in the truck before placement. Report any significant deviation from the approved mix
design and the project requirements to the Architect, the Contractor, and the Concrete
Supplier.
J. Monitor the slump and air content of the concrete. If the measured slump or air content of air
entrained concrete falls outside the specified limits, a check test shall be made immediately on
another portion of the same sample. In the event of a second failure, the concrete shall be
considered to have failed to meet the project requirements and specifications, and shall be
rejected.
K. The testing laboratory shall certify each delivery ticket indicating class of concrete delivered
01421 - 5
Structural Testing / Inspection Agency Service
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction March 18, 2019
(or
placed), amount of water added and the time at which the cement and aggregate was
dispensed into the truck, and the time at which concrete was discharged from the truck.
L. Laboratory reports shall contain the following information:
1. Class of concrete and specific location.
2. Specified strength of concrete.
3. Air temperature.
4. Batch time.
5. Specified time that discharge of concrete must be completed, based on air
temperature.
6. Time concrete is placed.
7. Amount of water withheld at the plant for latter addition at the project site (Note that
the total amount of water shall not exceed the maximum water/cement ratio for the
approved mix design.)
8. Amount of water added at the site.
9. Allowable slump range on the approved mix design
10. Slump.
11. Maximum and minimum allowable concrete temperature on the approved mix design.
12. Temperature of the concrete mix.
13. Air content range on the approved mix design.
14. Air content.
15. Statement that concrete is in compliance with the project documents and the
approved mix designs.
M. Evaluation and Acceptance: The strength level of the concrete will be considered satisfactory
if the averages of all sets of three consecutive strength test results are equal to or exceed the
specified strength and no individual test result (average of two cylinders) is below the
specified strength by more than 500 psi. Completed concrete work will be accepted when the
requirements of "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings," ACI 301, Chapter 18
have been met.
N. Observe the placing of all concrete, except non structural slabs-on-grade and site work.
Observe and report on placing method, consolidation, cold joints, length of drop and
displacement of reinforcing. Report deficiencies to the Contractor immediately for corrective
action. Inspections may be reduced to a periodic basis when all procedures have been
deemed satisfactory by the laboratory.
O. Comply with ACI311, "Guide For Concrete Inspection" and "ACI Manual of Concrete
Inspection" (SP- 2).
P. Inspect the application of curing compound and monitor all curing conditions to assure
compliance with Specification requirements. Report curing deficiencies to the Contractor
immediately and submit a report to the Architect.
3.04 TESTING OF NON-SHRINK GROUT
A. Make one strength test for every 10 base plates grouted and for every 10 bags of grout used
in joints between members.
B. Each test shall consist of four cubes, two to be tested at seven days, and two at 28 days,
made and tested in accordance with ASTM C109, with the exception that the grout shall be
restrained from expansion by a top plate.
3.05 EPOXY MORTAR
01421 - 6
Structural Testing / Inspection Agency Service
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction March 18, 2019
A. Receive and evaluate all proposed epoxy mortar mix designs submitted by the Contractor. If
the mix designs comply with the Drawings, Specifications and the manufacturer's
recommendations, the laboratory shall submit a report to the Architect stating acceptability of
the mix. Mix designs not in compliance shall be returned to the laboratory as unacceptable.
B. Make one strength test for every 10 mortar applications. No less than one test for each day's
production shall be made.
C. Each test shall consist of four cubes, two to be tested at seven days, and two to be tested at
28 days, made and tested in accordance with ASTM C109.
3.06 MASONRY
A. Inspection
1. Provide a qualified inspector to inspect all structural masonry work.
2. Inspect masonry, on a periodic basis, for compliance with the contract documents and
the building code. Inspect the work in progress at least once for each 5000 square
feet of wall laid, but not less than once each day.
3. In combination with inspections required by the building code, inspect the following:
a. Preparation of masonry prisms for testing.
b. Placement of reinforcing.
c. Cavities to be grouted (prior to grouting and prior to closing cleanouts, if any).
d. Mortar mixing operations, including proportion of materials and method of
measuring materials (materials should be measured with a mixing box and not
a shovel).
e. Bedding of mortar for each type of unit and placing of units.
f. Grouting operations.
g. Condition of units before laying for excessive absorption.
4. Provide report of each inspection.
B. Field Compressive Tests for Grout:
1. Secure composite samples of grout at the jobsite in accordance with ASTM C 1019.
2. Mold and cure three specimens from each sample in accordance with ASTM C 1019.
Supervise the curing protection provided (by others) for test specimens in the field
and the transportation from the field to the laboratory. The test specimens shall be
stored in the field 24 to 48 hours and then be carefully transported to the laboratory
and cured in accordance with ASTM C 1019.
3. Test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 1019. Two specimens shall be tested at
28
days for acceptance and one specimen shall be tested at 7 days for information.
4. Make one strength test (three specimens) for each 10 cubic yards of grout poured but
not less than one strength test for each 5000 square feet of wall area.
C. Prism Tests:
1. Build prisms at the jobsite using the same materials and methods as being used for
the wall construction. Store prisms in a place where they will be undisturbed for two
days and have approximately same curing conditions as masonry construction. After
48 hours, move prisms to the laboratory and test in accordance with ASTM C1314.
2. Make prism tests in advance of operations using materials under same conditions,
with the same bonding and construction methods as is being used for the structure.
When building prisms, moisture content of the units at time of laying, consistency of
mortar and width and thickness of mortar joints shall be same as used in the structure.
3. Build prisms of hollow masonry units the same width as unit by 16" long by 16" high.
Apply mortar to face shells only. Do not fill hollow core with grout. Compute value of
ultimate net compressive strength, by dividing ultimate load by net face shell area of
01421 - 7
Structural Testing / Inspection Agency Service
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction March 18, 2019
masonry units.
4. Build brick prisms one brick width and length in plan and five bricks high, using full
bed joints as specified. Compute ultimate compressive strength by dividing ultimate
load by gross area of the bricks.
5. Cure and test prisms in accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM C1314. Test
five specimens of each type of masonry unit before delivering material to the jobsite
and submit results for approval. During construction, test three specimens of each
type of masonry unit for each 5000 square feet of wall placed.
6. The prisms shall be tested after 28 days, but may be tested at seven days provided
the
relationship between seven and 28 day strengths has been established for the
materials used prior to the start of construction.
7. When the average strength of a set of prisms falls below the specified compressive
strength (fm), the masonry corresponding to the test shall be deemed unacceptable.
In such a case, notify the Architect and Contractor immediately.
3.07 STRUCTURAL STEEL
A. Inspect all structural steel during fabrication and during and after erection for conformance
with
Contract Documents and shop drawings.
B. Field Inspection:
1. Proper erection of all pieces.
2. Proper installation of all bolts, including the checking of calibration of impact wrenches
used with high strength bolts.
3. Plumbness of structure and proper bracing.
4. Field Painting.
5. Visual examination of all field welding.
6. Ultrasonic testing of all penetration welds.
7. Installation offield welded shear studs.
8. Measure and record camber of all beams upon arrival and before erection for
compliance with the specified camber. Measure lying flat with web in horizontal
position. Members outside specified camber tolerance shall be returned to the shop
for remedial work.
C. Qualification of Welders:
D. Fabricator and erector shall provide the testing laboratory with names of welders to be
employed in the work, together with certification that welders have passed qualification tests
within the last year using procedures specified in the AWS 01.1. Testing laboratory shall verify
all welder's qualifications.
E. Inspection of shop and field welding shall be "verification inspection," in accordance with
Section 6 of AWS 01.1 and as follows:
1. Visually inspect the welding of all shop fabricated members and note the location of all
cover plates, connectors, bearing stiffeners, splices, and fillet welds for proper return
around ends and check for seams, folds, and delamination.
2.Ultrasonically test all penetration welds in accordance with AWS 01.1.
3. Inspect surfaces to be welded. Surface preparations, fit-up and cleanliness of surface
shall be noted.
4.The welding inspector shall be present during alignment and fit-up of members being
welded, and shall check for correct surface preparation of root openings, sound weld
metal, and proper penetration in the root pass. Where weld has not penetrated
completely, the inspector shall order the joint to be chipped down to sound metal, or
01421 - 8
Structural Testing / Inspection Agency Service
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction March 18, 2019
gouged out and re-welded. Root passes shall be thoroughly inspected for cracks. All
cracks shall be gouged out and re-welded to two inches beyond each end of crack.
5. The inspector shall check that a/l welds have been marked with the welders symbol.
The
inspector shall mark the welds requiring repairs and shall make a re-inspection. The
inspector shall maintain a written record of all welds. Work completed and inspected
shall receive an identification mark by the inspector.
6. The testing laboratory shall advise the Owner and the Architect of any shop and/or
field
conditions which, in his opinion, may require further tests and examination by means
other than those specified. Such further tests and examinations shall be performed as
authorized by the Owner and the Architect.
7.The Owner reserves the right to use ultrasonic or radiographic inspection to verify the
adequacy of all welds. Testing procedures and acceptance criteria shall be as
specified in AWS 01.1.
F. Inspection of bolted construction shall be in accordance with AISC "Specification for Structural
Steel Buildings" and as follows:
1. All bolts shall be visually inspected to ensure that the plies have been brought into
snug
contact.
2. High strength bolting shall be inspected in accordance with Section 9 of the AISC
"Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts."
3. For all high strength bolts, unless specifically noted on the Drawings to require only
"snug- tight" installation, the inspector shall observe the required jobsite testing and
calibration, and shall confirm that the procedure to be used provides the required
tension.
4. For slip critical connections, inspect the contact surfaces for compliance with
specifications prior to bolting.
3.08 EXPANSION BOLT INSTALLATION
A. Inspect the drilling of each hole and installation of each expansion bolt for compliance with the
Contract Documents.
B. Verify the installation torque for each expansion bolt for compliance with manufacturer's
installation instructions.
3.09 STEEL ROOF DECK
A. Field inspection shall consist of the following:
B. Checking types, gauges, and finishes for conformance with the Contract Documents and Shop
Drawings.
C. Examination for proper erection of all metal deck, including fastenings at supports and
sidelaps,
reinforcing of holes, and miscellaneous deck supports.
D. Certification of welders.
E. Visual inspection of at least 25 percent of all welds.
3.10 COLD FORMED FRAMING
Field inspection shall consist of the following:
A. Checking types, gauges, and finishes for conformance with the Contract Documents and Shop
Drawings.
B. Examination for proper erection of all cold formed framing in walls and roofs, including
01421 - 9
Structural Testing / Inspection Agency Service
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction March 18, 2019
fastenings at supports.
C. Certification of welders.
D. Visual inspection of at least 25 percent of all welds.
E. Proper erection of all pieces.
F. Proper installation of all connections.
G. Plumbness of structure and proper bracing.
END OF SECTION 01421
01450 - 1
Quality Control
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 01450
QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Related Documents: Provisions established in General and Supplementary Conditions of
the Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively
applicable to this Section.
2. Section Includes:
1. Quality control of products and workmanship.
2. Manufacturer's instructions.
3. Manufacturer's certificates and field services.
4. Mockups.
5. Field samples.
6. Owner provided testing laboratory services.
7. Selection and payment.
8. Laboratory responsibilities.
9. Laboratory reports.
10. Limits on testing laboratory authority.
11. Contractor responsibilities.
12. Schedule of inspections and tests.
1.2 DESCRIPTION
1. Maintain quality control over supervision, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers,
products, services, workmanship, and site conditions, to produce Work in accordance
with Contract Documents.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1. Workmanship:
1. Comply with industry standards of the region except when more restrictive
tolerances or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise
workmanship.
2. Provide suitably qualified personnel to produce Work of specified quality.
3. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to
withstand stresses, vibration, and racking.
4. Provide finishes to match approved samples.
2. Manufacturer's Instructions:
1. Require compliance with instructions in full detail, including each step in sequence.
2. Should instruction conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from
Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
3. Manufacturer's Certificates:
1. When required in individual Specifications section, submit manufacturer's
certificate, in duplicate, certifying that products meet or exceed specified
requirements, executed by responsible officer.
4. Manufacturer's Field Services:
1. When required in individual Specifications section, have manufacturer or his
authorized representative provide qualified representative to observe field
conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up
of equipment test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, and to make
written report of observations and recommendations to Architect.
01450 - 2
Quality Control
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
2. Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to
applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written
instructions.
3. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Architect/Engineer for
review.
1.4 MOCKUPS
1. Perform tests under provisions of this Section and requirements within individual
specification sections.
2. Assemble and erect complete, with specified attachment and anchorage devices,
flashings, seals, and finishes.
3. Acceptable mockups in place may be retained in completed Work.
4. Remove mockup and clear area when work of that section is complete, when approved
by Architect.
1.5 FIELD SAMPLES
1. Install field samples at the site as required by individual specifications Sections for
review.
2. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the Work.
3. Where field sample is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area after
Architect has accepted field sample.
1.6 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
1. Selection and Payment:
1.Owner will employ services of an independent testing laboratory to perform
specified inspection and testing.
2. Employment of testing laboratory in no way relieves obligation to perform Work in
accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. Contractor will pay any re-
testing required by the Architect or local authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Laboratory:
1. Comply with requirements of ANSI/ASTM E 329 and ANSI/ASTM D 3740.
2. Maintain a full-time registered Engineer on staff to review services.
3. Authorized to operate in State in which Project is located.
4. Calibrate testing equipment once each year with devices of an accuracy traceable
to either NBS Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants.
5. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor.
6. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Contractor and Architect in
performance of services.
7. Perform specified inspection, sampling, and testing of products in accordance with
specified standards.
8. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract
Documents.
9. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or
non-conformance of Work or products.
10. Perform additional inspections and tests required by Architect.
11. Attend Preconstruction Conference.
3. Laboratory Reports:
1. After each inspection and test, promptly submit 2 copies of laboratory report to
Architect and one to the applicable consultant and one to Contractor.
2. Include: Date issued, project title and number, name of inspector, date and time of
sampling or inspection, identification of product and Specifications section, location
in the Project, type of inspection or test, date of test, results of tests, and
conformance with Contract Documents.
3. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of test results.
01450 - 3
Quality Control
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
4. Limits on Testing Laboratory Authority:
1. May not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.
2. May not approve or accept any portion of the Work.
3. May not assume any duties of Contractor.
4. Has no authority to stop Work.
1.7 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
1. Deliver to laboratory at designated location adequate samples of materials proposed to
be used, which require testing, together with proposed mix designs.
2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to Work and to manufacturer's
facilities.
3. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to work to be tested, to obtain
and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested, to facilitate tests
and inspections, and for storage and curing of test samples.
4. Notify laboratory of material sources and furnish necessary quantities of representative
samples of materials proposed for use which are required to be tested.
5. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring
inspection and testing services.
6. Advise laboratory in a timely fashion to complete required inspection and testing prior to
subsequent work being performed.
7. Pay for subsequent re-testing of products or systems found to be defective or otherwise
not in accordance with specification requirements. Remove rejected products and
replace with products of specified quality.
PART 2 PRODUCTS and PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
01600- 1
Materials and Equipment
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 01600
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Related Documents: Provisions established in General and Supplementary Conditions of the
Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to
this Section.
2. Section Includes:
1. Administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's selection of
products for use in the Project.
2. Packaging, transportation, delivery, receiving, storage, protection and other product
handling requirements.
3. Product options and substitutions including:
1) Contractor's options in selection of products.
2) Products list.
3) Requests for substitution of products.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change the meaning of other terms used in
the Contract Documents, such as "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes,"
"accessories," and similar terms. Such terms are self-explanatory and have well recognized
meanings in the construction industry.
1. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased for
the Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the
terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1) "Named Products" are items identified by manufacturer's product name, including
make or model designation, indicated in the manufacturer's published product
literature, that is current as of the date of the Contract Documents.
2. "Materials" are products that are substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished,
refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work.
3. "Equipment", is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually
operated, that requires service connections such as wiring or piping.
1.3 PRODUCT LIST
1. Prepare a schedule showing products specified in a tabular form acceptable to the Architect.
Include generic names of products required. Include the manufacturer's name and
proprietary product names for each item listed.
2. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or
catalog designation, and reference standards.
3. Coordinate the product list schedule with the Contractor's Construction Schedule.
4. Form: Prepare the product listing schedule with information on each item tabulated under
the following column headings:
1. Related Specification Section number.
2. Generic name used in Contract Documents.
3. Proprietary name, model number and similar designations.
4. Manufacturer's name and address.
5. Supplier's name and address.
6. Installer's name and address.
01600- 2
Materials and Equipment
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
7. Projected delivery date, or time span of delivery period.
5. Initial Submittal:
1. Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of an initial
product list schedule.
2. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data, and for known variations from
Contract requirements.
3. At the Contractor's option, the initial submittal may be limited to product selections and
designations that must be established early in the Contract period.
6. Completed Schedule:
1. Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of the
completed product list schedule.
2. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data, and for known variations from
Contract requirements.
7. Architect's Action:
1. Architect will respond in writing to the Contractor within 2 weeks of receipt of the
completed product list schedule.
2. No response within this time period constitutes no objection to listed manufacturers or
products, but does not constitute a waiver of the requirement that products comply with
Contract Documents.
3. The Architect's response will include the following:
1) A list of unacceptable product selections, containing a brief explanation of
reasons for this action.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind, from a
single source.
1. When specified products are available only from sources that do not or cannot produce
a quantity adequate to complete project requirements in a timely manner, consult with
the Architect for a determination of the most important product qualities before
proceeding. Qualities may include attributes relating to visual appearance, strength,
durability, or compatibility. When a determination has been made, select products from
sources that product products that possess these qualities, to the fullest extent
possible.
2. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between two
or more products for use on the Project, the product selected shall be compatible with
products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
3. Nameplates: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint
manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products
which will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior.
1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface or, where
required for observation after installation, on an accessible surface that is not
conspicuous.
2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of
service-connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessible
surface which is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. The nameplate shall contain the
following information and other essential operating data:
1) Name of product and manufacturer.
2) Model and serial number.
3) Capacity.
4) Speed.
5) Ratings.
4. Matching of Colors:
01600- 3
Materials and Equipment
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
1. When a product is listed in the specifications with an accompanying color, pattern,
texture, or sheen, provide only that product, or one that is identical in color, pattern,
texture, and sheen to the product specified, regardless if the color, pattern, texture, or
sheen of the alternate manufacturer's product is a standard or option.
2. On finished materials and products, verify that colors, patterns, textures, and sheens
are identical for the entire project and that there are no visual differences between
batches, packages, bundles, or shipments, due to differing production runs. Architect
reserves the right to reject products and materials installed, which have, in the sole
opinion of the Architect, a significant enough difference in color, pattern, texture, or
sheen, from other products on the project, so as to be visually distracting.
1.5 OPTIONS
1. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting
those standards.
2. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions:
Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not specifically named within time
frame specified herein.
3. Products Specified by Naming Several Manufacturers: Products of named manufacturers
meeting specifications; no options, no substitutions.
4. Products Specified by Naming Only One Manufacturer: No option; no substitution allowed.
1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS
1. Limitations:
1. During Bidding period, Instructions to Bidders govern times for submitting requests for
substitutions under requirements specified in this Section.
2. Requests for substitutions of products will be considered only within 30 days after date
established in Notice to Proceed. Subsequent requests will be considered only in case
of product unavailability or other conditions beyond control of Contractor.
3. Substitutions will not be considered:
1) When indicated on shop drawings or product data submittal without separate
formal request.
2) When requested directly by subcontractor or supplier.
3) When acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents.
4. Do not order or install proposed substitute products without written acceptance.
5. Only one request for substitution for each product will be considered. When
substitution is not accepted, provide specified product.
6. Architect will determine acceptability of substitutions.
2. Requests for Substitutions:
1. Submit separate request for each substitution. Document each request with complete
data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with requirements of Contract
Documents. Utilize substitution request form attached.
2. Identify product by Specifications section and Article numbers. Provide manufacturer's
name and address, trade name of product, and model or catalog number. List
fabricators and suppliers as appropriate.
3. Attach product data as specified in Section 01330.
4. List similar projects using product, dates of installation, and names of Architect and
Owner.
5. Give itemized comparison of proposed substitution with specified product, listing
variations, and reference to Specifications section and Article numbers.
6. Give quality and performance comparison between proposed substitution and the
specified product.
01600- 4
Materials and Equipment
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
7. Give cost data comparing proposed substitution with specified product, and amount of
net change to Contract Sum.
8. List availability of maintenance services and replacement materials.
9. State effect of substitution on construction schedule, and changes required in other
work or products.
3. Contractor Representation:
1. Request for substitution constitutes a representation that Contractor has investigated
proposed product and has determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to
specified product or that the cost reduction offered, if any, is ample justification for
accepting the offered substitution.
2. Provide same warranty for substitution as for specified product.
3. Coordinate installation of accepted substitute, making such changes as may be
required for Work to be complete in all respects.
4. Certifies that cost data presented is complete and includes related costs under this
Contract.
5. Waives claims for additional costs related to substitution which may later become
apparent.
4. Submittal Procedures:
1. Submit 3 copies of request for substitution.
2. Architect will review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable
promptness.
3. During the bidding period, Architect will record acceptable substitutions in Addenda.
4. After award of Contract, Architect will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept
or reject requested substitution, generally within 14 days.
5. For accepted products, submit shop drawings, product data, and samples under
provisions of Section 01330.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION
1. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, unused at the time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with all accessories, trim, finish, safety guards and other
devices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and
effect.
2. Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have
been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.
2. Product Selection Procedures: Product selection is governed by the Contract Documents
and governing regulations, not by previous Project experience. Procedures governing
product selection include the following:
1. Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where only a single product or manufacturer
is named, provide the product indicated. No substitutions will be permitted.
2. Semi-Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where two or more products or
manufacturers are named, provide one of the products indicated. No substitutions will
be permitted.
1) Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, comply with the
Contract Document provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for
use of an unnamed product.
3. Non-Proprietary Specifications: When the Specifications list products or manufacturers
that are available and may be incorporated in the Work, but do not restrict the
Contractor to use of these products only, the Contractor may propose any available
01600- 5
Materials and Equipment
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
product that complies with Contract requirements. Comply with Contract Document
provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
4. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product or
assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use of a brand or trade
name, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise
complies with Contract requirements.
5. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance
with performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements,
and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. General
overall performance of a product is implied where the product is specified for a specific
application.
1) Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product
literature, or by the manufacturer's certification of performance.
6. Compliance with Standards, Codes and Regulations: Where the Specifications only
require compliance with an imposed code, standard or regulation, select a product that
complies with the standards, codes or regulations specified.
7. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, the
Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily.
1) Where no product available within the specified category matches satisfactorily
and also complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of
the Contract Documents concerning "substitutions" for selection of a matching
product in another product category, or for noncompliance with specified
requirements.
8. Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase "...as
selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures..." or a similar phrase,
select a product and manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements.
The Architect will select the color, pattern and texture from the product line selected.
9. Allowances: Refer to individual Specification Sections and "Allowance" provisions in
Division 1 for allowances that control product selection, and for procedures required for
processing such selections.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PACKAGING AND TRANSPORTATION
1. Require supplier to package products in boxes or crates for protection during shipment,
handling, and storage. Protect sensitive products against exposure to elements and
moisture.
2. Protect sensitive equipment and finishes against impact, abrasion, and other damage.
3.2 DELIVERY, RECEIVING, AND HANDLING
1. Deliver, receive, and handle products in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration and
loss, including theft
2. Delivery:
1. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with construction progress schedules.
Allow time for inspection prior to installation.
2. Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflict with Work and conditions at site; work of Owner;
limitations on storage space; availability of personnel and handling equipment; and
Owner's use of premises.
3. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at site and to prevent overcrowding of
construction spaces.
01600- 6
Materials and Equipment
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
4. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft and other
losses.
5. Deliver products in undamaged, dry condition, in original unopened containers or
packaging with identifying labels intact and legible, complete with labels and
instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting and installing.
6. Clearly mark partial deliveries of component parts of equipment to identify equipment
and contents to permit easy accumulation of parts and to facilitate assembly.
3. Receiving and Handling:
1. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products, including those provided by
Owner, by methods to prevent soiling and damage.
2. Provide additional protection during handling to prevent marring and otherwise
damaging products, packaging, and surrounding surfaces.
3. Handle product by methods to avoid bending or overstressing. Lift large and heavy
components only at designated lift points.
4. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipment to assure:
1) Product complies with requirements of Contract Documents and reviewed
submittal.
2) Quantities are correct.
3) Accessories and installation hardware are correct.
4) Containers and packages are intact and labels legible.
5) Products are protected and undamaged.
3.3 STORAGE
1. General:
1. Store products, immediately on delivery, in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions, with seals and labels intact. Protect until installed.
2. Arrange storage in a manner to provide access for maintenance of stored items and for
inspection.
3. Store heavy materials away from the Project structure in a manner that will not
endanger the supporting construction.
2. Enclosed Storage:
1. Store products, subject to damage by the elements, in substantial weathertight
enclosures.
2. Maintain temperature and humidity within ranges stated in manufacturer's instructions.
3. Provide humidity control and ventilation for sensitive products as required by
manufacturer's instructions.
4. Store unpacked and loose products on shelves, in bins, or in neat groups of like items.
3. Exterior Storage:
1. Provide substantial platforms, blocking, or skids, to support fabricated products above
ground; slope to provide drainage. Protect products from soiling and staining.
2. For products subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the elements,
cover with impervious sheet material. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation.
3. Store loose granular materials on clean, solid surfaces such as pavement, or on rigid
sheet materials, to prevent mixing with foreign matter.
4. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water.
5. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids.
4. Maintenance of Storage:
1. Periodically inspect stored products on a scheduled basis.
2. Verify that storage facilities comply with manufacturer's product storage requirements.
3. Verify that manufacturer required environmental conditions are maintained continually.
01600- 7
Materials and Equipment
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
4. Verify that surfaces of products exposed to the elements are not adversely affected;
that any weathering of finishes is acceptable under requirements of Contract
Documents.
5. Maintenance of Equipment Storage:
1. For mechanical and electrical equipment in long-term storage, provide manufacturer's
service instructions to accompany each item, with notice of enclosed instructions
shown on exterior of package.
2. Service equipment on a regularly scheduled basis, maintaining a log of services;
submit as a record document.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS
1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of products in
the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and
aligned with other Work.
2. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
01600- 8
Materials and Equipment
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
Attachment: Substitution Request Form
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
DATE: _____________________
Architect's Project No: _____________________
Project: _____________________________________________________________________________
To: _______________________________________ From: __________________________________
__________________________________________ _______________________________________
__________________________________________ _______________________________________
==============================================================================
Contractor (Bidder) hereby request acceptance of the following product or system as substitution in
accordance with provisions of Section 01600 of the Specifications:
1. SPECIFIED PRODUCT OR SYSTEM:
Substitution request for : ____________________________________________________
Specification Section No : __________________________________ Article: __________
2. SUPPORTING DATA:
________ Product data adequate for evaluation of the request for proposed substitution is
attached (description of product, reference standard, performance and test data,
specifications, drawings, photographs).
________ Sample is attached.
________ Sample will be sent if requested.
3. QUALITY COMPARISON
SPECIFIED PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION
Name, Brand: ________________________ _______________________
Catalog No.: ________________________ _______________________
Manufacturer: ________________________ _______________________
Vendor: ________________________ _______________________
Significant
Variations: ________________________ _______________________
01600- 9
Materials and Equipment
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
(Add Additional Sheets If Necessary)
Maintenance Service Available: Yes _________ No _________
Spare Parts Source: ______________________________________________________
Warranty Provided: Yes ________ No ________ Years _______
By Whom: _______________________________________________________________
4. PREVIOUS INSTALLATIONS:
Identification of similar projects on which proposed substitution was used:
Project: ________________________ Architect: __________________________________
Address: ________________________ Owner: __________________________________
_________________________________ Date Installed: ___________________________
5. REASON FOR NOT GIVING PRIORITY TO SPECIFIED ITEMS:
_________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________
6. EFFECT OF SUBSTITUTION:
Does the proposed substitution affect other work (adverse or otherwise):
No ________ Yes ________ (if yes, explain)
_________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________
Substitution Changes Contract Time: No __________ Yes ___________
Add/Deduct ________Days
Substitution requires dimensional revisions or redesign of the work: No ______ Yes ______ (if yes,
attach explanation data)
Saving of credit to Owner: $ _______________________________________________
Extra Cost to Owner: $ _______________________________________________
7. CONTRACTOR'S (BIDDER'S) STATEMENT OF CONFORMANCE OF PROPOSED
SUBSTITUTION TO CONTRACT DOCUMENTS:
01600- 10
Materials and Equipment
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
I/we have investigated the proposed substitution. I/we:
- believe that it is equal or superior in all respects including function, appearance and
quality to specified product, except as stated above;
- will provide same warranty and servicing requirements as specified for specified
product;
- have included complete cost data and implications of the substitution;
- will pay for changes to the building design and special inspection costs caused by the
use of this product;
- will coordinate the incorporation of the proposed substitution in the work;
- waive future claims for added cost to Contract caused by the substitution.
Contractor (Bidder): ____________________________________________________________
Date: _____________ By: _______________________________________________________
Answer all questions and complete all blanks - use "NA" if not applicable. Unresponsive or
incomplete request will be rejected.
==============================================================================
ARCHITECT'S REVIEW AND ACTION
______ Resubmit substitution request
______ Provide more information in the following areas:
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
______ Sign Contractor's (Bidder's) Statement of Conformance
______ Substitution is accepted.
______ Substitution is accepted, with the following comments:
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
______ Substitution rejected.
______ Substitution Request received too late.
____________________________________________ Date: _________________
Architect
01731- 1
Cutting and Patching
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 01731
CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section establishes general requirements pertaining to cutting (including excavating),
fitting, and patching of the Work required to:
1. Make the several parts fit properly;
2. Uncover work to provide for installing, inspecting, or both, of ill-timed work;
3. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the Contract
Documents; and
4. Remove and replace defective work.
B. Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these
Specifications.
2. In addition to other requirements specified, upon the Architect's request uncover
work to provide for inspection by the Architect of covered work, and remove
samples of installed materials for testing.
3. Do not cut or alter work performed under separate contracts without the Architect's
written permission.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Request for Architect's consent:
1. Prior to cutting which affects structural safety, submit written request to the
Architect for permission to proceed with cutting.
2. Should conditions of the Work, or schedule, indicate a required change of materials
or methods for cutting and patching, so notify the Architect and secure his written
permission and the required Change Order prior to proceeding.
B. Notices to the Architect:
1. Prior to cutting and patching performed pursuant to the Architect's instructions,
submit cost estimate to the Architect. Secure the Architect's approval of cost
estimates before proceeding.
2. Submit written notice to the Architect designating the time the Work will be
uncovered, to provide for the Architect's observation.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in
the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and
the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
01731- 2
Cutting and Patching
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
2.1 MATERIALS
A. For replacement of Work removed, use materials which will result in equal to/or better than
the Work being replaced, in terms of performance and including the aesthetic appearance
as applicable.
2.2 PAYMENT FOR COSTS
A. The Owner will reimburse the Contractor for cutting and patching performed pursuant to a
written Change Order, after claim for such reimbursement is submitted by the Contractor.
Perform other cutting and patching needed to comply with the Contract Documents at no
additional cost to the Owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Inspection:
1. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to movement or damage
during cutting, excavating, patching, and backfilling.
B. Discrepancies:
1. If uncovered conditions are not as anticipated, immediately notify the Architect and
secure needed directions.
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION PRIOR TO CUTTING
A. Provide required protection including, but not necessarily limited to, shoring, bracing, and
support to maintain structural integrity of the Work.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. Perform required excavating and backfilling as required under pertinent other Sections of
these Specifications.
1. Perform cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other
portions of the Work and provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repair
and new work. Perform fitting and adjusting of products to provide finished
installation complying with the specified tolerances and finishes.
END OF SECTION
01740- 1
Cleaning
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 01740
CLEANING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Related Documents: Provisions established in General and Supplementary Conditions of the
Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to
this Section.
2. Section Includes:
1. Cleaning during construction.
2. Final cleaning of project and related site work.
1.2 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION
1. Control accumulation of waste materials and rubbish; periodically dispose of off-site.
2. Keep site and construction areas clean on a daily basis.
3. Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work, maintain areas free of dust and other
contaminants during finishing operations.
1.3 FINAL CLEANING
1. Execute cleaning prior to inspection for Substantial Completion of the Work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CLEANING MATERIALS
1. Use materials which will not create hazards to health or property, and which will not damage
surfaces.
2. Use only materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of material being cleaned.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CLEANING
1. In addition to removal of debris and cleaning specified in other sections, clean interior and
exterior exposed-to-view surfaces.
2. Remove waste, foreign matter, and debris from roofs, gutters, area ways, and drainage
systems.
3. Maintain cleaning until Final Completion.
4. Final Cleaning: In addition to cleaning during construction, prior to Substantial Completion
provide the following:
1. Remove temporary protection and labels not required to remain.
2. Clean finishes free of dust, stains, films and other foreign substances.
3. Clean transparent and glossy materials to a polished condition; remove foreign
substances. Polish reflective surfaces to a clear shine.
4. Vacuum clean carpeted and similar soft surfaces.
5. Clean, damp mop, wax, and polish resilient and hard- surface floor as specified.
6. Clean surfaces of equipment; remove excess lubrication.
7. Clean plumbing fixtures, and food service equipment, to a sanitary condition.
8. Clean permanent filters of ventilating equipment and replace disposable filters when
units have been operated during construction; in addition, clean ducts, blowers, and
coils when units have been operated without filters during construction.
01740- 2
Cleaning
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
9. Clean light fixtures and lamps.
10. Remove waste, debris, and surplus materials from site. Clean grounds; remove stains,
spills, and foreign substances from paved areas and sweep clean. Rake clean other
exterior surfaces.
END OF SECTION
01750- 1
Starting and Adjusting
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 01750
STARTING AND ADJUSTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Related Documents: Provisions established in General and Supplementary Conditions of the
Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to
this Section.
2. Section Includes:
1. Procedures for starting of mechanical and electrical systems.
1.2 QUALITY CONTROL
1. When specified in individual Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized
representative to be present at site to:
1. Inspect, check, and approve equipment installation prior to start-up.
2. Supervise placing equipment in operation.
3. Provide a written report that equipment has been properly installed and lubricated, is in
accurate alignment, is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting lines or
anchor bolts, and has been satisfactorily operated under full load conditions.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Submit preliminary schedule listing times and dates for start-up of each item of equipment in
sequence two weeks prior to proposed dates.
2. Submit manufacturer's representative reports within one week after start-up, listing
satisfactory startup dates.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
1. Building enclosure is complete and weathertight.
2. Excess packing and shipping bolts are removed.
3. Interdependent systems have been checked and are operational.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
1. Verify that Project conditions comply with requirements.
2. Verify that status of Work meets requirements for starting of equipment and systems.
3.2 PREPARATION
1. Coordinate sequence for start-up of various items of equipment.
2. Notify Architect 7 days prior to start-up of each item of equipment.
3. Have Contract Documents, shop drawings, product data, and operation and maintenance
data at hand during entire start-up process.
4. Verify that each piece of equipment has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation,
belt tension, control sequence, and other conditions which may cause damage.
5. Verify control systems are fully operational in automatic mode.
6. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specific electrical characteristics agree with those
specified by electrical equipment manufacturer.
01750- 2
Starting and Adjusting
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
7. Verify wiring to motors and controls required by mechanical work for operational smoke and
fire protection demonstrations is complete.
8. Verify wiring and support systems for equipment installed under separate contracts is
complete and checked.
9. Bearings: Inspect for cleanliness; clean and remove foreign matter. Verify alignment; take
corrective measures.
10. Drives: Inspect for tension on belt drives, adjustment of varipitch sheaves and drives,
alignment, proper equipment speed, and cleanliness. Take corrective action.
11. Motors: Verify that motor amperage agrees with nameplate value. Inspect for conditions
which produce excessive current flow and which exist due to equipment malfunction. Take
corrective action.
3.3 STARTING SYSTEMS
1. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible Contractor personnel.
2. Place equipment in operation in proper sequence.
END OF SECTION
01770 - 1
Closeout Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 01770
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Related Documents: Provisions established in General and Supplementary Conditions of the
Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to
this Section.
2. Section Includes:
1. Administrative provisions for Substantial Completion and for final acceptance.
1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
1. When Contractor considers Work or designated portion of Work is substantially complete,
submit written notice with list of items to be completed or corrected.
2. Should Architect inspection find Work is not substantially complete, he will promptly notify
Contractor in writing, listing observed deficiencies.
3. Contractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second written notice of substantial
completion.
4. When Architect finds Work is substantially complete he will prepare a Certificate of
Substantial Completion in accordance with provisions of General Conditions.
1.3 FINAL COMPLETION
1. When Contractor considers Work is complete, submit written certification
1. Contract Documents have been reviewed.
2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.
3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents, and deficiencies
listed with Certificate of Substantial Completion have been corrected.
4. Equipment and systems have been tested, adjusted and balanced, and are fully
operational.
5. Operation of systems has been demonstrated to Owner's personnel.
6. Work is complete and ready for final inspection.
2. Should Architect inspection find Work incomplete, he will promptly notify Contractor in writing
listing observed deficiencies.
3. Contractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second certification of final completion.
4. When Architect finds work is complete, he will consider closeout submittals.
1.4 REINSPECTION FEES
1. Should status of completion of Work require re-inspection by Architect due to failure of Work
to comply with Contractor's claims on initial inspection, Owner will deduct the amount of
Architect and appropriate consultant’s compensation for re-inspection services from final
payment to Contractor.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
1. Evidence of Compliance with Requirements of Governing Authorities
1. Certificate of Occupancy.
2. Certificates of Inspection required for mechanical, and electrical systems.
2. Project Record Documents: Under provisions of Section 01780.
3. Operation and Maintenance Data: Under provisions of Section 01780.
4. Warranties and Bonds: Under provisions of Section 01780.
01770 - 2
Closeout Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
5. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials: Under provisions of Section 01780.
6. Keys and Keying Schedule: Under provisions of Section 08710.
7. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens: In accordance with Conditions of the Contract.
8. Consent of Surety to Final Payment.
9. Certificates of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations: In accordance with
Supplementary Conditions.
1.6 STATEMENT OF ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS
1. Submit final statement reflecting adjustments to Contract Sum indicating
1. Original Contract Sum.
2. Previous change orders.
3. Changes under allowances.
4. Changes under unit prices.
5. Deductions for uncorrected work.
6. Penalties and bonuses.
7. Deductions for liquidated damages.
8. Deductions for re-inspection fees.
9. Other adjustments to Contract Sum.
10. Total Contract Sum as adjusted.
11. Previous payments.
12. Sum remaining due.
2. Architect will issue a final Change Order reflecting approved adjustments to Contract Sum
not previously made by change orders.
1.7 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT
1. Submit application for final payment in accordance with provisions of Conditions of the
Contract.
PART 2 PRODUCTS and EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
01780 - 1
Closeout Submittals
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 01780
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
PART 1GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Related Documents: Provisions established in General and Supplementary Conditions of the
Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to
this Section.
B. Section Includes:
1. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples.
2. Submittal of Record Documents and Samples.
3. Format and content of operation and maintenance manuals.
4. Instruction of Owner's personnel.
5. Preparation and submittal of warranties and bonds.
6. Spare parts, overages, and maintenance materials.
7. Schedule of submittals.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of
described products.
1.3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintenance of Documents and Samples:
1. In addition to requirements in General Conditions, maintain at the site for Owner one
record copy of:
a. Contract Drawings.
b. Specifications.
c. Addenda.
d. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
e. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.
f. Field test records.
g. Inspection certificates.
h. Manufacturer's certificates.
2. Store Record Documents and samples in Field Office apart from documents used for
construction. Provide files, racks, and secure storage for Record Documents and
samples.
3. Label and file Record Documents and samples in accordance with Section number
listings in Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Label each document "PROJECT
RECORD" in neat, large, printed letters.
4. Maintain Record Documents in a clean, dry and legible condition. Do not use Record
Documents for construction purposes.
5. Keep Record Documents and samples available for inspection by Architect.
B. Recording:
1. Record information on a set of blue line opaque drawings, and in a copy of a Project
Manual.
2. Provide felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colors for each major system, for
recording information.
3. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any work
until required information is recorded.
01780 - 2
Closeout Submittals
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
4. Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual
construction, including:
a. Measured depths of elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum.
b. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and
appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.
c. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in
construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of construction.
d. Field changes of dimension and detail.
e. Changes made by Modifications.
f. Details not on original Contract Drawings.
g. References to related shop drawings and Modifications.
5. Specifications: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including:
a. Manufacturer, trade name, and catalog number of each product actually
installed, particularly optional items and substitute items.
b. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications.
6. Other Documents: Maintain manufacturer's certifications, inspection certifications,
field test records, and other documents required by individual Specifications sections.
1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Format:
1. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual.
2. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch three-ring binders with hardback,
cleanable, plastic covers; 3 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used,
correlate data into related consistent groupings.
3. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; list title of Project identify subject matter of
contents.
4. Arrange content by systems, under section numbers and sequence of Table of
Contents of this Project Manual.
5. Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system, with typed description of
product and major component parts of equipment.
6. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 20 pound paper.
7. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger
drawings to size of text pages.
B. Contents, Each Volume
1. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers
of Architect/Engineer and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of
products and systems, indexed to content of the volume.
2. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of
subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement
parts.
3. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component
parts, and data applicable to installation; delete inapplicable information.
4. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of
equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project
Record Documents as maintenance drawings.
5. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of
instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions specified in
Section 01450.
6. Warranties and Bonds: Bind in copy of each.
C. Manual for Materials and Finishes:
01780 - 3
Closeout Submittals
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
1. Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: Include product data, with catalog
number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. Provide information
for re-ordering custom manufactured products.
2. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer's recommendations for
cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods,
and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
3. Moisture-protection and Weather-exposed Products: Include product data listing
applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation.
Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair.
4. Additional Requirements: As Specified in individual Specifications sections.
5. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space
for insertion of data.
D. Manual for Equipment and Systems:
1. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include description of unit or system, and
component parts. Give function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting
conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and
complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
2. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and
communications.
3. Include as-installed color coded wiring diagrams.
4. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating
instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and
emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating
instructions.
5. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for
trouble-shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment,
adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.
6. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.
7. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.
8. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.
9. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and
diagrams required for maintenance.
10. Provide as-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.
11. Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with as- installed color coded piping
diagrams.
12. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to
flow and control diagrams.
13. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended
quantities to be maintained in storage.
14. Include test and balancing reports as specified in individual specification sections.
15. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual Specifications sections.
16. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space
for insertion of data.
E. Instruction of Owner Personnel:
1. Before final inspection, instruct Owner's designated personnel in operation,
adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems, at agreed upon
times. For equipment requiring seasonal operation, perform instructions for other
seasons within 6 months.
2. Refer to Section 01820.
F. Submittals:
1. Submit 2 copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents
before start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments.
01780 - 4
Closeout Submittals
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction
and operated by Owner, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance.
3. Submit one copy of completed volumes in final form 15 days prior to final inspection.
Copy will be returned after final inspection, with Architect comments, and Engineer’s
comments where applicable. Revise content of documents as required prior to final
submittal.
4. Submit 2 copies of revised volumes of data in final form within 10 days after final
inspection.
1.5 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
A. Form
1. Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 by 11 inch three-ring binders, with hardback,
cleanable, plastic covers.
2. Label cover of each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS,
with title of Project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor; and name of
responsible principal.
3. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the
Project Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification
section in which specified, and the name of Product or work item.
4. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents
listing. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List
subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone
number of responsible principal.
B. Preparation
1. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible subcontractors,
suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item of
work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning
of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined.
2. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.
3. Co-execute submittals when required.
4. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.
C. Time of Submittals:
1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction
with Owner's permission, submit documents within ten days after acceptance.
2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to
final Application for Payment.
3. For items of Work when acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial
Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as
the beginning of the warranty period.
1.6 SPARE PARTS, OVERAGES, AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Products Required:
1. Provide quantities of products, spare parts, maintenance tools, and maintenance
materials specified in individual sections to be provided to Owner, in addition to that
required for completion of Work.
2. Products: Identical to those installed in the Work. Include quantities in original
purchase from manufacturer to avoid variations in manufacture.
B. Storage, Maintenance:
1. Store products with products to be installed in the Work, under provisions of Section
01600.
2. When adequate, secure storage facilities are available at site, capable of maintaining
conditions required for storage and not required for Contract work or storage, or for
Owner's needs, spare products may be stored in available space.
01780 - 5
Closeout Submittals
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
3. Maintain spare products in original containers with labels intact and legible, until
delivery to Owner.
C. Delivery:
1. Coordinate with Owner: Deliver and unload spare products to Owner at Project site
and obtain receipt prior to final payment.
2. For portions of Project accepted and occupied by Owner prior to Substantial
Completion, deliver a proportional part of spare products to Owner; obtain receipt.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. At Contract closeout, deliver Record Documents including samples, Operation and
Maintenance Manuals, and Warranties and Bonds under provisions of Section 01770.
B. Transmit with cover letter in duplicate, listing:
1. Date.
2. Project title and number.
3. Contractor's name, address, and telephone number.
4. Number and title of each Record Document.
5. Signature of Contractor or authorized representative.
PART 2 PRODUCTS and PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
Division Two
Site Work
02070- 1
Selective Demolition
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 02070
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Requirements, bidding documents and drawings.
1.2. DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE
A. SUMMARY
1. This portion of the specification governs the demolition, salvaging (to the extent specified by
building owner), and disposal of materials resulting from the demolition.
2. Refer to drawings for full extent of areas identified for demolition.
B. AREAS OF BUILDING DEMOLITION AND MATERIAL REMOVAL:
1. Exterior metal siding
2. PEMB framing components
3. Gutters and trim
4. Concrete paving and flatwork
1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not allow the spread of dust and debris during demolition work.
B. Contractor shall keep existing area cleared of all debris at all times.
1.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect existing, fixtures, equipment and all building components not designated to be removed.
B. Do not interfere with adjacent business operation. Maintain free and safe passage to and from.
C. Cease operations and notify the Architect immediately, if safety of any structure appears to be
endangered. Take precautions to properly support structure. Do not resume operations until
safety is restored.
D. Provide, erect and maintain barricades, lighting, and guard rails as required by applicable
regulatory advisory to protect occupants of building and worker.
E. Do not allow any materials to obstruct the site drainage at any time.
F. Existing Electrical service shall be maintained at all time.
1.5 EXISTING SERVICES
A. Arrange and pay for temporarily disconnecting, removing and capping utility services within areas
of demolition.
B. Place markers to indicate location of disconnected services.
C. If cut-off of utilities is required to perform demolition work, coordinate with demolition work,
coordinate with Architect and Owner with minimum three days advance notice to minimize cut-off
time.
D. Disconnect and remove all existing abandoned pipes, conduits, etc.
E. Work shall be scheduled and coordinated to minimize any interruption of service.
02070- 2
Selective Demolition
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
1.6 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
A. Meet all rules and regulations pertaining to the handling and disposal of roof material, which may
contain hazardous materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Except where noted otherwise, maintain possession of materials being demolished. Promptly
remove from site.
B. If existing materials or objects designated to remain are damaged, they shall be repaired with
materials equal in all respects without additional cost to Owner.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION & PREPARATION
A. Examine site and all objects designated to be removed. Verify with Architect objects to be
removed and objects to remain prior to beginning this Work.
B. Schedule work with all necessary consideration for Owner's use of existing facilities and adjacent
operation.
C. Contractor shall be responsible for protection of property during course of work. Lawns,
shrubbery, paved areas, and building shall be protected from damage. Repair damage at no
extra cost to owner.
3.2 DEMOLITION
A. Remove fixtures and building components designated for demolition.
B. Proceed with demolition in a systematic and orderly manner from top to bottom.
C. Remove only non-structural elements.
D. Do not allow partially demolished sections, etc., which may pose a hazardous condition to exist
when discontinuing work for the day.
E. Salvageable items not claimed by the Owner shall be removed from the site. Storage and/or
sale of items on the site is not permitted.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Remove all debris from site.
B. Leave premises broom clean and suitable for subsequent work by other trades.
END OF SECTION
02115 - 1
Site Clearing
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 02115
SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.Protecting existing vegetation to remain.
2.Removing existing vegetation.
3.Clearing and grubbing.
4.Stripping and stockpiling topsoil.
5.Removing above- and below-grade site improvements.
6.Disconnecting, capping, or sealing site utilities.
7.Temporary erosion and sedimentation control.
B. Related Section:
1.Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP
A. Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain Owner's property,
cleared materials may be stockpiled onsite at a location suitable to Owner.
1.3 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent
occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.
1.Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2.Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed trafficways if required by
Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Salvageable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to salvage and store on
Owner's premises.
C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before
site clearing.
D. Do not commence site-clearing operations until temporary erosion- and
sedimentation-control measures are in place.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in
Section 02300 - Earth Moving.
1.Obtain approved borrow soil material offsite when satisfactory soil material is not
available onsite.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during
02115 - 2
Site Clearing
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
construction.
B. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.
1.Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.
3.2 EXISTING UTILITIES
A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed or abandoned
in place.
1.Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.
B. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner
or others, unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to
provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1.Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
C. Removal of underground utilities is included in earthwork sections; in applicable fire
suppression, plumbing, HVAC, electrical, communications, electronic safety and security,
and utilities sections.
3.3 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new
construction.
1.Grind down stumps and remove roots larger than 3 inches in diameter, obstructions,
and debris to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade.
2.Use only hand methods or air spade for grubbing within protection zones.
B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material
unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.
1.Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches, and
compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
3.4 TOPSOIL STRIPPING
A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.
B. Strip topsoil to depth of 6 inches in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying
subsoil or other waste materials.
C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil or other
materials. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown
dust and erosion by water.
3.5 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and
waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them onsite. Contractor
may dispose of waste material suitable for disposal in the landfill at no cost. Contractor
must weigh material at the landfill scale house.
B. Separate recyclable materials (concrete, asphalt) produced during site clearing from other
non-recyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and
transport to the landfill BMR facility. Do not interfere with other Project work.
END OF SECTION
02260- 1
Soil Poisoning
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 02260
SOIL POISONING
PART l - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: This work comprises furnishing and applying soil chemicals for the prevention of termite
infestation.
l.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: This work shall be performed by a licensed, reputable, pest control operator
with experience in this work.
B. Applicator shall provide documentation that he is, in fact, licensed by the state of Oklahoma for
approval by Architect.
l.3 GUARANTEE
A. Upon completion of the soil poisoning and as a condition for its acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish
a written and insured guarantee for the effectiveness of the soil poisoning against termite infestation for
a period of 5 years from date of treatment. Any evidence of reinfestation within the guarantee period
will require retreatment without extra cost to the Owner. The guarantee shall be non-cancelable by all
parties to the contract except the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.l MATERIALS
A. Toxicants: Only water-based emulsion soil chemicals may be used.
Cyren TC
1. Active Ingredient: Chlorpyrifos - O, O-diethyl O-(3,5,6-trichloro-2-pyridinyl) phosphorodithioate.
Cyren TC - 43.2% a.i.
2. Registered for use on: Preconstruction termite treatment at 0.5%, utility poles and fence
posts.
3. Pests controlled: Subterranean Termites and other wood infesting insects.
B. Mixes: If combinations of toxicants are used, at least one of them must be at or above the minimum
percentage listed above:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.l APPLICATION
A. Applying Chemicals: Apply the solution approximately 48 hours prior to placing concrete slabs and at
such time as there is reasonable assurance that no rain will fall until after the slabs have been
placed.
a. Apply an over-all treatment under the entire building area, including covered passages and
entrance platforms. Apply at a rate not less that l gallon per 7 sq. ft.
b. Apply to critical areas along both sides of grade beams and around piers at a rate of l gallon per 2-
l/2 linear feet.
c. Unless the treated areas are covered immediately, take precautions to prevent disturbance of the
treatment by human or animal contact with the treated soil.
END OF SECTION
02270 - 1
Erosion and Sediment Control
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 02270
EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL FOR
STORM WATER RUNOFF DURING CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Project Construction Drawings
C. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP)
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The intent of this specification is to provide guidelines for the Contractor to adhere to all state,
federal, and local environmental regulations. It is also the intent to provide preventive measures to
keep sediment from entering any storm water system, including open channels. It is the
Contractor's responsibility to adhere to all state, federal, and local requirements. While the Owner
may require the Contractor to install erosion control devices during construction, this will in no way
relieve the Contractor of his responsibility.
1.3 GENERAL
A. Comply with applicable requirements of all governing authorities having jurisdiction. These Contract
Documents are not represented as being comprehensive, but rather to convey the intent to provide
complete slope protection and erosion control for both the project site and the adjacent property.
B. Erosion control measures shall be established at the beginning of construction and maintained during
the entire length of construction. On-site areas which are subject to severe erosion and off-site
areas which are especially vulnerable to damage from erosion and/or sedimentation are to be
identified and receive additional erosion control measures as directed by the Owner.
C. All land-disturbing activities shall be planned and conducted to minimize the size of the area to be
exposed at any one time and to minimize the time of exposure.
D. Surface water runoff originating upgrade of exposed area shall be controlled to reduce erosion and
sediment loss during the period of exposure.
E. When the increase in the peak rates and velocity of storm water runoff resulting from a land-disturbing
activity is sufficient to cause accelerated erosion of the receiving ditch or stream, the Contractor
shall install measures to control both the velocity and rate of release so as to minimize accelerated
erosion and increased sedimentation of the stream as directed by the Owner.
F. All land-disturbing activities shall be planned and conducted so as to minimize off-site sedimentation
damage.
G. The Contractor shall be responsible for periodically cleaning out and disposing of all sediment once
the storage capacity of the drainage feature or structure receiving the sediment is reduced by one-
third. The Contractor shall also be responsible for cleaning out and disposing of all sediment and
removal and disposal of all erosion control products at the time of completion of the Work.
Biodegradable erosion control products may be left in place or mulched at the site if approved by the
Owner.
02270 - 2
Erosion and Sediment Control
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Hay bales shall be either wire bound or string tied with bindings orientated around sides rather than
over and under.
B. Erosion netting shall be North American Green S75 with Cell-O-Seed or approved equal.
C. Silt fence shall be Mirafi "Envirofence" preassembled silt fence, AMOCO Silt Stop prefabricated silt
fence, or approved equal.
D. Temporary cover for graded areas shall be undamaged, air dry threshed hay free from weed seeds.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HAY BALE BARRIERS
A. Excavation shall be to the width of the bale and the length of the proposed barrier to a depth of 4
inches.
B. Bales shall be placed in a single row, lengthwise on proposed line, with ends of adjacent bales tightly
abutting one another. In swales and ditches, the barrier shall extend to such a length that the
bottoms of the end bales are higher in elevation than the top of the lowest middle bale.
C. Staking shall be accomplished to securely anchor bales by driving at least two stakes or rebars
through each bale.
D. The gaps between bales shall be filled by wedging hay in the gaps to prevent unfiltered runoff from
escaping between the bales.
E. The excavated soil shall be backfilled against the barrier. Backfill shall conform to ground level on the
downhill side and shall be built up to 4 inches above ground level on the uphill side. Loose hay shall
be scattered over the area immediately uphill from a hay barrier.
3.2 STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE
A. The length of a construction entrance shall be a minimum of 50' or as directed by Engineer’s
representative.
B. The minimum depth of stone in a construction entrance shall be 12". The construction entrance shall
be maintained as specified herein.
C. The minimum width of a construction entrance shall be 30' or as directed by the City of Corsicana.
D. When necessary, construction equipment shall be cleaned to remove sediment prior to entrance onto
public right-of-way. When washing is required, it shall be done on an area stabilized with crushed
stone which drains into an approved sediment trap or sediment basin. All sediment shall be
prevented from entering any storm drain, ditch or water course through use of sand bags, gravel,
boards or other approved methods.
E. The construction entrance shall be maintained in a condition which will prevent tracking or flowing of
sediment onto public rights-of-way. This may require periodic top dressing with additional stone as
conditions demand and repair and/or clean-out of any measures used to trap sediment. All
sediment spilled, dropped, washed or tracked onto public rights-of-way shall be removed by the
Contractor immediately at no cost to the Owner.
3.3 SILT FENCING
A. The Contractor shall excavate a 6 inch by 6 inch trench for silt fence bedding along the lower
perimeters of the site where necessary to prevent sediment from entering any drainage system.
02270 - 3
Erosion and Sediment Control
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
B. The Contractor shall install the silt fence in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and
instructions.
3.4 EROSION NETTING
A. The erosion netting shall be placed as required or directed by the Owner. The area to be covered
shall be properly prepared and fertilized before the blanket is applied. When the blanket is unrolled,
the netting shall be on top and the fibers in contact with the soil over the entire area. In ditches, the
blankets shall be applied in the direction of the flow of water, butted snugly at ends and side and
stapled. On slopes, the blankets shall be applied either horizontally or vertically to the slope. Ends
and sides shall be butted snugly and stapled. The erosion netting shall be installed within strict
accordance to manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions.
B. The staples shall be driven vertically into the ground, spaced as specified in the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Use common row of staples on adjoining blankets.
3.5 DUST CONTROL
A. Dust Control of the Contractor's performance of the Work, either inside or outside the right-of-way
shall be performed by the Contractor by applying water.
B. Water shall be provided in the amounts and locations as required or as ordered by the Owner.
END OF SECTION 02270
02300 - 1
Earthwork
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 02300
EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Excavating and filling for rough grading the Site.
2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
3. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements.
4. Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities and pits for buried utility structures.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.
1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches
to support sides of pipe.
2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt
paving.
C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before
laying pipe.
D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
E. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and
dimensions indicated.
1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond
indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional
excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract
provisions for changes in the Work.
2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond
indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized
excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without
additional compensation.
F. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
G. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical
and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or
below the ground surface.
H. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-
mix asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement
concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.
I. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill
immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.
J. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables as well as underground
services within buildings.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Material test reports.
1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS
02300 - 2
Earthwork
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
A. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before
beginning earth-moving operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not
available from excavations.
B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to
ASTM D2487, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches
in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT
according to ASTM D2487, or a combination of these groups.
1.Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of
optimum moisture content at time of compaction.
D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,
crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D2940/D2940M; with at least 90
percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D294/D2940M 0; with at least 95 percent
passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D2940/D2940M; with at least 90 percent
passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,
crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D2940/D2940M; except with 100
percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
H. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed, crushed stone, or crushed or
uncrushed gravel; ASTM D448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent
passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and zero to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape
manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide
and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core
encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when
tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored to comply with local practice or requirements
of authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused
by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by
earth-moving operations.
B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth-moving operations.
C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove
temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.
3.2 EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of
surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may
02300 - 3
Earthwork
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the
Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.
1.If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil
materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
3.3 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of ±0.1 foot. If
applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and
removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for
inspections.
1.Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation.
Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim
bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
3.4 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections,
elevations, and subgrades.
3.5 SUBGRADE INSPECTION
A. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with a pneumatic-tired dump
truck to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or
saturated subgrades.
B. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water,
or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.
3.6 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without
intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent
windblown dust.
1.Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line
of remaining trees.
3.7 SOIL FILL
A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so
fill material will bond with existing material.
B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
1.Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.
2.Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.
3.Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill.
4.Under building slabs, use engineered fill, unless otherwise noted on Drawings.
5.Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill, unless otherwise noted on
Drawings.
3.8 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1.Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or
contain frost or ice.
2.Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that
exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to
02300 - 4
Earthwork
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
specified dry unit weight.
3.9 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for
material compacted by heavy compaction equipment and not more than 4 inches in loose
depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations
and uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit
weight according to ASTM D698:
1.Under pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and
each layer of backfill or fill soil material and apply lime treatment in accordance with
Drawings at 95 percent.
2.Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact
each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent.
3.Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade
and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent.
4.For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85
percent.
3.10 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes.
Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations
indicated.
B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent
ponding. Finish subgrades to elevations required to achieve indicated finish elevations,
within the following subgrade tolerances:
1.Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch.
2.Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch.
3.Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with
a 10-foot straightedge.
3.11 DRAINAGE COURSE UNDER CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE
A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete
slabs-on-grade as follows:
1.Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of
equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3
inches thick.
2.Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses
to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D698.
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Inspections: Owner may engage a qualified special inspector to perform
inspections:
B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to
perform tests and inspections.
C. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed
with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply
with requirements.
D. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be
performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of
02300 - 5
Earthwork
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested
subgrade when approved by Architect.
E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of
compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials
to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
3.13 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion.
Keep free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially
completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to
subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,
backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1.Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent
work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
3.14 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, from Project site. Unsatisfactory soil
may be placed in designated stockpiles. Project generated trash and debris, acceptable for
disposal in the City's landfill, may be disposed of at no cost to Contractor. Contractor shall
weigh in and out at the Scalehouse.
END OF SECTION
02310 - 1
Grading
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 02310
GRADING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
Provide rough grading and finish grading for the Project Site.
B. Related Documents:
Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and Drawings apply to the
Work of this Section.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
Submit samples of materials as required below. Samples of earth materials shall be delivered
to job site in sufficient quantity necessary for Architect and laboratory to adequately evaluate the
soil.
1.03 BASIS FOR BIDS
Materials at site are expected to be in accordance with materials indicated on logs and test
holes included. Bids shall be based on excavating and filling with materials encountered at site
except where special fill or backfill materials are specified herein or indicated on Drawings. No
allowance or extra payments will be made by reason of variation in types of soil encountered or
variations in their moisture contents. Additional fill material required shall be furnished and
included as a part of the work. Removal of excess or objectionable materials shall be included
as a part of the work.
1.04 COORDINATION
Coordinate excavation work with other trades for proper scheduling of work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 STOCKPILING
Material cut from building and site areas which is suitable for fills and backfilling may be stored
on site to be distributed later. Fill material required to be hauled in may be stockpiled at site
until used, provided it is properly handled to prevent contamination with undesirable materials.
Location of stockpiles shall be subject to approval of Architect. Stockpile topsoil separate from
excavated sub-soil.
2.02 SURPLUS MATERIALS
Excavated materials not to be used in fills and backfills on this project shall be removed from
site immediately. Materials containing rubbish, debris (fractured limestone), or rocks shall be
removed.
2.03 MATERIALS
Suitable existing excavated on-site soil free from vegetable matter, debris, and other deleterious
matter, unless otherwise noted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Explosives:
Use of explosives is strictly prohibited.
B. Removal of Contaminated Soil:
02310 - 2
Grading
Nelson + Morgan, Architects 651 Mayhill Road
NMA 18016 Issued for Bidding and Construction November 19, 2018
Prior to finish grading, remove soil contaminated with lime from lawn and plant bed areas.
Replace with clean, approved top soil.
3.02 GRADING
A. Rough:
Excavation and rough grading shall be made to lines and grades shown. Planting and lawn
areas shall be overcut to allow a layer of topsoil not less than 6" thick. Excavations shall be
maintained to drain and shall be kept free of excess water. Ponding of water on site will not
be permitted. Remove objectionable and excess materials from site when excavated.
Exercise extreme care in grading around existing trees. Do not disturb existing grades
around existing trees except as otherwise noted.
B. Finish:
After rough grading has been completed and site cleared of construction debris, areas
disturbed by construction or graded to provide new finish grades shall be covered with a
layer of topsoil not less than 6" thick. Reuse stockpiled topsoil, cleaned of foreign matter, or
provide additional approved topsoil as required. Final grades shall be as shown or as
directed by Architect and shall slope away from building and shall provide drainage for area.
Ponding of water on site will not be permitted. Compact topsoil sufficiently to prevent
washing and sinking. Degree of finish shall be that ordinarily obtainable with blade grader or
scraper operations. Finish surfaces shall be not more than 0.10 foot above or below
established grade elevation.
3.03 PROTECTION, CLEAN-UP AND EXCESS MATERIAL
A. Protect grades from construction and weather damage, washing, erosion and rutting, and
repair such damage that occurs.
B. Correct any settlement below established grades to prevent ponding of water.
C. At locations where lime, concrete or other foreign matter has penetrated or been mixed with
earth, remove damaged earth and replace with clean material.
D. Remove excess stockpiled material, debris, waste, and other material from site and leave
work in clean finished condition for final acceptance. Contractor is responsible for disposal
of debris and excess materials.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
In-place density testing as specified in Section 01400.
END OF SECTION.
02751-1
Concrete Pavement
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 02751
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. Concrete Paving:
a. Parking lots.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and pre-consumer
recycled content and cost.
2. Product Certificates: For regional materials, indicating location of material
manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material.
Include distance to Project and cost for each regional material.
3. Laboratory Test Reports: For concrete paving mixtures, documentation indicating
that cured concrete complies with Solar Reflectance Index requirements.
C. Samples: For each type of product, ingredient, or admixture requiring color selection.
D. Design Mixtures: For each concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design mixtures
when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other
circumstances warrant adjustments.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-
mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C94/C94M requirements for
production facilities and equipment.
1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA - Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities, (Quality Control Manual, Section 3 - Plant Certification
Checklist).
1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform
preconstruction testing on concrete paving mixtures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL
A. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
02751-2
Concrete Pavement
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
B. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A1064/A1064M, fabricated from as-drawn
steel wire into flat sheets.
C. Deformed-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A1064/A1064M, flat sheet.
D. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60; deformed.
E. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 plain-steel bars. Cut bars true to length
with ends square and free of burrs.
F. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars, welded-wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture
bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or
precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete specified.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Materials: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and
source throughout Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Portland cement Type II.
2. Fly Ash: ASTM C618.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M, uniformly-graded. Provide aggregates from
a single source.
C. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M.
D. Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
admixtures and to contain no more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of
cementitious material.
E. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C94/C94M.
2.4 CURING MATERIALS
A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M182, Class 3, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz/sq yd dry or cotton mats.
B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 71, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene
sheet.
C. Water: Potable.
D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular, film forming, manufactured for
application to fresh concrete.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Corporation-Construction Systems; MasterKure ER 50 (Pre-2014:
Confilm.
b. Bon Tool Co.; 32-301-B7 BonWay Evaporation Retarder.
c. Brickform; a division of Solomon Colors; Evaporation Retarder.
d. ChemMasters, Inc; Spray-Film.
e. Dayton Superior; AquaFilm Concentrate J74.
f. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company; Eucobar.
g. Kaufman Products, Inc; VaporAid.
h. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc; E-CON.
i. Lambert Corporation; LAMBCO Skin.
j. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold.
k. Nox-Crete Products Group; MONOFILM.
l. Sika Corporation; SikaFilm.
m. SpecChem, LLC; SpecFilm.
n. TK Products; TK-2120 TRI-FILM.
o. Vexcon Chemicals Inc.; Certi-Vex EnvioAssist.
02751-3
Concrete Pavement
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
p. W.R. Meadows, Inc; EVAPRE.
2.5 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Joint Fillers: ASTM D1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber in preformed strips.
2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of
normal-weight concrete, and as determined by either laboratory trial mixtures or field
experience.
B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, slag cement, and silica fume as needed to
reduce the total amount of Portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less
than 40 percent. Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than Portland
cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash or Pozzolan: 25 percent.
C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight
concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows:
1. Air Content: 6 percent ±1-1/2 percent.
D. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Concrete Mixtures: Normal-weight concrete.
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi.
2. Maximum W/C Ratio at Point of Placement: 5 gal/sack.
3. Slump Limit: 3 - 6 inches.
2.7 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to
ASTM C94/C94M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the
Work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete paving to identify soft pockets and areas
of excess yielding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing
concrete.
3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required
lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so
forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from
concrete without damage.
3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with CRSI - Manual of Standard Practice, for fabricating, placing, and supporting
reinforcement.
02751-4
Concrete Pavement
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
3.5 JOINTS
A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line,
with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right
angles to centerline unless otherwise indicated.
B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at
locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving
terminates at isolation joints.
C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs,
catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects, and where indicated.
D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas
as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the
concrete thickness.
E. Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with
an edging tool to a 3/8-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes.
Eliminate edging-tool marks on concrete surfaces.
3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do
not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish
elevation and alignment.
B. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing
concrete.
C. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not
push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. D. Screed
paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.
D. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and
uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do
not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading
surface treatments.
E. If adverse weather is imminent, no concrete placement is permitted. Do not allow rainwater
to alter the water/cement ratio or damage finish.
F. Cold weather concrete placement shall conform to ACI 306. No concrete placement is
allowed at temperatures below 40F.
G. Hot weather concrete placement shall conform to ACI 305. The concrete temperature shall
not exceed 90F at the time of placement.
3.7 FLOAT FINISHING
A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.
B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleedwater sheen has disappeared
and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with
power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish
surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately
to uniform granular texture.
1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft-bristle broom across float-finished
concrete surface, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, fine-line
texture.
3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
02751-5
Concrete Pavement
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures.
B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.
C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq ft x h before and during finishing
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding,
and bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing.
D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from
concrete surface.
E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing
compound, or a combination of these.
3.9 PAVING TOLERANCES
A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows:
1. Elevation: 3/4 inch.
2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch.
3. Surface: Gap below 10-feet-long; unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/2 inch.
4. Joint Spacing: 3 inches.
5. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.
6. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.
3.10 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does
not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint
to joint unless otherwise approved by Architect.
B. Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after
placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by
removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
C. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material.
Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion
inspections.
END OF SECTION
02764-1
Pavement Joint Sealants
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 02764
PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cold-applied joint sealants.
2. Joint-sealant backer materials. B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required.
C. Paving-Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.
2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
3. Joint-sealant formulation.
4. Joint-sealant color.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product certificates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field
experience.
2.2 COLD-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS
A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM D5893/D5893M, Type NS.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Crafco Inc., an ERGON company; RoadSaver Silicone.
b. Dow Corning Corporation; 888.
c. Pecora Corporation; 301 NS.
B. Single-Component, Self-Leveling, Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM D5893/D5893M, Type SL.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Crafco Inc., an ERGON company; RoadSaver Silicone SL.
b. Dow Corning Corporation; 890-SL.
c. Pecora Corporation; 300 SL.
02764-2
Pavement Joint Sealants
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
C. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane, Elastomeric Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M,
Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Meadows, W.R., Inc.; Pourthane NS.
D. Single Component, Pourable, Urethane, Elastomeric Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S,
Grade P, Class 25, for Use T.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Meadows, W.R., Inc.; Pourthane SL.
E. Multicomponent, Pourable, Urethane, Elastomeric Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M,
Grade P, Class 25, for Use T.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Pecora Corporation.
2.3 JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS
A. Round Backer Rods for Cold- and Hot-Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D5249, Type 1, of
diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion
of sealant.
B. Round Backer Rods for Cold-Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D5249, Type 3, of diameter
and density required to control joint-sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of
sealant.
C. Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot-Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D5249; Type 2; of thickness
and width required to control joint-sealant depth, prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant,
and fill remainder of joint opening under sealant.
2.4 PRIMERS
A. Primers: Product recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and
applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's
written instructions.
C. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by
joint-sealant manufacturer.
D. Joint-Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C1193 for use
of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions.
E. Install joint-sealant backings to support joint sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint-sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint-sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent joint-sealant backings that have become wet before sealant
application and replace them with dry materials.
02764-3
Pavement Joint Sealants
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
F. Install joint sealants immediately following backing installation, using proven techniques
that comply with the following:
1. Place joint sealants so they fully contact joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that
allow optimum sealant movement capability.
G. Tooling of Nonsag Joint Sealants: Immediately after joint-sealant application and before
skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to the following requirements to form
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure
contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint:
1. Remove excess joint sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer and
that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
H. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions
unless otherwise indicated.
I. Clean off excess joint sealant as the Work progresses, by methods and with cleaning
materials approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturers.
END OF SECTION
Division Three
Concrete
03100 - 2
Concrete Forming
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 03100
CONCRETE FORMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Formwork for cast-in place concrete, bracing and anchorage.
B. Openings for other work.
C. Form accessories.
D. Form stripping.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010
(Reapproved 2015).
B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2016.
C. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2014 (Errata
2017).
D. ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; 2014.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMWORK - GENERAL
A. Provide concrete forms, accessories, and bracing as required to accomplish cast-in-place concrete
work.
B. Design and construct to provide resultant concrete that conforms to design with respect to shape,
lines, and dimensions.
C. Chamfer outside corners of beams and walls.
D. Comply with applicable state and local codes with respect to design, fabrication, erection, and
removal of formwork.
2.2 WOOD FORM MATERIALS
A. Form Materials: At the discretion of the Contractor.
2.3 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Form Release Agent: Capable of releasing forms from hardened concrete without staining or
discoloring concrete or forming bugholes and other surface defects, compatible with concrete and
form materials, and not requiring removal for satisfactory bonding of coatings to be applied.
1.Composition: Colorless reactive, mineral oil-based, soy-based, or vegetable-oil based
compound.
2.Do not use materials containing diesel oil or petroleum-based compounds.
3.VOC Content: In compliance with applicable local, State, and federal regulations.
B. Dowel Sleeves: Plastic sleeve and nailable plastic base for smooth, round, steel load-transfer
dowels.
C. Filler Strips for Chamfered Corners: Rigid plastic type.
03100 - 3
Concrete Forming
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
D. Embedded Anchor Shapes, Plates, Angles and Bars: As specified in Section 051200.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree
with drawings.
3.2 EARTH FORMS
A. Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms. Remove loose soil prior to placing concrete.
3.3 ERECTION - FORMWORK
A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with
requirements of ACI 301.
B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to
overstressing by construction loads.
C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete
during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores.
D. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum.
3.4 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT
A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items.
3.5 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS
A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete
work.
B. Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete.
C. Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, recesses, sleeves,
bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work.
3.6 FORM CLEANING
A. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms.
B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete.
3.7 FORMWORK TOLERANCES
A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 117, unless otherwise indicated.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section
014000 - Quality Requirements.
3.9 FORM REMOVAL
A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own
weight and imposed loads.
03100 - 4
Concrete Forming
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete
surfaces scheduled for exposure to view.
END OF SECTION
03200 - 1
Concrete Reinforcing
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 03200
CONCRETE REINFORCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Reinforcing steel for cast-in-place concrete.
B. Supports and accessories for steel reinforcement.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2016.
B. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2014 (Errata
2017).
C. ACI SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual; 2004.
D. ASTM A184/A184M - Standard Specification for Welded Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete
Reinforcement; 2017.
E. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2016.
F. ASTM A704/A704M - Standard Specification for Welded Steel Plain Bar or Rod Mats for Concrete
Reinforcement; 2017.
G. ASTM A706/A706M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Low-Alloy Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2016.
H. ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2017.
I. AWS D1.4/D1.4M - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel; 2011.
J. CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice; 2009.
K. CRSI (P1) - Placing Reinforcing Bars; 2011.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01340 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Comply with requirements of ACI SP-66. Include bar schedules, shapes of bent
bars, spacing of bars, and location of splices.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that reinforcing steel and accessories supplied for this project
meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301.
03200 - 2
Concrete Reinforcing
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (60,000 psi).
1.Unfinished.
B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A706/A706M, deformed low-alloy steel bars.
1.Unfinished.
C. Reinforcing Steel Mat: ASTM A704/A704M, using ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 40 (40,000 psi)
steel bars or rods, unfinished.
D. Reinforcement Accessories:
1.Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage, 0.0508 inch.
2.Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of
reinforcement during concrete placement.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice.
B. Welding of reinforcement is permitted only with the specific approval of Architect. Perform
welding in accordance with AWS D1.4/D1.4M.
C. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on drawings at point of minimum stress.
1.Review locations of splices with Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLACEMENT
A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required
position.
B. Do not displace or damage vapor retarder.
C. Accommodate placement of formed openings.
D. Conform to applicable code for concrete cover over reinforcement.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency, as specified in Section 014000, will inspect installed reinforcement
for conformance to contract documents before concrete placement.
END OF SECTION
03300 - 1
Cast in Place Concrete
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Floors and slabs on grade.
B. Concrete foundation walls.
C. Joint devices associated with concrete work.
D. Concrete curing.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010
(Reapproved 2015).
B. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass
Concrete; 1991 (Reapproved 2009).
C. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2016.
D. ACI 302.1R - Guide to Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; 2015.
E. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; 2000 (Reapproved
2009).
F. ACI 305R - Guide to Hot Weather Concreting; 2010.
G. ACI 306R - Guide to Cold Weather Concreting; 2016.
H. ACI 308R - Guide to External Curing of Concrete; 2016.
I. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2014 (Errata
2017).
J. ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; 2014.
K. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2016.
L. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2016, with Editorial Revision
(2016).
M. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens; 2018.
N. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2017a.
O. ASTM C109/C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement
Mortars (Using 2-in. or (50-mm) Cube Specimens); 2016a.
P. ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2015a.
Q. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2018.
R. ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2016.
03300 - 2
Cast in Place Concrete
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
S. ASTM C173/C173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method; 2016.
T. ASTM C260/C260M - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a
(Reapproved 2016).
U. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete; 2011.
V. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2017.
W. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for
Use in Concrete; 2015.
X. ASTM C827/C827M - Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical
Specimens of Cementitious Mixtures; 2016.
Y. ASTM C881/C881M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for
Concrete; 2015.
Z. ASTM C1059/C1059M - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened
Concrete; 2013.
AA. ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout
(Nonshrink); 2014a.
AB. ASTM C1240 - Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures; 2015.
AC. ASTM C1315 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds Having Special
Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete; 2011.
AD. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving
and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004, with
Editorial Revision (2013).
AE. ASTM E154/E154M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with
Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover; 2008a, with Editorial Revision (2013).
AF. ASTM E1155 - Standard Test Method for Determining F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor
Levelness Numbers; 2014.
AG. ASTM E1155M - Standard Test Method for Determining F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor
Levelness Numbers (Metric); 2014.
AH. ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation and Inspection of Water Vapor
Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 2011 (Reapproved
2017).
AI. ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil
or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 2017.
AJ. COE CRD-C 513 - COE Specifications for Rubber Water stops; 1974.
AK. COE CRD-C 572 - Corps of Engineers Specifications for Polyvinylchloride Water stop; 1974.
AL. ICRI 310.2R - Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings,
Polymer Overlays, and Concrete Repair; 2013.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Mix Design: Submit proposed concrete mix design.
03300 - 3
Cast in Place Concrete
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
1.Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 301, Section 4 -
Concrete Mixtures.
2.Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 318, Chapter 5 -
Concrete Quality, Mixing and Placing.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.
B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMWORK
A. Comply with requirements of Section 031000.
2.2 REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements of Section 032000.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type II - Moderate Portland type.
B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M.
C. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F.
D. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.
2.4 ADMIXTURES
A. Chemical Admixture:
B. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of
cement.
C. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M.
D. High Range Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type G.
E. High Range Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type F.
F. Water Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type E.
G. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type A.
2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Underslab Vapor Retarder: Sheet material complying with ASTM E1745, Class A; stated by
manufacturer as suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs.
The use of single ply polyethylene is prohibited.
1.Installation: Comply with ASTM E1643.
2.Accessory Products: Vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive,
mastic, prefabricated boots, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations.
B. Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate,
cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents.
1.Grout: Comply with ASTM C1107/C1107M.
2.Height Change, Plastic State; when tested in accordance with ASTM C827/C827M:
a.Maximum: Plus 4 percent.
03300 - 4
Cast in Place Concrete
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
b.Minimum: Plus 1 percent.
3.Minimum Compressive Strength at 48 Hours, ASTM C109/C109M: 2,000 pounds per
square inch.
4.Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days, ASTM C109/C109M: 7,000 pounds per
square inch.
5.Products containing aluminum powder are not permitted.
2.6 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS
A. Latex Bonding Agent: Non-redispersable acrylic latex, complying with ASTM C1059/C1059M,
Type II.
B. Slab Isolation Joint Filler: 1/2-inch-thick, height equal to slab thickness, with removable top
section that will form 1/2-inch-deep sealant pocket after removal.
1.Material: ASTM D1751, cellulose fiber.
C. Dowel Sleeves: Plastic sleeve for smooth, round, steel load-transfer dowels.
2.7 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Reducer: Liquid thin-film-forming compound that reduces rapid moisture loss caused
by high temperature, low humidity, and high winds; intended for application immediately after
concrete placement.
B. Curing Agent, Water Replacement Type: Clear, water based, liquid water cure replacement agent
complying with ASTM C309 standards for water retention, and with ACI 302.1R.
C. Curing and Sealing Compound, Moisture Emission Reducing: Liquid, membrane-forming, clear
sealer, for application to newly placed concrete; capable of providing adequate bond for flooring
adhesives, initially and over the long term; with sufficient moisture vapor impermeability to prevent
deterioration of flooring adhesives due to moisture emission.
1.Use this product to cure and seal all slabs to receive adhesively applied flooring or roofing.
2.Comply with ASTM C309 and ASTM C1315 Type I Class A.
3.VOC Content: Less than 100 g/L.
4.Solids Content: 25 percent, minimum.
D. Curing Compound, Non-dissipating: Liquid, membrane-forming, clear, non-yellowing acrylic;
complying with ASTM C309.
1.Solids by Mass: 15 percent, minimum.
2.VOC Content: OTC compliant.
2.8 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.
1.Replace as much Portland cement as possible with fly ash, ground granulated blast
furnace slag, silica fume, or rice hull ash as is consistent with ACI recommendations.
B. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates
recommended or required by manufacturer.
C. Normal Weight Concrete:
1.Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight.
2.Total Air Content: 4 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C173/C173M.
2.9 MIXING
A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
03300 - 5
Cast in Place Concrete
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent.
B. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of
form accessories.
C. Prepare existing concrete surfaces to be repaired according to ICRI 310.2Rp.
D. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by
cleaning and applying bonding agent in according to bonding agent manufacturer's instructions.
1.Use epoxy bonding system for bonding to damp surfaces, for structural load-bearing
applications, and where curing under humid conditions is required.
2.Use latex bonding agent only for non-load-bearing applications.
E. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert
steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout.
F. Interior Slabs on Grade: Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum
6 inches. Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's recommended
products and follow manufacturer's written instructions. Repair damaged vapor retarder before
covering.
3.3 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.
B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R.
C. Notify Architect not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations.
D. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test
samples taken.
E. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices
will not be disturbed during concrete placement.
F. Place concrete continuously without construction (cold) joints wherever possible; where
construction joints are necessary, before next placement prepare joint surface by removing
laitance and exposing the sand and sound surface mortar, by sandblasting or high-pressure water
jetting.
G. Finish floors level and flat, unless otherwise indicated, within the tolerances specified below.
3.4 SLAB JOINTING
A. Locate joints as indicated on the drawings.
B. Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement.
C. Isolation Joints: Use preformed joint filler with removable top section for joint sealant, total height
equal to thickness of slab, set flush with top of slab.
1.Install wherever necessary to separate slab from other building members, including
columns, walls, equipment foundations, footings, stairs, manholes, sumps, and drains.
D. Saw Cut Contraction Joints: Saw cut joints before concrete begins to cool, within 4 to 12 hours
after placing; use 3/16-inch-thick blade and cut at least 1 inch deep but not less than one quarter
(1/4) the depth of the slab.
E. Construction Joints: Where not otherwise indicated, use metal combination screed and key form,
with removable top section for joint sealant.
03300 - 6
Cast in Place Concrete
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
3.5 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness:
1.Exposed Concrete Floors: 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
2.Under Seamless Resilient Flooring: 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
3.Under Carpeting: 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
B. Correct the slab surface if tolerances are less than specified.
C. Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas requiring
corrective work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process.
3.6 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork.
B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in
height.
C. Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or
more in height. Provide finish as follows:
1.Smooth Rubbed Finish: Wet concrete and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive,
not more than 24 hours after form removal.
D. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows:
1.Surfaces to Be Left Exposed: Trowel as described in ACI 302.1R, minimizing
burnish marks and other appearance defects.
E. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at
1:100 nominal.
3.7 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from
premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.
B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period
necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.
1.Normal concrete: Not less than seven days.
C. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms:
1.Slabs and Floors To Receive Adhesive-Applied Flooring: Curing compounds and other
surface coatings are usually considered unacceptable by flooring and adhesive
manufacturers. If such materials must be used, either obtain the approval of the flooring
and adhesive manufacturers prior to use or remove the surface coating after curing to
flooring manufacturer's satisfaction.
2.Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry.
Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water-saturated
sand, water-fog spray, or saturated burlap.
3.Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section
014000 - Quality Requirements.
B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm.
C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review
prior to commencement of concrete operations.
03300 - 7
Cast in Place Concrete
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
D. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance
with specified requirements.
E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M, for each test, mold and cure three concrete test
cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 100 cubic yards or less of each class of concrete placed.
F. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same
conditions as concrete it represents.
G. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTM
C143/C143M.
3.9 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor
within 24 hours of test.
B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or
specified requirements.
C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of
additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified.
D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of
Architect for each individual area.
3.10 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected concrete floor surface until fully cured.
END OF SECTION
03366 - 1
Concrete Sealer
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 03366
CONCRETE DENSIFIER/SEALER/HARDENER
Part 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Summary of Work:
1.Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and service for all concrete
sealer/densifier/hardener application as indicated, in accordance with provisions of
Contract Documents.
2.Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3.Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or
miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to, or necessary for sound,
secure and complete installation.
4.See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work:
1.Section 03300: Cast in Place Concrete
1.02 SYSTEM
A. Description: A sealer/densifier/hardener that will react with concrete surfaces to produce a
dense, hydrophobic, insoluble, moisture barrier to seal out contaminants, while hardening
and densifying surface.
B. Location of work: New interior concrete floor slabs and exterior loading dock.
1.03 REFERENCES AND QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. References:
1.Corps of Engineers Spec: CEGS 03300 4-79
2.USDA approved
3.Dept. Of Navy, GSA, VA approved
B. Design criteria:
1.ACI 302 Class 1 through 4 concrete floors.
2.May be used on Class 5 and 6 floors when used with mineral or metallic aggregate
hardeners and toppings, and Class 9, Super-flat floors.
3.Complies with all Federal and State VOC requirements.
4.Independent Test Data, ASTM C 779, Procedure A, reduction of surface abrasion by
50% or more at the 30 minute time interval.
C. Applicator qualifications:
1.Approved in writing by manufacturer.
1.04 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
A. Product data:
1.Furnish if required by A/E.
B. Samples:
1.Furnish if required by A/E.
C. Project information:
1.Test reports
2.Certificate of rate of application
D. Project closeout data:
1.Signed 10-year warranty
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
03366 - 2
Concrete Sealer
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
A. Deliver to jobsite in sealed, labeled containers.
B. Store and handle to prevent damage to product and environment.
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Existing conditions, prior to installation:
1.Assure concrete has been cured a minimum of 3 days.
2.Assure concrete is clean and free of membrane forming curing compounds and/or other
sealers.
3.Concrete is free of laitance, grease, oil and contaminants.
B. Environmental requirements:
1.Comply with all VOC and EPA requirements.
C. Protection:
1.Protect adjacent surfaces/areas from damage due to over spray; especially glass and
painted surfaces.
2.Comply with 1.06 A above.
1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A. At the engineer's request, technical personnel shall be available for a pre-job conference to
review installation procedures.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Written warranty signed jointly by applicator, manufacturer and contractor.
B. Warrant installation for a period of 10 years from date of substantial completion against
dusting from abrasion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE SEALER/DENSIFIER/HARDENER
A. Acceptable manufacturers: L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc., 14851 Calhoun Road,
Omaha, NE 68152 (800-362-3331).
1.Product:
a.Base: SEAL HARD; a solution of 100% active ingredient chemicals which
penetrate concrete to seal, densify, dustproof and harden to resist water and oil
penetration, and contamination.
Active ingredients: 100%
Type: Alkali Siliconate
Flash Point: None
Specific Gravity: 1.155
VOC: gm/L: 0
Solids minimum: 30%
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PRE-INSTALLATION INSPECTION
A. Assure surfaces are clean and free of all contaminants, and any film forming curing
compounds or sealers.
03366 - 3
Concrete Sealer
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
B. Assure concrete has been cured a minimum of 3 days before application.
C. Protect concrete from construction activity staining.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. A. Apply in accord with manufacturer's instructions.
1.Apply directly from sealer container onto prepared surfaces, undiluted.
2.Application equipment: Mechanical "walk-behind" or riding scrubber.
3.Apply at minimum rate of 1 gallon per 150-200 sq. ft.
4.Allow surfaces to remain wet with sealer for 30-60 minutes.
5.Remove excess sealer at end of application procedure by water flushing and then
squeegee dry.
6.Apply in 1 coat.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Have applicator certify rate of application.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Leave area broom clean.
END OF SECTION
Division Six
Wood and Plastics
06100- 1
Rough Carpentry
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE:
A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and related items required for the complete installation
of Rough Carpentry work as indicated by the Contract Documents.
B. This Section includes but is not limited to: Framing with dimension lumber, Wood blocking and
nailers, Utility shelving, Wood furring, Sheathing, Sub-flooring and underlayment, Building wrap.
1.2 STANDARDS:
A. Meet requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of Standards listed:
1. Product Standards PS
2. American Plywood Association APA, DFPA
3. Architectural Woodwork Institute AWI
4. American Wood Preservers Institute AWPI
5. National Forest Products Association NFPA
6. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau SPIB
1.3 MATERIAL GRADING:
A. The grades of materials used shall be defined by the rules of the recognized associations of lumber
manufacturers producing the material specified, but the maximum defects permissible in any specific
grade shall not exceed the limitations of the American Lumber Standards.
B. Lumber shall comply with DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by
the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
C. Defects expressly prohibited by this Section shall not appear in the material used, even if permissible
in the grade specifications.
D. The sizes specified are nominal board measure dimensions unless otherwise noted.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Certification:
1. Pressure treated wood: Submit certification by treating plant stating chemicals and process
used, net amounts of salts retained, and conformance with applicable standards.
2. Preservation treated wood: Submit certification for water-borne preservative that moisture
content was reduced to 19% maximum, after treatment.
3. Fire retardant treatment: Submit certification by treating plant that fire retardant treatment
materials comply with governing ordinances, and that treatment will not bleed through finished
surfaces.
06100- 2
Rough Carpentry
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING:
A. Immediately upon delivery to jobsite, place materials in an area protected from the weather.
B. Store materials a minimum of 6" above the ground on framework or blocking, and cover with a
protective waterproof covering providing for adequate air circulation and ventilation.
C. Do not store seasoned materials in wet or damp areas.
D. Protect fire retardant materials against high humidity and moisture during storage and erection.
E. Protect sheet materials from corner breakage and surface damage, while stored or unloading.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Wood: Wood for framing and general carpentry work shall be sound, well manufactured, and with
moisture content limit of 19%. Lumber shall be dressed S4S unless otherwise indicated. Green
lumber shall not be used.
B. Plywood Backing Panels; Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1,
Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated where required, in thickness indicated or, if not
indicated, not less than 5/8-inch (13-mm) nominal thickness.
C. Bracing, Blocking, Nailers, and Grounds: Grade marked, No. 2 commercial Southern Yellow Pine or
construction grade Douglas Fir, moisture content under 19%, S4S.
D. Rough hardware: Nails, spikes, screws, bolts, etc shall be of the proper types and sizes, and used in
such numbers and quantities as is the usual custom in good practice for securing the various items
and members.
E. Preservatives:
1. Use lumber pressure treated with water borne salts preservative, Wolman, Erdalith, or
Chenowater Zinch Cloride in accordance with AWPI Specification P-5 for abutting concrete or
masonry in damp locations.
2. Reduce moisture content to 19% or less after treatment for 2" thick lumber.
3. Reduce moisture content to 23% or less after treatment for lumber larger than 2" nominal
thickness.
4. Furnish certificate from lumber treating company showing treatment amount, and moisture
content after drying.
1. Brush coat with preservatives, surfaces that have been cut after treatment.
2. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
a.Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in
contact with masonry or concrete.
b.Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with
earth.
c.Mezzanine framing and stairs associated with baptistry.
F. Fire Retardant Treatment:
1. Use fire retardant pressure treated wood for all wood blocking and framing where required by
06100- 3
Rough Carpentry
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
code or the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
2. Method of treatment: Equal to that manufactured by Osmose Flame Proof, to comply with UL
requirement for a flamespread of 25 or less, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion
when tested for 3 minute duration under the standard test method for fire hazard classification of
building materials (ASTM A-84).
3. Indicate on each piece of wood the UL Fr-5 Label, indicating compliance with the fire hazard
classification.
4. Dry all lumber 2" nominal or less, after treatment, to an average moisture content of 19% or less.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Cutting and Repairing: Do such work as normally required and done for mechanical and other
trades.
B. Blocking: Furnish and install blocking, furring, brackets, etc., as required to properly carry out all
work shown and reasonably inferred by the Drawings and Specifications.
C. Nailers and Wood Cants: Nailers, 2" stock unless otherwise noted, of the proper widths. Bevel
nailers for concrete 1/2" both sides and properly place in forms. Bolt nailers in place on steel or
masonry. Furnish ledgers bolted to wall in locations shown and as required. Where bolt sizes
are not specifically indicated, use not less than 3/8" bolts at 32" o.c. staggered.
D. Shoring: Furnish and place all necessary shoring and bracing of types and sizes best suited for the
conditions to be met. Shoring must comply with all governing requirements.
E. Bucks: Provide wood bucks for frames as required. Members shall be at least 2 x 4 material and
shall be securely spiked together.
F. Parapet Extensions: Provide wood plates as indicated to extend roof parapets. Use preservative
treated lumber.
END OF SECTION
Division Seven
Thermal and Moisture Protection
07900 - 1
Sealants
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 07900
SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: This work comprises the sealing and caulking of joints.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Submit samples of all proposed sealant to the Architect for review and color selection.
B. Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, limitations,
and color availability and application instruction.
C. Construct one filed sample joint, 5 feet long, illustrating sealant type, color, and tooled surface.
1.3 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: No caulking shall be done at temperatures below 40 degrees
Fahrenheit.
1.4 GUARANTEE
A. Furnish to the Owner a written guarantee that the caulking shall remain watertight for a period of 2
years from the date of acceptance of the building. Joints, which prove defective by leaking, cracking,
melting or shrinking of the sealant shall be re-sealed without additional expense to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Silicone-Sanitary: (Designation S-GP). Permapol P.C. sealant or approved equal, Federal Spec.
Number TT-S-00230C Type II, Class A. Provide and install at window frames.
B. Urethane – Multi-component. (Designation U-MC) Tremco Dymeric 511, Sonolastic NP-2, Pecora
Dynatrol II or approved equal. ASTM C 920, Type M, grade NS, Class 25. Color as selected by
Architect.
C. Urethane - Single component (Designation U-SC); Tremco Dymonic, Sonneborn Sonolastic NP-1
or approved equal. ASTM C 920, Type S, grade NS, Class 25. Color as selected by Architect.
D. Silicone-Sanitary; (Designation S-S) 786 Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant, Dow Corning or
approved equal.
E. Urethane – Traffic Bearing: (Designation U-TB) Type M, Grade P or NS, Sonneborn SL 2 Sealant or
approved equal.
F. Acrylic Latex: (Designation AL.); Percora AC-20 or approved equal. Non-sag; non staining; non-
bleeding. Color as selected by Architect.
G. Primer: Synthetic resin solution recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
07900 - 2
Sealants
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
H. Backing Material: Expanded, closed-cell neoprene, polyurethane or polyethylene rod stock.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean out joints to be caulked. Remove loose mortar and other material completely by
compressed air or brushing. Joint surfaces shall be clean and dry.
1. Joints to be caulked shall be at least l/4 inch wide. At any points where the width of joint is
appreciably less, cut or grind out the joint to that width to assure an adequate volume of sealant
along the length of the joint.
2. Pack with backing material the voids and recesses around metal frames which are deeper than
the depth required for caulking. Leave the proper depth for the sealant.
3. In open joints and where detailed, install rod stock as backup for the caulking. Roll the material
into the joints to avoid stretching. The natural thickness of the rod stock shall be approximately
twice the thickness of the joint in which it is installed.
4. Elsewhere as may be required, apply a bond-breaker strip of polyethylene or masking tape
along the bottom of the joints.
5. Particular attention shall be paid to the preparation of the horizontal joints in concrete, which are
to be filled with sealant. Adjust joint depth to comply with sealant manufacturer's
recommendations by malleting down the joint filler or filling in with rod stock as may be required.
6. Where sealant is to be applied against smooth metal surfaces, wipe these surfaces clean with a
suitable ketone solvent immediately prior to caulking.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Priming: Prime porous joint surfaces, particularly concrete. Test the primer to be used to make
sure that it causes no undue staining or discoloring of the material on which it is applied.
B. Depth of Caulk: Generally, caulk joints to a depth no greater than the joint width, but never less
than l/4" deep. Follow the sealant manufacturer's recommendations where possible.
C. Caulking: Apply the sealant in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Application shall be
by the method best suited to the job conditions.
1. Force the sealant into the joints with enough pressure to expel all air and provide a solid filling.
Correct any flowing or sagging before final inspection is made.
2. Where adjacent surfaces permit, use masking tape to obtain straight, even lines. Remove the
tape immediately after the joints have been sealed.
3. Fill joints flush with adjacent surfaces except where a recessed joint is specifically detailed. Tool
beads with a sled runner or similar tool, using clean water as a tooling agent, to insure firm, full
contact with joint faces.
07900 - 3
Sealants
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent surfaces of sealant and other soiling due to caulking operations. This Contractor
shall be responsible for and shall bear the cost of replacing any material damaged or discolored
due to caulking or the cleaning of excess caulking materials.
3.4 CAULKING SCHEDULE
A. Exterior locations:
a. Wall joints:
1. Bordered on both sides by porous building material (concrete, stone, masonry,
exterior insulation and finish systems, etc.) Designation U-MC.
2. Bordered on both sides by non-porous building material (coated and uncoated
metals, anodized aluminum, porcelain tile and glass); Designation S-GP.
3. Bordered on one side by porous building material (concrete, stone, uncoated metals,
anodized aluminum, and glass); Designation U-MC
b. Perimeter of penetrations through walls: Designation U-MC
c. Expansion joints in ceilings, soffits, and overhead surfaces: Designation U-MC.
d. Wall and ceiling joints between frames and their rough opening: Designation U-MC.
e. Control joints and perimeter of penetrations in ceiling soffits and overhead surfaces;
Designation U-MC.
f. Wall and ceiling joints between frames and adjoining surfaces: Designation U-MC.
g. Joints and perimeter of penetration in horizontal pedestrian and vehicle traffic surfaces:
Designation U-TB
B. Interior locations:
a. Wall and ceiling joints subject to movement: Designation U-MC.
b. Interior side of exterior openings and concrete panels: U-MC.
c. Floor joints: Designation U-TB
d. Wall and ceiling joints between frames and their rough opening: Designation AL
e. Wall and ceiling joints between frames and adjoining surfaces: Designation AL.
f. Interior Sanitary joints: Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining floor, wall and ceiling
surfaces; and areas subject to frequent wet cleaning, including joints between walls and
floors, joints between back splashes and wall substrates: Designation S-S.
g. Thresholds: Set all thresholds in a full bed of caulk: Designation U-SC.
h. Metal Stud tracks: set all perimeter channel tracks in a full bed of caulk. Designation U-SC
END OF SECTION
Division Eight
Doors and Windows
08110- 1
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 08110
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Specification includes non-rated and fire rated, shop formed, primed, hollow metal doors and
frames.
B. Requirements: Applicable provisions of the General Conditions and of Division 1, General
Requirements, govern all work specified in this section.
C. Submittals: Prior to the fabrication of any material covered under this Section, complete shop
drawings shall be furnished in four copies, blue line prints, with reference made to door numbers
and room numbers shown on the Architectural drawings. Fabrications shall not be started until
the Consultant has approved the submittal in writing.
D. Protection: Hollow metal doors shall arrive at the job site marked to agree with the approved shop
drawings. Store material under cover on wood runners or floors, and in positions recommended
by the manufacturer, always in a manner that will prevent rust and damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Metal Doors:
1. Hollow metal non-labeled doors shall be flush, sized as shown on the drawings or 1-3/4 inches
thick, with no seams on faces of doors. Face sheets shall be 18 ga. cold rolled steel,
reinforced full height with steel channels or Z stiffeners. Core spaces between stiffeners shall
be completely filled with insulating and sound deadening material. The cores are to be
surrounded by 18 ga. cold rolled steel channels and the face sheets will be welded to the
channels. All cracks at door edges will be filled with a metal filler. Each door will be thoroughly
cleaned of all rust, scale, etc. and given a phosphatizing treatment to insure maximum paint
adherence. All doors will be primed with one coat of high quality rust resisting, gray metal
primer.
2. 2. Labeled metal doors shall be flush, sized as shown on the drawings 1 3/4 inches thick and
meet the requirements and carry the labels of the Underwriters ' Laboratories, Inc., as shown
on the drawings. The cores will be filled with incombustible insulation specifically
manufactured for fire-rated door applications. All labeled doors shall be factory cut and
prepared to receive view panels, finish hardware, etc. No job alterations of labeled doors will
be allowed. All edges of the door will be surrounded by an 18 ga. cold-rolled steel channel.
The face sheets shall be 18 ga. electro-galvanized and bonderized steel sheets which will be
securely attached to the cores or stiffeners, and welded to the edge channels around the metal
filler. There will be no exposed cracks or seams either on the surface or the edges of the
doors. All doors shall be painted with one coat of high quality, rust resisting, gray metal
primer. Labeled doors shall match non-labeled doors exactly in appearance.
3. Door reinforcement for hardware, outlined in the finish hardware schedule shall be as
08110- 2
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
follows:
a. Hinge 10 gauge Minimum
b. Lock 14 gauge "
c. Closer 12 gauge "
d. Flush bolt 14 gauge "
e. Hold-open arm 12 gauge "
f. Pull plate & bar 16 gauge "
g. Panic devices 14 gauge "
4. Locate hardware on doors and frames as follows, unless specifically detailed otherwise:
a. Locks & Latches 38" from floor to centerline of knob.
b. Push Plates 45" from floor to centerline of plate.
c. Mulls 42" from floor to centerline of grip.
d. Mortise Deadlocks 60" from floor to centerline of cylinder.
e. Panic Hardware 38" from floor to centerline of cross bar.
f. Top Hinge 5" from frame head to top of hinge.
g. Bottom Hinge 10" from floor to bottom of hinge.
h. Intermediate Hinge Centered between top and bottom hinges.
5. Exterior hollow metal doors scheduled to be insulated shall be insulated by filling core
completely with urethane foam insulation. Density of foam shall exceed 1.8 pcf and have a
crush strength of 3600 psf. Refer to Door Schedule for locations.
B. Door Frames
1. Fabricated doorframes of 16-gauge cold-rolled steel for interior, 14 gauge for exterior, in sizes
and profiles as shown on Drawings. Miter corners, weld and grind smooth unless otherwise
indicated on Drawings.
2. Prepare frames to receive three silencers at single door openings and two silencers at
openings with doors in pairs. Omit silencers at exterior doors.
3. Apply a shop coat of baked-on rust inhibiting primer.
4. Provide a removable spreader bar welded to the bottom of frames for rigidity during transit
handling.
5. Frames over 4'-0" wide for installation in masonry walls shall have an angle or channel
stiffener, not less than 12 ga. and not longer than the opening width, welded onto the head at
the factory. Such stiffeners shall not be used as lintels or load-carrying members.
6. Fabricate frames for large openings in knocked down sections for field assembly with butt
joints and internal reinforcing sleeves. Knocked down frame assemblies shall be trial
assembled in the shop.
7. Loose glazing stops shall be 20 ga. steel, butted at corner joints and fastened with oval head
countersunk screws.
C. Frame Anchors:
1. For each jamb in masonry walls, provide 3 or more 16 ga. adjustable jamb anchors of the T-
strap type spaced not more than 30" apart. Furnish yoke type Underwriters anchors for labeled
08110- 3
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
door openings only.
2. For each jamb in steel stud partitions, provide 4 or more 18 ga. jamb anchors designed for this
type of construction. Anchors shall be welded inside each jamb and wired or bolted to the
studs.
D. Frame Reinforcement
1. Hinge: 8 gauge
2. Lock: 14 gauge
3. Closer: 12 gauge
4. Hold Open Devices: 12 gauge
2.2 CLEARANCES
A. Edge clearances shall be provided as follows:
1. Between door and frame, at head and jambs - 1/8"
2. At door sills: where no threshold is used - 3/8" maximum
where threshold is used - 3/4" max. above finished floor
2.3 LABELED DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Labeled doors and frames shall be provided for those openings requiring fire protectant
ratings as determined and scheduled by the Architect. Such doors and frames shall be
constructed as tested and approved by a nationally recognized testing agency having a
factory inspection service.
B. If any door or frame specified by the Architect to be fire-rated cannot qualify for appropriate
labeling because of its design, hardware or any other reason, the Architect shall be so
advised before fabricating work on that item is started.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fabrication
1. General: Steel doors and frames to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or
buckle. Wherever practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that
cannot be permanently factory-assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at project
site. Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat Phillips heads for exposed screws and
bolts. Prepare doors and frames to receive mortise and concealed finish hardware in accordance
with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Reinforce doors
and frames to receive surface applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface applied finish
hardware may be done at project site. Clean, treat and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and
frame units, including galvanized surfaces.
B. Hanging Doors:
1. General: Install steel doors and frames in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's
data, and applicable Steel Door Institute Standards. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed,
aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed,
remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
08110- 4
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
2. Anchors: Provide floor and jamb anchors standard with manufacturer.
3. Grouting Frames: In masonry construction frames shall be filled completely with grout.
4. Fitting doors: Fit doors accurately within clearances specified in SDI-100.
5. Fire rated Assemblies: Install in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80.
C. It shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor to perform the following:
1. Prior to installation all frames must be checked and corrected for size, swing, squareness,
alignment, twist and plumbness. Permissible installation tolerances shall not exceed the
following:
Squareness + 1/16": measured on a line, 90 degrees from one jamb, the upper corner
of the frame at the other jamb.
Alignment + 1/16": measured on jambs on a horizontal line parallel to the wall.
Twist + 1/16" measured at face corners of jambs on parallel lines perpendicular to the
plane of the wall.
Plumbness + 1/16" measured on the jamb at the floor.
Details opposite illustrate methods of measuring above specified tolerances.
2. Proper door clearances must be maintained in accordance with these specifications,
except for special conditions otherwise noted. Where necessary, metal hinge shims,
furnished by the General Contractor, are acceptable to maintain clearances.
3. Hardware must be applied in accordance with hardware manufacturer's templates and
instructions.
END OF THIS SECTION
08360- 1
Sectional Overhead Insulated Doors
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 08360
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD INSULATED DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. All of the Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1
General Requirements, apply to the work of this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. The work of this Section includes upward-acting sectional doors.
B. Related Sections: Other specification sections which directly relate to the work of this Section
include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Section 08710 - Finish Hardware; key cylinders for locks.
3. Section 09900 - Painting; field painting.
4. Section 16100 - Electrical; wiring.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers product data and installation instructions for each type of
sectional door. Include both published data and any specific data prepared for this project.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawing for approval prior to fabrication. Include detailed plans,
elevations, details of framing members, required clearances, anchors, and accessories. Include
relationship with adjacent materials.
1.04. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Sectional doors shall be manufactured by a firm with a minimum of five years of
experience in the fabrication and installation of sectional doors. Manufacturers proposed for use,
which are not named in these specifications, shall submit evidence of ability to meet performance
and fabrication requirements specified, and include a list of five projects of similar design and
complexity completed within the past five years.
B. Installer: Installation of sectional doors shall be performed by the authorized representative of the
manufacturer.
C. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide doors, tracks, motors, and accessories from one
manufacturer for each type of door. Provide secondary components from source acceptable to
manufacturer of primary components.
08360- 2
Sectional Overhead Insulated Doors
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
D. Pre-Installation Conference: Schedule and convene a pre-installation conference just prior to
commencement of field operations, to establish procedures to maintain optimum working
conditions and to coordinate this work with related and adjacent work.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials and products in labeled protective packages. Store and handle in strict
compliance with manufacturers instructions and recommendations. Protect from damage from
weather, excessive temperatures and construction operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
A. Provide sectional doors by Overhead Door Corporation, Dallas, Texas or approved equal.
2.02 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCT:
A. 591 Series Thermacore® Insulated Steel Doors by Overhead Door Corporation or approved
equal.
B. Sectional Door Assembly: Metal/foam/metal sandwich panel construction, with EPDM thermal
break and ship-lap design with rounded water channels. Units shall have the following
characteristics:
1. Panel Thickness: 1-5/8".
2. Exterior Surface: Ribbed, textured.
3. Exterior Steel: 0.016", hot-dipped galvanized.
4. End Stiles: 16 gauge.
5. Standard Springs: 10,000 cycles.
6. Insulation: CFC-free and HCFC-free polyurethane, fully encapsulated.
7. Thermal Values: R-value of 14.86; U-value of 0.067
8. Air Infiltration: 0.08 cfm at 15 mph; 0.13 cfm at 25 mph.
9. Pass-Door: Not required.
10. High-Usage Package: Not required.
C. Finish and Color: Two coat baked-on polyester with white exterior and white interior color.
D. Windload Design: ANSI/NAGDM 102 standards and as required by code.
E. Hardware: Galvanized steel hinges and fixtures. Ball bearing rollers with hardened steel races.
F. Lock: Interior mounted slide lock.
G. Weatherstripping: EPDM rubber tube seals fitted inside joints between sections. EPDM rubber
bulb-type strip at bottom. Header seal and jamb weatherstripping.
H. Track: Provide 3” track to suit loading required and clearances available.
08360- 3
Sectional Overhead Insulated Doors
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
I. Electric Motor Operation: Provide UL listed electric operator, size and type as recommended by
manufacturer to move door in either direction at not less than 2/3 foot or more than 1 foot per
second.
1. Entrapment Protection: Photoelectric sensors.
2. Operator Controls: Push-button operated control stations with open, close, and stop
buttons for surface mounting, for interior location.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Take field dimension and examine conditions of substrates, supports, and other conditions under
which this work is to be performed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are
corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Strictly comply with manufacturers installation instructions and recommendations. Coordinate
installation with adjacent work to ensure proper clearances and allow for maintenance.
B. Instruct Owners personnel in proper operating procedures and maintenance schedule.
3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Test sectional doors for proper operation and adjust as necessary to provide proper operation
without binding or distortion.
B. Touch-up damaged coatings and finishes and repair minor damage. Clean exposed surfaces
using non-abrasive materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of material or product
being cleaned.
END OF SECTION
08710- 1
Door Hardware
Nelson + Morgan, Architects 651 Mayhill Road
NMA 18016 Issued for Bidding and Construction November 19, 2018
SECTION 08710
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Related Documents:
1. Provisions established within General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract,
Division 1 - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to this
Section.
B. Section Includes: Finish hardware for hollow steel, wood, and aluminum doors .
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work of this Section with other directly affected Sections involving manufacturer of any
internal reinforcement for door hardware.
B. Owner furnished Access Control System; coordinate installation of rough-in and preparation of
electrical devices and hardware for Owner installed ACS.
C. Owner will furnish final key cores and final keying.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
B. Manufacturers: Companies specializing in manufacturing door hardware with minimum 3 years’
experience.
C. Hardware Supplier: Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware with 2 years’
experience, with AHC designation.
D. Hardware Installer: Employ a qualified carpentry person to perform the work of this Section.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable building code for requirements applicable to fire rated doors and frames.
B. Conform to the applicable sections of Chapter 5 of NFPA 101, NFPA 80, and NFPA 252.
C. Comply with provisions of ANSI A117.1 and Texas Accessibility Standards to accommodate
handicapped persons.
D. Provide hardware which has been tested and listed by UL or FM for fire rated assemblies of types
which comply with requirements of door and frame labels.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit schedule, shop drawings, and product data under provisions of Section 01340.
B. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware.
C. Provide product data on specified hardware.
D. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01340.
E. Submit manufacturer's certification that fire rated hardware meets or exceeds specified
requirements.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions
requiring special attention.
1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01780.
B. Record actual locations of installed cylinders and their key code.
1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01780.
B. Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related
to preventative maintenance.
08710- 2
Door Hardware
Nelson + Morgan, Architects 651 Mayhill Road
NMA 18016 Issued for Bidding and Construction November 19, 2018
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and protect products under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Package hardware items individually; label and identify package with door opening code to match
hardware schedule.
C. Deliver permanent keys to Owner direct from hardware supplier.
D. Protect hardware from theft by cataloging and storing in secure area.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01310.
B. Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of
internal reinforcement for door hardware.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Provide 2 year warranty under provisions of Section 01780.
1.11 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component.
B. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Hardware shall be complete with all necessary screws, bolts, anchors or other fastenings for
proper application of suitable size and type, and match hardware as to materials and finish.
B. Not all items listed are required for this project. Coordinate with schedule for specific
requirements.
2.2 HINGES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Hager Hinge Co., St. Louis, MO.
2. McKinney, Scranton, PA.
3. Stanley Hardware Division of The Stanley Works, New Britain, CT.
B. Butt Hinges:
1. Comply with ANSI A156.1 and A156.7.
2. Five knuckle designs with square corners.
3. Full mortise type.
4. Flat button tip and matching plug.
5. Non-removable pins for out-swinging exterior doors and for interior reverse bevel doors
equipped with locking device; safety stud also acceptable. Non-rising pin for other doors.
6. Non-ferrous construction at locations exposed to exterior atmosphere.
7. Heavy weight for doors 3’-4" width and over and for fire rated doors over 8’-0" height.
Standard weight at other doors.
8. Anti-friction or ball bearing type for doors equipped with closers.
9. Anti-friction or ball bearing type for doors (3’-0") width and over which are not equipped with
closers.
10. Plain bearing type for doors less than 3’-0" width which are not equipped with closers.
D. Minimum Number Hinges, Butt style:
1. Doors 5’-0" or less in height: One pair.
2. Doors over 5’-0" and not over 7’-6": 1-1/2 pair.
3. Doors over 7’-6": One for each additional 2’-6" height or fraction thereof.
4. Dutch doors: 2 pair.
E. Minimum Size and Gage:
1. Doors 3’-0" width or less: 4-1/2 by 4-1/2 inches, 0.134 gage
2. Doors over 3’-0" up to 3’-4": 5 by 4-1/2 inches, 0.146 gage).
08710- 3
Door Hardware
Nelson + Morgan, Architects 651 Mayhill Road
NMA 18016 Issued for Bidding and Construction November 19, 2018
3. Doors over 3’-4": 5 by 4-1/2 inches, 0.190 gage.
4. Fire rated doors over 8’-0" height: Sized as indicated above, except not less than 0.180
gage.
5. Doors scheduled for spring hinges: 4-1/2 by 4-1/2 inches, 0.134 gage).
2.3 CONTINUOUS GEARED HINGES
1. Hager Roton or approved equal.
2. 780 Heavy Duty Series
3. Thrust bearings along hinge length on 2-9/16” centers.
4. Staggered screw holes.
2.4 CYLINDERS and PERMANENT CORES
A. Provide cylinders for locksets, deadlocks, exit devices, and other control and locking devices
indicated in Hardware Sets.
B. Furnish permanent cores keyed to factory-registered extension of Owners existing Best series
interchangeable core cylinder system.
C. Cores shall be Solid brass construction to provide high quality and long cylinder life.
D. Removable Core: 7 pin tumbler interchangeable core design removable by a control key.
1. Brass cylinder body having a head cap of brass, bronze or stainless steel
finished to match locking trim.
2. Equip cylinders with appropriate rings.
3. Equip with proper tail piece for mortise and or rim cylinders.
E. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Best Access Systems.
No Substitutions
F. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application.
G. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim
ring.
H. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks.
I. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be flush
and be free spinning with matching finishes.
J. Keyway: Match Facility Standard.
K. Equip cylinders with appropriate rings.
L. Finish cylinders and rings to match trim.
2.5 KEYS AND KEYING
A. Consult with Owner’s authorized representative and prepare detailed keying schedule
accordingly.
B. Keying:
1. Provide Best interchangeable core cylinders designed so that cores can
quickly and easily be changed by non-technical personnel by using a special
control key.
C. Construction Keying:
1. Furnish exterior door lock sets with keyed alike removable
construction core cylinders for use during construction.
2. Restrict distribution of construction keys. Maintain record of persons who
have received keys and deliver copies of record to Contracting Officer
upon request.
3. Provide permanent cores to owner prior to substantial completion.
4. Owner shall store them securely until needed. At substantial completion and at
Contracting Officer direction, remove construction cores and replace with
permanent cores in presence of Owner.
08710- 4
Door Hardware
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
5. Provide keys to Owner and return construction cores to manufacturer.
D. Permanent Keying: Master locks and cylinders are to match the Best Key System as
instructed by owner.
E. Provide keys of Nickel Silver Material in Following Quantities:
1. Grandmaster-keys (MGK): Six (6)
2. Master keys (MK - each set): Six (6)
3. Change-keys (per lock): Two (2)
4. Removable Core Control Keys: Six (6)
5. Construction Master keys: Ten (10)
6. Construction Control Keys Two (2)
F. Identification and Control:
1. Stamp all keys with do not duplicate, or as otherwise instructed by owner.
G. Furnish visual control system; coordinate provisions with Owner. Stamp or emboss keys with
identification code.
H. Deliver construction master keys to Project site. Forward other keys directly from
manufacturer to Owner. Ship master keys, and grandmaster-keys via prepaid registered
mail. Ship change keys via prepaid freight.
2.6 LOCKING AND LATCHING DEVICES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
Basis of Design: products specified are manufactured by Best Corporation.
1. Yale Security, ASSA ABLOY, Lenoir City, TN.
2. Corbin Russwin, ASSA ABLOY, Berlin, CT.
3. Sargent, ASSA ABLOY, New Haven, CT.
4. Schlage, Ingersol-Rand, Indianapolis, IN.
5. Best Access Systems, Indianapolis, IN.
B. Mortise Locksets:
1. Best 40H Series with lever and rose, 7 pin.
2. ANSI A156.13, Grade 1.
3. Functions:
a. Entrance
4. Acceptable Products for cast or forged Lever with Rose Trim:
a. Yale 8800FL Series x PBR Lever.
b. Corbin Russwin ML2000 Series x PSA Lever.
c. Sargent 8200 Series x LNP Lever.
d. Schlage L9000 Series x 17A Lever.
e. Best 40H Series x 14H Lever.
5. Features:
a. Backset: 2-3/4 inches.
b. Faceplate: 8 by 1-1/4 inches, adjustable from flat to bevel of 1/8 inch in 2
inches, finished to match trim on hinge side of door.
c. Latch Bolt: Two-piece anti-friction, 3/4 inch throw.
d. Strike: ANSI standard 4-7/8 inch height, 1-1/4 inch curved lip.
e. Provide strikes with proper lip length to protect trim of the frame, but not to
project more than 1/8 inch (3.2) beyond frame trim or the inactive leaf of a
pair of doors.
f. Finish to match trim on hinge side of door
C. Standard: Comply with ANSI A156.2, Series 1000, Grade 1.
08710- 5
Door Hardware
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
1. Backset: 2-3/4 inches.
2. Faceplate: 8 by 1-1/4 inches, adjustable from flat to bevel of 1/8 inch in 2 inches,
finished to match trim on hinge side of door.
3. Latch bolt: Two-piece anti-friction, 3/4-inch throw.
4. Dead bolt: 1-inch throw.
5. Strike:
a. ANSI standard 4-7/8-inch height, 1-1/4 inch curved lip.
b. Equip with wrought or plastic box.
c. Finish to match trim on hinge side of door.
2.7 SURFACE MOUNTED CLOSERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. LCN Closers, Princeton, IL.
2. Norton Door Controls, Charlotte, NC.
3. Sargent, New Haven, CT.
4. No other substitutions allowed.
B. Acceptable Products:
1. LCN 4040 Series.
2. Sargent 350
3. Norton 8500
C. Standard: Comply with ANSI A156.4, Grade 1.
D. Required Features:
1. Manufacturer’s standard cast iron or cast aluminum construction.
2. Heavy duty, double lever arm type.
3. Regular or parallel arm mounting.
4. Rack and pinion construction with compression spring, fully hydraulic.
5. Closing speed and latching speed controlled by independently operated valves.
6. Adjustable spring power allowing adjustment up to 50% in field to suit individual door
conditions.
7. Adjustable backcheck for interior and exterior units.
8. Maximum operating force of 8.5 pounds for exterior doors, 5 pounds for interior
doors, and 15 pounds for label doors.
9. Size as recommended by manufacturer for door size and weight.
10. Hold open and deadstop features where indicated in Hardware Sets.
E. Accessories:
1. Manufacturer’s standard full-size metal or non-metallic cover.
2. Furnish with necessary arms, tracks, brackets, plates, shoes, and other accessories
to suit door and frame conditions.
3. Finish accessories to match cover.
F. Mounting: Room side of door. Also refer to hardware locations.
2.8 EXIT DEVICES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Von Duprin, Inc., Indianapolis, IN.
B. Acceptable Products:
1. Von Duprin 99 Series rim device at single doors and surface mounted vertical rod at
pair of doors, touch bar design with 99L key locks and #07 levers as indicated in
Hardware Sets.
2. Stanley 200 Series Heavy Duty rim type.
3. Approved equal.
C. Standards:
1. Comply with ANSI A156.3, Grade 1.
08710- 6
Door Hardware
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
2. Underwriters’ Laboratories Inc. listed for "Accident Equipment List - Panic Hardware"
at exit assemblies.
3. Underwriters’ Laboratories Inc. listed for "Fire Exit Hardware" at labeled assemblies.
D. Mullion Finish: Factory paint. Color as selected by Architect.
2.9 DOOR STOPS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Baldwin Hardware Corp., Reading, PA.
2. Brookline Industries, Inc., Chicago, IL.
3. Builder’s Brass Works Corp., Los Angeles, CA.
4. Glynn-Johnson, Chicago., IL.
5. Hiawatha, Inc., Bloomington, MN.
6. H.B. Ives, Wallingford, CT.
7. Quality Hardware Manufacturing Co., Hawthorne, CA.
8. Rockwood Manufacturing Co., Rockwood, PA.
9. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co., Inc., (Trimco), Los Angeles, CA.
B. Provide door stops at each door leaf, except not required at doors equipped with overhead
stops/holders, or doors equipped with closers having dead-stop features whether
scheduled or not.
C. Door stops consist of stops to prevent doors from striking building components or
equipment.
D. Floor Stops:
1. Dome type.
a. Use only at storage, janitor, mechanical equipment, and electrical rooms and
other locations indicated in Hardware Sets.
b. Equip with appropriate riser where scheduled for areas indicated to receive carpet
or thresholds.
c. Acceptable Product: Trimco #1212.
2. Heavy Duty type:
a. Use at HM doors and other locations indicated in Hardware Sets.
b. Heavy duty, high impact
c. Acceptable Product: Rockwood 463
E. Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.6, Grade 1 certified overhead stops
and holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track, slide,
arm and jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring of
heavy tempered steel. Provide non-handed design with mounting brackets as required for
proper operation and function.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Rixson Door Controls (RF).
b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA).
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Baldwin Hardware Manufacturing Corp, Reading, PA.
2. Brookline Industries, Inc., Chicago, IL.
3. Builder’s Brass Works Corp., Los Angeles, CA.
4. Door Controls International, Ann Arbor, MI.
5. Glynn-Johnson, Chicago, IL.
6. Hiawatha, Inc., Bloomington, MN.
7. H.B. Ives, Wallingford, CT.
8. Quality Hardware Manufacturing Co., Hawthorne, CA.
9. Rixson-Firemark, Franklin Park, IL.
08710- 7
Door Hardware
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
10. Rockwood Manufacturing Co., Rockwood, PA.
11. Stanley Hardware Division of The Stanley Works, New Britain, CT.
12. Trego Industries, Inc., Red Oak, TX.
13. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co. (Trimco), Los Angeles, CA.
B. Silencers:
1. Type: Preformed neoprene or rubber.
2. Location and quantities:
a. Pairs of doors: Two at header.
b. Single doors: Three at strike jamb.
c. Weatherstripped doors: Not required.
d. Smoke sealed doors: Not required.
3. Acceptable Product: Ives 20.
2.11 WEATHERSTRIPPING, SEALS AND THRESHOLDS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. A. J. May Corp., Houston, TX.
2. National Guard Products, Inc., Memphis, TN.
3. Pemko Inc., Ventura, CA.
4. Reese Enterprises, Inc. Rosemount, MN.
5. Ultra Industries, Commerce, CA.
6. Zero International, Inc. Bronx, NY.
B. Smoke Seals:
1. Type: UL rated, surface applied, self-adhesive, polypropylene or silicone rubber
strips.
2. Color: Black.
3. Acceptable product: Pemko S88 Siliconseal.
C. Astragals
1. Type: Steel, adjustable, surface mounted; push side.
2. Acceptable Product: Pemko 351 Series.
D. Thresholds:
1. Type: Extruded aluminum.
2. Size: Refer to Door Schedule.
3. Acceptable Product: NGP 890 with vinyl bumper.
E. Weatherstripping:
1. Type: Extruded aluminum with neoprene bulb.
2. Acceptable product: NGP 131NSA.
F. Sweep Strips:
1. Type: Extruded aluminum with neoprene seal.
2. Acceptable Product: NGP 100VA.
2.12 FINISHES
A. Except where indicated otherwise in Hardware Sets, comply with following:
B. Typically: 626 Brushed Chrome, 630 stainless steel.
C. Surface Mounted Closers: Spray-painted to match other hardware.
D. Special care is to be taken to make uniform the finish of all various manufactured items.
E. Extruded aluminum products, except for thresholds and specified gasketing, are not
acceptable.
2.13 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM
08710- 8
Door Hardware
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Key Control Systems, Inc., Bechtelsville, PA.
2. Lund Equipment Co., Inc., Bath, OH.
3. Telkee, Inc., Glen Riddle, PA.
B. Cabinet: Surface mounted hinged panel type cabinet manufactured from cold-rolled furniture
steel, electro-welded construction, with manufacturer’s standard baked enamel finish. Equip
with pin tumbler locking mechanism. Sized to contain indexed keys for Project, plus 50
percent expansion.
C. Key Control System: Dual tag indexed system complete with numbered labels and numbered
tags, permanent key tags, working key tags, key loan and receipt system, three way cross
index system, key gathering envelopes, and instruction manual.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as instructed by
the manufacturer.
B. Verify that power supply is available to power operated devices.
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
D. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of SDI,
ANSI/NFPA 80, BHMA and DHI.
E. Use the templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.
F. Conform to ANSI A117.1 for positioning requirements for the handicapped.
G. All butts, locks, plates, strikes, etc., shall be neatly and accurately mortised flush, properly
placed and accurately aligned for smooth and quiet operation without sticking, binding,
hanging, or rattling. All doors shall be hung with equal clearance at jambs and heads. Adjust
all hardware properly and leave in smooth operating condition.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Check and adjust each operating hardware item to ensure correct operation and function.
B. Ensure weatherstripping and seals do not inhibit closing and positive latching of door.
C. Lubricate moving or operating components as recommended by hardware manufacturer. Use
graphite type lubrication if none other is recommended.
D. Replace defective materials or units, which cannot be adjusted to operate as intended.
Reinstall items found improperly installed.
E. Prior to date of Substantial Completion, readjust and re-lubricate hardware items as
necessary.
3.4 SCHEDULE
Group #1: Door #’s 100.1 (3-0x7-0x1 3/4 HM Door x HM Frame)
Each door to have:
1 Set Continuous Hinges
1 Exit Device – Rim Type w/ lever trim
08710- 9
Door Hardware
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
1 Set Weather strips
1 Closer
1 Kick Plate
1 Overhead stop
1 Threshold
END OF SECTION
Division Nine
Finishes
09900- 1
Painting
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. SCOPE:
A. This work comprises furnishing labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary for and
reasonably incidental to on the job painting and finishing.
1. Paint and finish the following materials, fittings and equipment items which are exposed to
view in interior occupied areas and outside, with exceptions as noted below.
a. Iron, steel and galvanized metal
b. Wood
c. Hollow metal doors and frames
c. Gypsum wallboard and gypsum ceiling board.
d. Existing construction.
e. Mechanical equipment, piping, ductwork, grilles and registers.
f. Electrical equipment, cable trays, conduit and panel boards.
2. No painting is required on the following:
a. Factory finished toilet compartments.
b. Architectural aluminum.
c. Acoustic board ceilings.
3. To avoid possible confusion, the Contractor shall examine the drawings for Mechanical and
Electrical work. It is understood that all materials installed throughout the building that require
painting shall be painted under this section of the specifications.
A. DEFINITION: For purposes of this painting specification, the following areas and spaces are not
considered finished, occupied areas and there will be no painting therein except as may be
specifically scheduled in the Paint Schedule that follows:
1. Mechanical chases.
2. Spaces above suspended ceilings.
1.2. SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Submit to the Architect two 12" x 12" samples of each paint color that is scheduled on
the Color Schedule prepared by the Architect. These samples may be on heavy cardboard or
similar material and shall be made with the actual mixed paints to be used on the job.
B. Paint Schedule: If painting materials other than those specified are proposed for use, the
Contractor shall submit to the Architect a complete schedule of materials to be substituted. This
schedule, in triplicate, shall list materials by manufacturer, brand name, and type for each surface
to be finished.
1.3. DEFINITIONS
A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section.
1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish products
with 3 years experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with 2 years experience.
C. Product Labels: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, stock number, color and label
analysis on label of containers.
09900- 2
Painting
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
1.5. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable building code for flame spread/fuel contribution/smoke development
rating requirements for finishes.
B. Comply with applicable city, county, state, and federal requirements and ordinances regarding
maximum V.O.C. (Volatile Organic Compound) content of all coatings.
1.6. TESTS
A. Provide periodic testing with Wet Film Thickness gage to verify that proper thickness of finish
coatings is being applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Paints:
1. Sherwin Williams
2. Kelly Moore
3 ICI Dulux
2.2. MATERIALS
A. Paint materials selected for coating systems for each type of surface shall be first quality and the
product of a single manufacturer.
B. Spackling compound, fillers, thinners, and additives shall be compatible in use as recommended
by the manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. INSPECTION
A. Examine surfaces prior to applying paint. Verify that surface preparation is complete to the point
that finishes may be properly applied.
B. Surfaces shall be thoroughly dry. Application of finishes over rust, dirt, and foreign substances will
be cause for rejection.
3.2. PREPARATION OF SURFACES, GENERAL
A. Completely mask, remove, or otherwise adequately protect hardware, accessories, machined
surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures and similar items in contact with surfaces to be painted.
B. Thoroughly clean surfaces involved before applying paint or other surface treatment.
C. Schedule cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will
not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
D. Patch nail holes and dimples with spackling compound. Flush spackling compound with
adjoining areas and sand to produce a smooth even surface.
3.3. PREPARATION OF WOOD SURFACES
A. Clean wood surfaces until they are free from dirt, oil and other foreign substances.
B. Smooth finished wood surfaces exposed to view, using the proper sand paper.
09900- 3
Painting
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
C. Sand wood between coats, where necessary, to produce a smooth finish unless specifically noted
to be left rough.
D. Apply one coat of sealer to knots and sap stains.
E. Putty nail holes after the prime coat. On stained work color the putty to match.
3.4. PREPARATION OF METAL SURFACES
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly with solvent until they are completely free from dirt, oil, grease and
other foreign substances. Allow to dry thoroughly before applying paint.
B. Treat new galvanized metal surfaces with a chemical etching compound as recommended by the
paint manufacturer. Remove excess etching solution and allow to dry completely before applying
first coat of paint.
C. Fill open joints, cracks and crevices on steel buck frames with metal putty and sand smooth before
painting.
3.5. PAINT APPLICATION
A. Apply finishes in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed directions.
B. Paint grilles, registers, diffusers and other prefinished items where the factory prefinish is not in
accordance with the painting schedule and Architect's color selection.
C. Apply paint to grilles, registers, diffusers, steel joists, all exposed miscellaneous steel items by
spraying only.
D. Access doors or panels, electric panel board covers, exposed pipes, exposed ducts and raceways
shall be painted to match adjacent surfaces except where color coding is specified.
E. Apply paint and finish materials with brush or roller unless specified otherwise.
F. Primer, where indicated on the painting schedule, may be omitted where shop coat primer has
been applied. Touch-up metal surfaces with specified primer as required. Do not apply
subsequent coats of paint to bare metal.
G. Apply paint finishes evenly to a minimum dry mil thickness of 4 mils in the number of coats
specified unless noted otherwise in the painting schedule.
H. Apply two coats sealer to rebates and cutouts for glass and grilles and to tops and bottoms of
wood doors immediately after fitting.
I. Between coats, sand enamel finish on wood and metal surfaces to produce a smooth, even finish.
Use #220 grit sandpaper or finer.
J. Tint priming coats and undercoats to approximate shade of final coat to assure uniformity of color
in the finish. Touch up suction spots and "hot spots" before applying the last coat to produce an
even result in the finish coat.
K. Apply the finish coat on gypsum board and concrete masonry surfaces with rollers.
L. Name and instruction plates on mechanical and electrical equipment shall not be painted.
Protect by masking off before painting.
3.6. FIELD INSPECTION
09900- 4
Painting
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
A. Do not apply additional coats until completed coat has been inspected and approved by the
Architect. Only inspected and approved coats of paint will be considered in determining the
number of coats applied.
B. Provide and use dry film thickness gauge as approved by the Architect to determine the dry film
thickness (DFT) of paint applied.
3.7. EXTRA STOCK
A. Upon completion of this work, provide one gallon of each type and color of paint used and one
quart of each color stain. Clearly label and tightly seal containers.
3.8. V.O.C. (VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND) COMPLIANCE
A. Products listed in following schedule and/or substitutes proposed for use by Contractor must be
formulated to meet all applicable ordinances and regulations regarding maximum V.O.C.
content. Utilize products that have been specially formulated to need such requirements.
3.9. PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Interior Metal: (New Construction)
1. Hollow Metal doors and frames:
1 coat - S.W. Kem Kromik (Spray) B50 series or S.W. Kromik Primer (Brush) E41 series
2 coats - S.W. PM 200 Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel.
B. Exterior Metal:
Primer not required on items delivered on shop primed items.
1. Formed galvanized steel items such as roof hatches, flashings, and the like:
1 coat - S.W. Galvite Primer
2 coats - M. Latex B47 Series
2. Hollow metal door frames, hollow metal doors, and like items:
1 coat - S.W. Kromik Primer (Brush) E41 series (Bare Steel)
2 coats - S.W. Industrial Enamel B54 Series
3. Items of mechanical and electrical machinery and equipment which are not completely
factory finished.
1 coats - S.W. Industrial Enamel B54 Series
C. Colors shall be selected by Architect from full range of colors.
D. Application shall be made in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION
Division Thirteen
Special Construction
13600- 1
Prefabricated Metal Building System Components
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 13600
PREFABRICATED METAL BUILDING SYSTEM COMPONENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED:
A. Furnishing a complete Pre-Engineered Metal Building structural framing system as indicated
on the drawings.
a. 4 bay expansion to the existing warehouse building
B. Secondary structural framing, bracing, metal panels for walls, flashings, fasteners, sealants,
accessories, and miscellaneous component parts required and or as shown on Drawings.
C. Pre-Engineered Metal Building Systems shall be equal to MBCI, Inc. or approved equal.
D. Some changes and modifications to the conventional pre-engineered building components are
required by the drawings in this project. Contractor shall be responsible to field verify exact
conditions, heights, dimensions, sizes, etc. as required to confirm proper integration of new
construction into the building design.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED ELSEWHERE:
A. Section 08310: Sectional Overhead doors
1.3 GUARANTEE: Provide a three-year material warranty and a one-year erection warranty.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: The building shall be the design of a manufacturer regularly engaged
in the fabrication of pre-engineered structures, conforming to the Metal Building Manufacturers
Association's "Recommended Code of Standard Practices" and "Recommended Design
Practices Manual".
B. Design Criteria:
1. Steel Construction Manual of American Institute of Steel Construction, current issue.
2. American Iron and Steel Institute's Cold Formed Steel Design Manual, current issue.
3. American Welding Society Code of Welding in Building Construction, current issue.
4. ASTM Standards A 325-76b for Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts and A 307-76b for Steel
Machine Bolts and Nuts.
C. Design Loads:
1. Live load and wind load shall be as specified by the 2018 International Building Code.
2. Dead load shall be equal to the self weight of the members.
3. The metal building shall be designed for the following minimum loads and shall be designed in
accordance with the 2018 International Building Code:
a. Main Frames: 20 psf (This shall NOT be reduced)
b. Components: 20 psf (This shall NOT be reduced)
c. Collateral load: 6 psf
d. Wind load per ASCE 7-02:
1. 3 second gust design wind speed=90 mph
2. Exposure category: C
3. Importance factor=1.00
13600- 2
Prefabricated Metal Building System Components
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
4. Assume all windows and doors are openings for the enclosure classification, but
assume they are cladding for the calculation of loads on secondary framing.
e. Ground snow load: pg=10 psf
f. Earthquake design data:
1. Seismic importance factor, i: 1.00
2. Mapped spectral response accelerations:
3. Soil site class: D
4. Seismic design category: C
4. The lateral deflection of the lateral force resisting systems shall not exceed h/180 for any building,
and h/300 for any building with masonry veneer higher than 8 feet above finish floor. The lateral
deflection of the grits and metal siding shall be l/120 for any wall, and l/240 for any tributary area
with masonry veneer.
5. All cold-formed steel shall be designed by the metal building engineer per AISI-NASPEC 2001.
The following are additional minimum requirements for the purlins and girts on this project:
1. Both flanges shall be braced at 8 ft oc maximum.
2. Bracing lines shall consist of 16 gage straps x 1.5" with a #12 screw at each flange.
3. Bracing lines shall be anchored with 2 horizontal and 2 diagonal l1.5x1.5x16 gage
angles at each end bay, at both sides of ridges, and at 50 ft o.c. maximum. Horizontal
angles shall be coped and attached to each flange with 2 #12 screws. Attach
diagonals to horizontals with 2#12 screws.
4. Bracing straps may be omitted on flanges that are braced with through-fastened roof
panels or metal siding.
6. The metal building engineer shall determine the diameter of the anchor bolts required for the
typical anchor bolt detail.
D. Engineering Certification:
1. Metal building manufacturer shall provide complete engineering drawings and computer
calculations for the metal building proposed.
2. Drawings shall show complete data regarding bolt setting for base plates and other
anchorage points. Anchor bolt diameter shall be as specified by the metal building
manufacturing company’s standard anchor bolt layout drawings and the length shall be
defined by the Structural Engineer.
3. A letter of certification shall be submitted with the design calculations. This letter shall certify
that the building conforms to the applicable Specifications and the letter shall be signed and
sealed by an engineer registered in the State of Texas.
4. The design of the structural system shall be a continuous rigid frame, parallel roof beams
and a single slope roof. The roof shall have slopes as indicated on the drawings. All
components and parts of the structural system shall be as indicated on the engineering
drawings and specifications. All components and parts shall be clearly marked and erection
drawings shall be supplied for identifications and assembly of the parts. All drawings shall
carry the seal of the State of Texas registered professional Engineer. Field modification of
parts shall be in accordance with the best standard procedures and shall be the
responsibility of the building erector.
1.5 SUBMITTALS:
A. SHOP DRAWINGS:
Submit shop drawings to the Architect for review prior to fabricating the building. Show complete
details, design loads, and calculations for all members. All calculations shall be prepared and sealed
by a registered Professional Engineer licensed by the State of Texas.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
13600- 3
Prefabricated Metal Building System Components
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
2.1 STRUCTURAL FRAMING
A. Primary Framing: Rigid Frame solid web framing consisting of tapered or uniform depth rafters
rigidly connected to uniform depth and dimension columns. Provide a clear span that supports the
loads at bay spacing indicated
a. All members shall be shop-fabricated for bolted field assembly.
b. All members shall be cleaned and receive one shop coat of red oxide alkyd primer.
c. Secondary framing may be cold-formed using pre-painted coil stock.
d. Flanges and webs shall have continuous weld on one side.
e. All material shall have a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi, except S shapes, which shall
be 36,000 psi.
f. Bracing rods shall have minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi.
g. Secondary members (purlins, girts, eave struts, base members, flange bracing, gable
angles, fascia and soffit framing and bracing, clips, etc.) shall be of 55,000 psi material.
h. Purlins to be roll-formed Z sections.
i. Girts shall be roll-formed Z sections or cold-formed C sections.
j. Eave struts be roll-formed C sections.
k. End Wall Framing: Half-loaded full frames.
B. Secondary Framing:
Purlins: Zee-shaped; depth as required; with minimum yield strength of 60,000 psi (410 MPa);
simple span or continuous span as required for design. G-30 galvanized standard material with G-
90 availability. Welded members are manufacturer's standard primer.
Girts: Zee- or Cee-shaped; depth as required, with minimum yield strength of 60,000 psi (410
MPa); simple span or continuous span as required for design. G-30 galvanized standard material
with G-90 availability. Welded members are manufacturer's standard primer.
C. Wind Bracing: Portal, torsional, diagonal bracing or diaphragm in accordance with manufacturer's
standard design practices; utilizing rods, angles, and other members, with minimum yield
strengths as required for design but in most cases, 50 ksi.
D. Primary Frame Flange Bracing: Attached from purlins or girts to the primary framing, minimum
yield strength as required for design but in most cases 60 ksi.
E. Miscellaneous Framing
a. Base Angles: 2 inch by 3 inch by 0.060 inch (50 mm by 75 mm by 1.5 mm) galvanized steel
angles, with minimum yield strength of 55 ksi (380 MPa), anchored to the floor slab or grade
beam with power driven fasteners or equivalent at a maximum spacing of 4 feet (1220 mm)
on center and not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from the end of any angle member.
Anchors are not provided by the metal building manufacturer.
b. Door Headers and Jambs: Zee- or Cee-shaped; depth as required; with minimum yield
strength of 60 ksi (410 MPa).
2.2 ROOF PANELS:
A. PBR Roof Panels:
1. Basis of design: Equal to MBCI "BPR" roof system or approved equal.
13600- 4
Prefabricated Metal Building System Components
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
2. Panels shall be a premium quality, 26-gauge, structural roof panels with 1 1/4" high x 12” wide
ribs with 2 stiffeners between each rib. Overall panel width of 36”.
3. Panels shall be secured with an exposed screw designed to allow for expansion and contraction
of roof panels, located at each purlin. Include all closures, related sheet metal trim, fasteners,
and sealants to provide a complete system.
4. Roof panels shall have galvalume finish. Panel coating shall be a silicone polyester coating
system. Interior shall be a wash coat of primer. Color shall be selected from the manufacturer’s
full range of standard colors.
5. Roof panels shall carry an Underwriters' Laboratory wind uplift classification of 90 (U.L.
Construction Number 62).
2.3 WALL PANELS:
A. Exposed to view:
1. Wall panels shall be a premium quality, 26 gauge, standing seam panel with 1-1/4" high
closed ribs spaced at 12" o.c.. Between each major rib are two minor stiffening ribs. Equal
to MBCI “PBR” panel wall system or approved equal.
2. Panel coating shall be a silicone polyester coating system. Interior shall be a wash coat of
primer. Color shall be selected from the manufacturers full range of standard colors.
MBCI Signature 200 or equal.
2.4 INSULATION:
A. Vinyl Insulation:
1. Vinyl faced fiberglass insulation: Owens-Corning Fiberglas Certified R Metal
Building Insulation having an R-value of 6. 3” nominal thickness, white, vinyl
reinforced polyester. The composite product shall have a 25 flame spread rating or
less and a 50 smoke developed rating or less as tested in accordance with UL 723.
The facing shall have a perm rating of 0.01 (minimum) as tested in accordance with
ASTM E 96.
2.5 TRANSLUCENT PANELS
A. Uninsulated Translucent Panels: Glass-fiber-reinforced polyester, translucent plastic; complying
with ASTM D 3841, Type CC2 (general purpose)], Grade 1 (weather resistant); smooth finish
on both sides. Match profile of adjacent metal panels.
1. Roof Panel Weight: Not less than 8 oz./sq. ft. (2441 g/sq. m).
2. Light Transmittance: Not less than 55 percent according to ASTM D 1494.
3. Metal Edge: Fabricate full length of each side of panel with metal edge for seaming into
roof panel joint.
4. Color: White
13600- 5
Prefabricated Metal Building System Components
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
B. Mastic for Translucent Panels: Nonstaining, saturated vinyl polymer as recommended by
translucent panel manufacturer for sealing laps.
2.6 FASTENERS:
A. Wall fasteners shall be No. 12, self-drilling carbon steel hex screws, minimum length l l/4"
for structural, 3/4" for stitch work.
B. Roof fasteners shall be No. 12 self-drilling carbon steel screws with extended life hex heads
and sealing washers. Minimum length of l".
2.7 SEALANTS
Sealants for side laps, etc. shall be preformed, butyl rubber-based compound, in tape mastic form
with paper backing. Tube sealants are to supplement the above, and be synthetic, elastomeric
based material.
2.8 STRUCTURAL PAINTING
A. All structural steel components shall be factory cleaned to remove all loose dirt, grease and
mill scale and chemically treated with phosphoric type cleaner and then painted with one
coat of zinc chromate alkyd formulated to equal or exceed the performance requirements
of Federal Specification TT-P-636c or TT-P-664c.
G.
2.9 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide all other accessories required to complete the metal building structure and
coverings. These items include but are not limited to the following: gable trim, gutter,
downspouts, closures, screws, fasteners, bolts, rivets, sealants, tape and other
accessories.
B. All accessories shall be made watertight and shall be firmly secured in place. Sheet
metal items shall be in the longest single lengths possible without splices, where splices
are necessary, lap the edges not less than 3". Support gutters as recommended by the
manufacturer and provide downspouts as shown.
`
2.10 METAL ROOF PANEL ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide complete metal roof panel assembly incorporating trim, copings, fasciae,
gutters and downspouts, and miscellaneous flashings, in profiles as indicated. Provide required
fasteners, closure strips, thermal spacers, splice plates, support plates, and sealants as
indicated in manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Flashing and Trim: Match material, thickness, and finish of metal panel face sheet.
C. Panel Clips: Provide panel clip of type specified, at spacing indicated on approved shop
drawings.
1. Two-piece Floating: ASTM C 645, with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z180) hot-dip
galvanized zinc coating, configured for concealment in panel joints, and identical to clips
utilized in tests demonstrating compliance with performance requirements.
13600- 6
Prefabricated Metal Building System Components
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
2. Single-Piece Fixed: ASTM A 980 with zinc electroplated galvanized coating
D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws and other acceptable corrosion-resistant fasteners
recommended by roof panel manufacturer. Where exposed fasteners cannot be avoided,
supply fasteners with EPDM or neoprene gaskets and heads matching color of metal panels by
means of factory-applied coating.
E. Joint Sealers: Manufacturer's standard or recommended liquid and preformed sealers and
tapes, and as follows:
1. Factory-Applied Seam Sealant: Manufacturer's standard hot-melt type.
2. Tape Sealers: Manufacturer's standard non-curing butyl tape, AAMA 809.2.
F. Steel Sheet Miscellaneous Framing Components: ASTM C 645, with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60
(Z180) hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.
2.11 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide factory fabricated and finished metal panels and accessories meeting
performance requirements, indicated profiles, and structural requirements.
B. Fabricate metal panel joints configured to accept factory-applied sealant providing weathertight
seal and preventing metal-to-metal contact and minimizing noise resulting from thermal
movement.
C. Form panels in continuous lengths for full length of detailed runs, except where otherwise
indicated on approved shop drawings.
D. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's
written instructions, approved shop drawings, and project drawings. Form from materials
matching metal panel substrate and finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine metal panel system substrate and supports with Installer present. Inspect for erection
tolerances and other conditions that would adversely affect installation of metal panel
installation.
1. Inspect metal panel support substrate to determine if support components are installed as
indicated on approved shop drawings. Confirm presence of acceptable supports at
recommended spacing to match installation requirements of metal panels.
2. Panel Support Tolerances: Confirm that panel supports are within tolerances acceptable
to metal panel system manufacturer but not greater than the following:
a. 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 20 foot (6.1 m) in any direction.
b. 3/8 inch (9 mm) over any single roof plane.
B. Correct out-of-tolerance work and other deficient conditions prior to proceeding with insulated
metal roof panel system installation.
13600- 7
Prefabricated Metal Building System Components
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
C. Wall panels to be continuous from base to eave, and eave to ridge.
1. Fastener population to be shown on erection details.
D. Erection shall in all respects be in accordance with industry standards, by qualified, experienced
erectors using proper tools and equipment, and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
E. Correction of minor misalignments by the use of drift pins and a moderate amount of reaming or
cutting will be permitted.
3.2 ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL FRAMING
A. Erect metal building system according to manufacturer's written instructions and drawings.
B. Do not field cut, drill, or alter structural members without written approval from metal building
system manufacturer's professional engineer.
C. Set structural framing accurately in locations and to elevations indicated, according to AISC
specifications referenced in this Section. Maintain structural stability of frame during erection.
D. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing
materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.
1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.
2. Tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not
remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing
with grout.
3. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain.
Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with
manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
E. Align and adjust structural framing before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean
bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with framing. Perform
necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.
F. Primary Framing and End Walls: Erect framing level, plumb, rigid, secure, and true to line. Level
baseplates to a true even plane with full bearing to supporting structures, set with double-nutted
anchor bolts. Use grout to obtain uniform bearing and to maintain a level base-line elevation.
Moist-cure grout for not less than seven days after placement.
1. Make field connections using high-strength bolts installed according to RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts" for bolt type and joint type
specified.
a. Joint Type: Snug tightened or pre-tensioned as required by manufacturer.
G. Secondary Framing: Erect framing level, plumb, rigid, secure, and true to line. Field bolt
secondary framing to clips attached to primary framing.
13600- 8
Prefabricated Metal Building System Components
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
1. Provide rake or gable purlins with tight-fitting closure channels and fasciae.
2. Locate and space wall girts to suit openings such as doors and windows.
3. Provide supplemental framing at entire perimeter of openings, including doors, windows,
louvers, ventilators, and other penetrations of roof and walls.
H. Framing for Openings: Provide shapes of proper design and size to reinforce openings and to
carry loads and vibrations imposed, including equipment furnished under mechanical and
electrical work. Securely attach to structural framing.
I. Erection Tolerances: Maintain erection tolerances of structural framing within AISC 303.
3.3 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard
procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements
demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and
structural requirements.
B. Examination: Examine primary and secondary framing to verify that structural-panel support
members and anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by
manufacturer.
1. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels, to verify
actual locations of penetrations relative to seams before metal panel installation.
C. General: Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with
provisions for thermal and structural movement.
1. Field cut metal panels as required for doors, windows, and other openings. Cut openings
as small as possible, neatly to size required, and without damage to adjacent metal panel
finishes.
a. Field cutting of metal panels by torch is not permitted unless approved in writing by
manufacturer.
2. Install metal panels perpendicular to structural supports unless otherwise indicated.
3. Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures at perimeter of openings and similar
elements. Fasten with self-tapping screws.
4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
5. Locate metal panel splices over structural supports with end laps in alignment.
6. Lap metal flashing over metal panels to allow moisture to run over and off the material.
D. Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Install screw fasteners using power tools with controlled torque
adjusted to compress EPDM washers tightly without damage to washers, screw threads, or
metal panels. Install screws in predrilled holes.
1. Arrange and nest side-lap joints so prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped joints. Lap
ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply metal panels and associated items
for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line.
E. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect
against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with corrosion-resistant coating, by applying
13600- 9
Prefabricated Metal Building System Components
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as
recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
F. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for
weatherproof performance of metal panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and
sealants indicated; or, if not indicated, provide types recommended by metal panel
manufacturer.
1. Seal metal panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant the full width of panel.
Seal side joints where recommended by metal panel manufacturer.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint
Sealants."
3.4 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge unless otherwise indicated or
restricted by shipping limitations.
1. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves and rakes. Fasten with
self-tapping screws.
B. Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at
each standing-seam joint, at location and spacing and with fasteners recommended by
manufacturer.
1. Install clips to supports with self-drilling or self-tapping fasteners.
2. Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation
instructions.
3. Snap Joint: Nest standing seams and fasten together by interlocking and completely
engaging factory-applied sealant.
4. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved motorized seamer tool
so that clip, metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged.
5. Rigidly fasten eave end of metal roof panels and allow ridge end free movement for
thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels for fasteners.
6. Provide metal closures at rake edges, rake walls and each side of ridge caps.
C. Lap-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with exposed fasteners at
each lapped joint, at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.
1. Provide metal-backed sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on
weather side of metal roof panels.
2. Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of metal roof panels and between panels and
protruding equipment, vents, and accessories.
3. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to weather-side surface of fastenings on end
laps and on side laps of nesting-type metal panels, on side laps of ribbed or fluted metal
panels, and elsewhere as needed to make metal panels weatherproof to driving rains.
4. At metal panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch (152-mm) end lap, sealed with
butyl-rubber sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.
D. Metal Fascia Panels: Align bottom of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-
drilling or self-tapping screws. Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures where fasciae
meet soffits, along lower panel edges, and at perimeter of all openings.
13600- 10
Prefabricated Metal Building System Components
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
E. Metal Roof Panel Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal roof panels within installed
tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines and within 1/8-inch (3-
mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
3.5 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Install metal wall panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings.
Install panels perpendicular to girts, extending full height of building, unless otherwise indicated.
Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions
for thermal and structural movement.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, begin metal panel installation at corners with center of rib
lined up with line of framing.
2. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal wall panels.
3. When two rows of metal panels are required, lap panels 4 inches (102 mm) minimum.
4. When building height requires two rows of metal panels at gable ends, align lap of gable
panels over metal wall panels at eave height.
5. Rigidly fasten base end of metal wall panels and allow eave end free movement for
thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels.
6. Flash and seal metal wall panels with weather closures at eaves and rakes, and at
perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws.
7. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.
8. Install flashing and trim as metal wall panel work proceeds.
9. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and
concrete, and elsewhere as indicated on Drawings; if not indicated, as necessary for
waterproofing.
10. Align bottom of metal wall panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-drilling or self-
tapping screws.
11. Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.
B. Metal Wall Panels: Install metal wall panels on exterior side of girts. Attach metal wall panels to
supports with fasteners as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal wall panels within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in
20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), noncumulative; level, plumb, and on location lines; and within 1/8-inch (3-
mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
3.6 THERMAL INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. General: Install insulation concurrently with metal panel installation, in thickness indicated to
cover entire surface, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Blanket Roof Insulation: Comply with the following installation method:
1. Over-Framing Installation: Install in accordance with the industry guidelines found in North
American Insulation Manufacturers Association (NAIMA) MB-316.
C. Long Tab Banded (LTB) Filled Cavity Roof Insulation System.
13600- 11
Prefabricated Metal Building System Components
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
1. Inspect materials for damage, proper sizes, and quantities upon delivery. Store materials
in a dry secure manner. Notify carrier and laminator of any damaged material, improper
sizes, or shortages immediately upon delivery.
2. Precautions: Long Tab Banded (LTB) Filled Cavity Insulation System does not act as fall
protection. When installing the Long Tab Banded Insulation System; the Contractor,
Builder, Erector, and Insulation Installer must meet Federal and State OSHA safety and
fall protection standards.
3. Banding Installation:
a. Install banding perpendicular to purlins to create a support system for insulation.
Cut banding in lengths long enough to run from eave to eave, or eave to ridge,
depending upon roof design. For gabled buildings, add extra length to
accommodate irregular roof geometry.
b. Spacing:
1) For purlins spaced 60 inches (1524 mm) on center, space banding a
maximum of 30 inches (762 mm) on center.
2) Cut enough banding to accommodate spacing.
c. Attach banding to bottom of eave strut and to each purlin using minimum 1/2 inch
(13 mm) TEK screws. Pull banding as tight as possible to keep all subsequent runs
parallel.
4. Lower Layer - Long Tab Faced Insulation Installation:
a. Preparation: Organize insulation provided.
1) Faced insulation rolls are custom laminated to specific length and width to fit
each purlin space. Each roll will have a "roll tag", indicating its correct
location. Use correct roll of insulation for each location.
b. Install faced insulation layer between and parallel to purlins.
1) Unroll insulation into cavity between purlins, on top of the metal banding.
2) Extend long tabs over top of each purlin, orientated such that tabs from
adjacent runs are overlapping to create a continuous vapor retarder. For
critical applications, tape or seal overlapping tabs with a suitable tape or
sealant.
3) Do not pull tabs so tight that they cause the lower edges of the insulation to
pull away from the sides of the purlins.
4) At End Wall: Peel insulation back from facing approximately 6 inches (152
mm) to 12 inches (305 mm), and remove to create an external tab that can
be attached to the rake angle with tape or sealant.
5) At Internal Purlin Bracing: Ensure that insulation is not excessively
compressed. In cases where the bracing will "substantially compress" the
insulation, temporarily remove bracing to allow the faced insulation to be
installed, and then replace the bracing. In applications where bracing
removal is not practical, insulation and facing can be cut to fit around the
bracings as follows:
a) Determine where insulation will need to be cut to fit the bracing.
13600- 12
Prefabricated Metal Building System Components
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
b) Cut the entire width of the fiberglass and slit the facing tab to the
depth of the brace to accommodate the bracing offset (distance from
top of bracing to purlin's lower flange) on the purlin. Do not cut facing
completely from edge to edge. (Example: If bracing is located 3
inches (76 mm) above the bottom flange of the purlin, cut the full
width of the fiberglass and slit the facing tab starting 3 inches (76 mm)
beyond each edge of the fiberglass, leaving the remainder intact.)
c) After insulation is installed, seal facing from the bottom with a suitable
tape to encapsulate the bracing.
6) Install the faced layer of insulation in the entire width of the roof slope before
installing the top layer of unfaced fiberglass, thermal spacer blocks (where
applicable), and roof sheets.
5. Installation of Top Layer of Unfaced Insulation and Roof.
a. Unroll unfaced insulation perpendicular to purlins, making certain there are no gaps
between edges of adjacent runs.
b. Where it is necessary to splice the unfaced insulation, overlap the ends
approximately 1 inch (25 mm) to 2 inches (50 mm) , before installing roof panels as
follows:
1) Standing Seam Roofs: Install roof clips and spacer blocks, and attach roof
panels. Care should be taken to ensure thermal spacer blocks remain in
place directly above the purlins.
2) Plan installation to ensure there is no exposed insulation at the end of a work
day or at the onset of inclement weather.
a) Only install insulation as far out as can be covered in one day or as
weather permits.
b) Do not leave any insulation exposed to the elements overnight; the
system is not designed to support the added weight associated with
heavy rain or snow.
c) Erector/Installer assumes responsibility for all materials once on site,
and therefore should protect insulation from getting wet.
D. Blanket Wall Insulation: Install in accordance with the industry guidelines found in North
American Insulation Manufacturers Association (NAIMA) MB-316.
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according
to ASTM A 780/A 780M and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Touchup Painting: After erection, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field
connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted structural framing[, bearing
plates,] and accessories.
1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning," or by SSPC-SP 3,
"Power Tool Cleaning."
2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.
13600- 13
Prefabricated Metal Building System Components
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior
Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
D. Metal Panels: Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal
panels are installed. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as
recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
1. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful
repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
E. Doors and Frames: Immediately after installation, sand rusted or damaged areas of prime coat
until smooth and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer.
1. Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames.
F. Windows: Clean metal surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective
coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows.
END OF SECTION
Division Fifteen
Mechanical
Division 15 Table of Contents Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 15075 Mechanical System Identification 15140 Hangers and Supports 15410 Plumbing Piping Systems 15580 Gas Fired Heaters 15820 Ductwork Accessories 15830 Power Ventilators 15850 Air Inlet and Outlet Devices 15890 Ductwork and Vents 15950 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
END
15050 - 1 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Intent of Contract Drawings and Specifications is to obtain complete, functional, code compliant systems, tested, adjusted, and ready for operation. The Contractor shall provide all materials, labor, equipment, tools, etc. for the complete installation of the HVAC, plumbing, and related work as indicated on the Contract Drawings and Specifications.
B. The Contractor shall check, verify, and coordinate work with other trades. Include modifications, relocations or adjustments necessary to complete work or to avoid interference with other trades.
C. The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic in nature and are to be used to determine project scope and a minimum level of quality. The Contract Drawings are not to be used as the actual working construction drawings. The Contractor’s approved submitted shop drawings, coordinated with other trades, shall be used for actual system installation.
D. Alternates and Substitutions: 1. Contractor shall include, with accepted Alternates and Substitutions, all provisions necessary to adjust work affected. 2. With any Alternate or Substitution, Contractor shall include costs to effected trades such as structure, electrical requirements, etc. 3. Alternates shall be accepted alternates by Owner’s Representative 4. Substitutions shall be approved product manufacturers other than Contract Drawings scheduled Basis of Design.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate his work with all other trades to avoid conflict and permit a neat and orderly appearance of the entire installation. The Contractor shall, in advance of the work, furnish instructions to the General Contractor as to his requirements for equipment and material installation of any kind, whether or not specifically mentioned on drawings or in the specifications, and shall include recesses, chases in walls, and all required openings in the structure. Should furnishing this information be neglected, delayed or incorrect and additional cuttings are found to be required, the cost of the same shall be charged to this Contractor.
B. Installations found to be in conflict with work of other trades, as a result of neglected coordination, shall be removed and reinstalled in new locations designated by the Architect at no additional expense to the Owner.
C. To achieve coordination, Contractor shall contact the Architect and obtain necessary information to design his system to fit into allotted spaces without interfering with work by other trades.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Concrete Work: 1. Provide cast-in-place concrete for mechanical systems as required by Contract Documents unless otherwise noted.
B. Rigging: 1. Provide all labor and materials to safely hoist and rig all equipment indicated on Contract Drawings. 2. Contractor shall secure all required permits prior to rigging work. 3. Contractor shall protect all personnel, property, building and site from damage. 4. Rigger shall be experience and shall comply with OSHA requirements.
15050 - 2 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
C. Painting: 1. Contractor shall paint all exposed metals included in the mechanical systems. This includes but is not limited to piping, supports, metal effected by construction, etc. This includes natural gas pipe on roof. 2. Contractor shall paint all plumbing vent pipes exposed to exterior. Color shall match roof. 3. Contractor shall paint all flue pipes and combustion air intake pipes exposed to exterior. Color shall match roof. 4. All painting shall be performed by qualified personnel and be applied by manufacturer’s instructions.
D. Protection of Property: 1. During construction, Contractor shall provide means to protect building and equipment from damage. 2. All work, equipment and materials shall be protected at all times. Contractor shall repair all damage caused either directly or indirectly by his own work persons. Contractor shall also protect his own work from damage. Upon completion, all work shall be thoroughly cleaned and delivered in a new condition 3. Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage to equipment and materials until he has received written notice from the Architect or Engineer that his work has been accepted. 4. Contractor shall provide temporary partitions to safely isolate areas of construction. 5. Roofs shall be protected with 3/4” plywood installed over entire work areas and paths of travel. 6. Interior floors and walls in areas where equipment travels shall be properly protected. 7. Contractor shall repair any property damage caused by mechanical installation at no cost to Owner.
E. Equipment Supports: 1. Contractor shall provide all supports, steel, etc. required to properly install equipment. 2. Equipment shall be installed securely and shall be level. 3. Contractor shall coordinate equipment supports with building structure.
F. Welding Work: 1. Welding work shall be performed by certified welders and shall be of good quality. 2. Welders shall comply with all project safety procedures. Area shall be cleared of all combustible materials and a fire extinguisher shall be within reach of the welder’s “fire watch” helper. 3. Welding and gas tanks shall be properly secured and protected.
G. Cutting and Patching: 1. Perform cutting and patching required for complete installation of systems. Patch and restore all work cut or damaged to original condition. This includes openings remaining from removal or relocation of existing system components. 2. Do not pierce beams or columns without permission and direction of structural engineer.
H. Excavation and Backfill: 1. Backfill all trenches beneath concrete floors within building and beneath concrete slabs, walks and drives with appropriate fill and compact to same density as surrounding area. 2. Backfill shall be tamped in layers or puddled under and around pipes to prevent settlement or lateral movement and shall contain no ashes, cinders, refuse, organic
matter, or other corrosive materials. 3. Rocks shall not be placed in trenches. 4. In trenches cut through rock, tamped backfill shall be used for at least 6 inches under and around the pipe and for at least 2 feet above the pipe.
15050 - 3 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
1.4 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Rules and regulations of all State and Local Authorities Having Jurisdiction and utility companies, in force at time of execution of Contract shall become part of this Specification.
B. Contractor shall conform to the following applicable rules and regulations: 1. International Building Code. 2. International Mechanical Code. 3. International Plumbing Code. 4. International Fire Code. 5. International Fuel Gas Code. 6. International Energy Conservation Code. 7. National Electric Code. 8. Life Safety Code. 9. Requirements and code amendments of local building department, fire department, utility company and other Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 10. National Fire Protection Association Standards. 11. American Society of Mechanical Engineers Pressure Code. 12. Occupational Safety and Health Administration Regulations.
C. Contractor shall obtain all permits and include all permit costs in bid. Contractor shall schedule all inspections with local authority and shall deliver all certificates to the Owner.
D. The most stringent code shall apply in differences between applicable codes.
E. Contractor shall not allow or cause any of his work to be covered up before it has been duly inspected, tested and approved by the authorized inspectors having legal jurisdiction over his work. Should he fail to observe the above, he shall uncover his work and, after it has been inspected, tested and approved, recover it at his own expense.
F. Any work performed by the Contractor that does not comply with applicable codes shall be corrected and the Contractor shall bear all costs for required corrections.
1.5 UTILITIES
A. Contractor shall coordinate connection to site utilities.
B. Contractor shall verify the existence, connection size, and elevation of all utilities.
C. Contractor shall verify location of other underground systems prior to digging.
D. Upon award of project, Contractor shall notify Engineer of any cost to extend natural gas serve to project site by local utility.
1.6 QUALITY
A. Perform all work in accordance with good industry practice and shall be of first quality. The good appearance of the work shall be of equal importance to its mechanical operation. Lack of quality workmanship shall be considered sufficient reason for rejection of a system in whole or in part.
B. All systems shall be installed in a neat and professional manner. Routing of ductwork, above ground piping, wiring, etc. shall be parallel with right angles.
1.7 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Contractor shall install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Equipment shall be neat and level.
B. Install equipment in locations shown on approved construction shop drawings. Avoid conflicts with structure and other trades.
15050 - 4 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
C. Install so that all equipment can be easily serviced by access doors, by unions and isolation valves in piping and/or other methods as required. Maintain all code required clearances and manufacturer’s recommended access. Install equipment piping and ductwork to maintain access for maintenance personnel.
D. All equipment shall be clearly labeled with tag number scheduled on drawings.
E. All equipment shall have OSHA required safety guards.
F. Equipment installed on roofs shall be 10 feet from parapet or install a safety rail per International Mechanical Code.
G. Equipment installed on supports greater than 30 inches above adjacent walking surface shall have 36 inch wide platforms with safety railing on all sides requiring service access per the International Mechanical Code.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit a minimum six (6) copies to the Architect and Engineer for review and approval all manufacturer’s product data sheets and construction shop drawings.
B. Manufacturer’s product data sheets shall be specific to the equipment being provided. Equipment to be provided shall be clearly identified and labeled with the equipment tag number matching the Contract Drawings.
C. All refrigeration, fan and pumping equipment, such as condensing units, heat pumps, packaged rooftop units, pumps, fans, etc. shall include manufacturer’s computerized selections with specific project conditions. General catalog data is not acceptable.
D. In addition to major scheduled equipment, Contractor shall submit product data sheets on plumbing fixtures, plumbing specialties, sheet metal construction standards, piping materials, insulation materials, vibration eliminators, and other mechanical items important to system operation. Refer to individual specification sections for additional submittal items.
E. Contractor shall submit construction shop drawings for equipment locations, ductwork layout, and piping layout. Shop drawings shall include coordination with all other trades, equipment clearances, duct and pipe dimensions, elevations, balancing devices, etc. that shall be used for actual system fabrication and installation. Contractor shop drawings shall be 1/4 inch per foot scale on 24”x36” or 30”x42” sheets.
F. Submittals shall include all accepted alternates and substitutions. All necessary adjustments due to alternate or substitution shall be included.
G. Contractor shall submit Temperature Controls drawings and wiring diagrams.
H. Fire Protection Contractor shall submit sprinkler system components, hydraulic calculations, and sprinkler system layout. Drawings, calculations, and components shall be approved by Engineer, local Authority Having Jurisdiction, and Owner’s insurance company prior to beginning fire protection work.
I. Initial and final Test and Balance Reports shall be reviewed and approved by Engineer.
J. Engineer’s review and comments on submittals does not relieve Contractor’s responsibility to comply with requirements of Contract Documents.
K. All approved submittals, including comments, shall be scanned into PDF format for final close-out documents. Refer to Close-Out Documents paragraph.
1.9 ASSISTANCE TO TEST AND BALANCE FIRM
A. The Mechanical and Controls Contractors shall assist the Test and Balance (TAB) firm to perform system balancing. Contractors shall provide necessary manpower to correct identified deficiencies in a timely manner to perform TAB.
15050 - 5 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
B. Not every measuring and balancing device desired by the TAB may be indicated or noted on the Construction Documents. Prior to system start-up, the Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate with the TAB firm. Mechanical Contractor shall install, at no additional cost to Owner, any balancing dampers, temperature and pressure test ports, etc. as requested by the TAB Firm to perform complete system balance.
C. Refer to Test and Balance Section for Mechanical Contractor’s responsibilities.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall guarantee for one (1) year after acceptance by Owner all equipment, materials, and workmanship to be free from defect. Contractor shall provide equipment, parts and labor to repair, replace or alter systems or parts of systems found defective at no extra cost to Owner.
B. Refer to each section for any extended equipment warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Work shall not be covered or enclosed until it has been inspected, tested, and approved by Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
B. If work is enclosed or not visible, Contractor shall expose systems for inspection at their own cost.
3.2 START-UP
A. All systems and equipment shall be started, tested, adjusted and turned over to Owner ready for operation. Follow manufacturer's pre-start-up check-out, start-up, trouble shooting and adjustment procedures.
B. Contractor shall provide services of technician knowledgeable in start-up and check-out of types of systems and equipment on project. Provide start-up services by manufacturer's factory technician where specified or where Contractor does not have certified personnel. Coordinate start-up with all trades.
C. Documentation of start-up conditions and equipment performance shall be included in Owner’s Operations Manual.
D. Clean and lubricate all equipment prior to acceptance by Owner.
3.3 FINAL APPROVAL
A. Prior to final acceptance of the installation, the Contractor shall furnish to the Architect "certificates of approval" signed by all legally constituted authorities, stating that the systems, as installed, have been inspected and tested and meet all governing code requirements.
3.4 CLOSE-OUT DOCUMENTS
A. Record Drawings: 1. Contractor shall neatly produce from field marked drawings a complete "as-built" record set of drawings, which shall show every change from the original Contract Drawings and the exact "as-built" locations and sizes of the work provided. This set shall include locations, dimensions, elevations, shut-off valves, etc. 2. The Contractor shall neatly provide a final set of “as-built” drawings. Contactor shall provide one (1) hard copy and one (1) CD of portable document format (PDF) scan files of “as-built” drawings to Owner.
15050 - 6 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
B. Contractor shall provide to Owner one (1) hard copy and one (3) CDs of portable document format (PDF) scan files of the following: 1. Equipment Operations Manual, which includes all equipment submittals, brochures, repair parts lists, manufacturer’s maintenance instructions, and contact information on local manufacturer’s representatives. 2. All approved submittals with comments. 3. All approved shop drawings. 4. All permits and inspection reports. 5. All warranties. 6. Final Test and Balance Report. 7. Charts and diagrams for all valves, dampers, and controls. C. Contractor shall provide one (1) copy Close-Out PDF CD listed above to the Engineer and to the architect.
3.5 COMPLETION
A. Upon completion of work Contractor shall remove all tools, scaffolding, trash from site. Contractor shall walk through job site and remove debris from work areas, including above ceiling, leaving a clean project site.
B. Contractor shall provide training to owner’s operating personnel on installed systems.
C. It is the intent of this specification for the Contractor to provide the Owner a complete, functional, code compliant system.
END OF SECTION
15075 - 1 Mechanical System Identification Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 15075
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Contractor shall install identification labels or tags on all mechanical equipment, piping systems, dampers, valves, etc. as specified in this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASME A13.1 – Scheme for the identification of piping systems.
B. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification.
B. Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number.
C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s catalog literature for each product required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 IDENTIFYING DEVICES
A. Stencil Paint: 1. Oil-based, alkyd enamel, black color. 2. Stencil of pipe is permitted in concealed locations only.
B. Marker System: 1. Manufacturer's standard, preprinted with color coding, lettering size and length of color field according to ASME A13.1. 2. Use pressure-sensitive type unless "snap-on" or "strap-on" type is specified in Part 3.
C. Valve Tags: 1. Minimum 1-1/2" diameter, 0.032" thick, polished brass.
D. Laminated Plastic Nameplates: 1. ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, phenolic-resin-laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore. 2. Nameplates shall be approximately 1-1/2" x 4", 1/16" thick, and have 1/2" high lettering. Face of plastic nameplates shall be black with white letters. 3. Fasteners shall be self-tapping, stainless steel screws or contact type with permanent adhesive.
2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Brady Corporation.
B. Seton
C. Brimar Industries, Inc.
15075 - 2 Mechanical System Identification Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. After painting and/or covering is completed, identify equipment and piping as indicated. Locate identification as conspicuously as possible except where such would distract from finished area.
3.2 PIPING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
A. Install pipe identification on each system. Place flow directional arrows at each pipe identification location.
B. Identify all piping (except medical gas) not less than once every 20 ft, not less than once in each room, at each branch, adjacent to each access door or panel, at each valve and on both sides of walls or floors penetrated by piping.
C. In concealed areas, piping may be identified by stenciling. Height of lettering shall be same as pipe diameter up to maximum of 1" in height. When finished color of piping is dark, stenciling shall be on white background.
D. Exposed pipe shall be identified with marker system. Markers shall be "snap-on" or "strap-on" type depending on applicable pipe size.
E. All drain pans shall be labeled on the visible bottom side every 20 feet with “Code Required Secondary Drain System.”
F. All buried gas lines, such as natural gas, shall have underground plastic pipe markers installed 12 inches below finished grade directly above the pipe.
3.3 VALVE IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify valves with brass tags bearing system identification and valve sequence number in 1/2" black characters. Attach tag to valve body with brass jack chain and "S" hook.
B. Valve numbers shall be prefixed with corresponding piping system identification in 1/4" black letters.
C. Valve tags are not required at terminal devices unless valves are greater than 10 ft from device or located in another room not visible from terminal unit.
D. Furnish typewritten valve schedule indicating valve number, fixtures, equipment or areas served by each numbered valve and incorporate in O&M Manuals.
E. Furnish typewritten framed chart under glass or clear plastic indicating fixtures, equipment or areas served by each numbered valve and mount same as directed by Engineer.
3.4 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify major equipment, including air handling units, fans, boilers, chillers, heat exchangers, air terminal devices, pumps, water heaters, unit heaters tanks, compressors, water treatment devices etc.
B. Identify equipment with large laminated plastic nameplates.
C. Identify control equipment and panels with laminated plastic nameplates.
D. Locate motor nameplates for easy reading. Relocate or provide new nameplates on motors if original nameplates are not located for easy reading.
E. Install label with 2 inch high letters on each fire damper, smoke damper, and combination fire/smoke damper. If documents include a damper numbering system, provide label on damper with specific damper number. Install red sticker on ceiling below all fire dampers and smoke dampers.
15075 - 3 Mechanical System Identification Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
3.5 ACCESS PANEL IDENTIFICATION
A. Furnish typewritten charts with identification and location of all access panels serving equipment and valves and incorporate in O&M Manuals.
3.6 WARNING LABELS
A. Install tag or sign with required warning message at the following locations: 1. Emergency Eye Wash Stations. 2. Emergency Shower Stations. 3. Hazardous Material Locations. 4. Exposed Hot Surface Locations. 5. Tripping Hazard Locations. 6. Exposed Moving Part Locations. 7. Other Potentially Dangerous Locations.
B. All installations shall comply with OSHA requirements.
END OF SECTION
15140 - 1 Hangers and Supports Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 15140
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Contractor shall furnish all necessary labor, supervision, materials, equipment, and services to completely install the pipe hanger and supports as described in this specification.
B. Dissimilar metals shall not be in contact without a dielectric isolator.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM B633 - Specification for Electro-Deposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel.
B. ASTM A123 - Specification for Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip.
C. ASTM A653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.
D. ASTM A1011 – Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.
E. MSS SP58 - Manufacturers Standardization Society: Pipe Hangers and Supports-Materials, Design, and Manufacture.
F. MSS SP69 - Manufacturers Standardization Society: Pipe Hangers and Supports- Selection and Application.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. 15050 – Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
B. 15410 – Plumbing Piping Systems
C. 15820 – Ductwork Accessories
D. 15890 - Ductwork
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel pipe hangers and supports shall have the manufacturer’s name, part number, and applicable size stamped in the part itself for identification.
B. Hangers and supports shall be designed and manufactured in conformance with MSS SP 58.
C. Supports for sprinkler piping shall be in conformance with NFPA 13.
D. Support of pipe, tubing and equipment shall be accomplished by means of engineered products, specific to each application. Makeshift, field devised methods shall not be allowed.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data on all hanger and support devices, including shields and attachment methods. Product data to include, but not limited to materials, finishes, approvals, load ratings, and dimensional information.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with these specifications, pipe hanger and support systems shall be as manufactured by Cooper B-Line, HOLDRITE or approved equal.
15140 - 2 Hangers and Supports Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
B. Materials installed in return air plenum spaces shall comply with ASTM E-84 25/50 smoke and flame requirements. HOLDRITE products shall be Flame Fighter model.
2.2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers: 1. Uninsulated pipes 2 inch and smaller: a. Adjustable steel swivel ring (band type) hanger, B-Line B3170. b. Adjustable steel swivel J-hanger, B-Line B3690. c. Malleable iron ring hanger, B-Line B3198R or hinged ring hanger, B3198H. d. Malleable iron split-ring hanger with eye socket, B-Line B3173 with B3222. e. Adjustable steel clevis hanger, B-Line B3104 or B3100. f. HOLDRITE #257-P, or 287-P 2. Uninsulated pipes 2-1/2 inch and larger: a. Adjustable steel clevis hanger, B-Line B3100. b. Pipe roll with sockets, B-Line B3114. c. Adjustable steel yoke pipe roll, B-Line B3110. 3. Insulated pipe- Hot or steam piping: a. 2 inch and smaller pipes: use adjustable steel clevis with galvanized sheet metal shield. B-Line B3100 with B3151 series. b. 2-1/2 inch and larger pipes: 1). Adjustable steel yoke pipe roll with pipe covering protection saddle. B-Line B3110 with B3160-B3165 series. 2). Pipe roll with sockets with pipe covering protection saddle, B-LineB3114 with B3160-B3165 series. 4. Insulated pipe- Cold or chilled water piping: a. 5 inch and smaller pipes: use adjustable steel clevis with galvanized sheet metal shield. B-Line B3100 with B3151 series. b. 6 inch and larger pipes: 1). Pipe roll with sockets with pipe covering protection saddle, B-Line B3114 with B3160-B3165 series. 2). Adjustable steel yoke pipe roll with pipe covering protection saddle. B-Line B3110 with B3160-B3165 series.
B. Pipe Clamps:
1. When flexibility in the hanger assembly is required due to horizontal movement, use pipe clamps with weldless eye nuts, B-Line B3140 or B3142 with B3200. For insulated lines use double bolted pipe clamps, B-Line B3144 or B3146 with B3200. 2. Makeshift, field devised methods of plumbing pipe support, such as with the use of scrap framing materials, are not allowed. Support and positioning of piping shall be by means of engineered methods that comply with IAPMO PS 42-96. HOLDRITE support systems or approved equivalent. 3. Dissimilar metals shall not be in contact without a dielectric isolator.
C. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: 1. Trapeze hangers shall be constructed from 12 gage roll formed ASTM A1011 SS
Grade 33 structural steel channel, 1-5/8 inch by 1-5/8 inch minimum, B-Line B22 strut or stronger as required. 2. Mount pipes to trapeze with 2 piece pipe straps sized for outside diameter of pipe, B-Line B2000 Series. 3. For pipes subjected to axial movement: a. Strut mounted roller support, B-Line B3126. Use pipe protection shield or
saddles on insulated lines. b. Strut mounted pipe guide, B-Line B2417. 4. When multiple parallel piping is installed on a trapeze platform the spacing between such platforms shall comply with the spacing below. The total weight of piping and
components upon each trapeze span shall not exceed the manufactures’ load rating. Load ratings must include a minimum 2X safety factor. HOLDRITE EZ-Strut or
approved equal for piping 2 inch and under.
15140 - 3 Hangers and Supports Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
D. Close Cell Insulated Pipe Supports: 1. The pipe support system shall be of high compressive strength material inserts imbedded in closed cell elastomeric foam and covered with metal cladding. 2. Insulation inserts shall be used in conjunction with friction insulation tape to inhibit slip due to thermal expansion, contraction, and/or vibration. 3. Pipe hanger and support assemblies shall be equal to B-Line Armafix.
E. Wall Supports: 1. Pipes 4 inch and smaller: a. Carbon steel hook, B-Line B3191. b. Carbon steel J-hanger, B-Line B3690. c. HOLDRITE Stout Bracket System. 2. Pipes larger than 4 inch: a. Welded strut bracket and pipe straps, B-Line B3064 and B2000 series. b. Welded steel brackets, B-Line B3066 or B3067, with roller chair or adjustable steel yoke pipe roll. B-Line B3120 or B3110. Use pipe protection shield or saddles on insulated lines.
F. Floor Supports: 1. Hot piping under 6 inch and all cold piping: a. Carbon steel adjustable pipe saddle and nipple attached to steel base stand sized for pipe elevation. B-Line B3093 and B3088T or B3090 and B3088. Pipe saddle shall be screwed or welded to appropriate base stand. 2. Hot piping 6 inch and larger: a. Roller stand with base plate, B-Line B3117SLor B3118SL. b. Adjustable roller support and steel support sized for elevation, B-Line B3124.
G. Vertical Supports: 1. Steel riser clamp sized to fit outside diameter of pipe, B-Line B3373. 2. For vertical mid-span supports of piping 4 inch and under, use HOLDRITE Stout Brackets with HOLDRITE Stout Clamps or two-hole pipe clamps (MSS Type 26).
H. Copper Tubing Supports: 1. Hangers shall be sized to fit copper tubing outside diameters. Dissimilar metals shall be isolated. a. Adjustable steel swivel ring (band type) hanger, B-Line B3170CT. b. Malleable iron ring hanger, B-Line B3198RCT or hinged ring hanger B3198HCT. c. Malleable iron split-ring hanger with eye socket, B-Line B3173CT with B3222. d. Adjustable steel clevis hanger, B-Line B3104CT.
2. For supporting vertical runs use epoxy painted or plastic coated riser clamps, B-Line B3373CT or B3373CTC. 3. For supporting copper tube to strut use epoxy painted pipe straps sized for copper tubing, B-Line B2000 series, or plastic inserted vibration isolation clamps, B-Line BVT series. 4. Fixture stub-outs to be supported using HOLDRITE Copper Bonded Pipe Support
System or approved equal.
I. Plastic (polymer) Pipe Supports: 1. V-Bottom clevis hanger with galvanized 18 gage continuous support channel, B-Line B3106 and B3106V, to form a continuous support system for plastic pipe or flexible tubing.
J. Supplementary Structural Supports:
1. Design and fabricate supports using structural quality steel bolted framing materials as manufactured by Cooper B-Line. Channels shall be roll formed, 12 gage ASTM A1011 SS Grade 33 steel, 1-5/8 inch by 1-5/8 inch or greater as required by loading conditions. Submit designs for pipe tunnels, pipe galleries, etc., to engineer for
approval. Use clamps and fittings designed for use with the strut system.
15140 - 4 Hangers and Supports Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
2.3 UPPER ATTACHMENTS
A. Beam Clamps: 1. Beam clamps shall be used where piping is to be suspended from building steel. Clamp type shall be selected on the basis of load to be supported, and load configuration. 2. C-Clamps shall have locknuts and cup point set screws, B-Line B351L, or B3036L. Top flange c-clamps shall be used when attaching a hanger rod to the top flange of structural shapes, B-Line B3034 or B3033. Refer to manufacturer’s recommendation for setscrew torque. Retaining straps shall be used to maintain the clamps position on the beam where required. 3. Center loaded beam clamps shall be used where specified. Steel clamps shall be B-Line B3050, or B3055. Malleable iron or forged steel beam clamps with cross bolt shall be B-Line B3054 or B3291-B3297 Series as required to fit beams. 4. Overhead pipe runs of 1 inch and less to utilize HOLDRITE #125 or #121 Series brackets.
B. Concrete Inserts: 1. Cast in place spot concrete inserts shall be used where applicable; either steel or malleable iron body, B-Line B2500 or B3014. Spot inserts shall allow for lateral adjustment and have means for attachment to forms. Select inserts to suit threaded hanger rod sizes, B-Line N2500 or B3014N series. 2. Continuous concrete inserts shall be used where applicable. Channels shall be 12 gage, ASTM A1011 SS Grade 33 structural quality carbon steel, complete with styrofoam inserts and end caps with nail holes for attachment to forms. The continuous concrete insert shall have a load rating of 2,000 lbs/ft. in concrete, B-Line B22I, 32I, or 52I. Select channel nuts suitable for strut and rod sizes. 3. Place cast-in-place anchors prior to concrete pour. For small-bore piping, use HOLDRITE #125 series brackets or approved equal.
C. Rod Attachment Concrete Plate: 1. Steel attachment plate for rod to concrete ceiling. Shall allow vertical adjustment of hanger rod. 2. Equal to B-Line model B3085.
2.4 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SUPPORTS
A. For refrigeration, air conditioning, hydraulic, pneumatic, and other vibrating system applications, use a clamp that has a vibration dampening insert and a nylon inserted locknut. For copper and steel tubing use B-Line BVT series Vibraclamps, for pipe sizes use BVP series.
B. For larger tubing or piping subjected to vibration, use neoprene or spring hangers as required.
C. For base mounted equipment use vibration pads, molded neoprene mounts, or spring mounts as required. Acoustical isolations 2 inch and under to be tested by an ISO 3822 Certified Testing Facility. Vibration isolation products as manufactured by B-Line, Vibratrol systems or HOLDRITE.
D. Loop and Clevis Hangers: 1. Elastomer-lined vibration hangers for water lines, drain lines and sanitary waste lines 4 inch and smaller us HOLDRITE #300 - #301 isolated steel loop swivel hangers or HOLDRITE #320 - #30 isolated J-hangers. 5 inch and larger pipe, isolate hangers using HOLDRITE #270 or #271 isolation liner in combination with standard loop or clevis hangers.
E. Small Bore Pipe/Tube Suspension (2 inch and under): 1. For piping mounted to adjacent structure or supplemental support bracketry (e.g., HOLDRITE Stout Bracket or HOLDRITE EZ-Strut/EZK), use HOLDRITE “Silencer System” #250, #255, #261, #262, #263, #264, #280, or #285.
15140 - 5 Hangers and Supports Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
F. Through-Stud / Joist Penetrations: 1. Provide resilient support for all HVAC and plumbing water and drain piping which pass through framing penetrations or similar potential contact locations. No such piping shall come into rigid contact with the building. 2. HOLDRITE “Silencer System” #250, #255, #261, #262, #263, #264, #270, #271, #280, #285.
G. Trapeze: 1. HOLDRITE “Silencer Series” #250, #255, #280, #285, with HOLDRITE EZ-Strut #EZ-1, #EZ-2 or #EZK, or #257-P #287-P when using standard strut/channel.
H. Riser Clamp and Equipment Isolation: 1. Load Range: Risers that exert loads from 10-50 psi use HOLDRITE Silencer #274 or #276. For heavier loads, use HOLDRITE Silencer # 275 or #278 with 10 gage steel bearing plate (included), to ensure loading does not exceed 50 psi.
I. Sinks, lavatories, toilet, tub/shower, drinking fountains, showers, tub/showers, janitor sinks, hot water tanks washer outlet boxes, ice maker boxes and other horizontal and vertical installations shall be accomplished through the use of HOLDRITE Silencer Series #250, #255, #261-#264, #270, #280 or #285.
J. Drop-eared 90 to be supported and isolated by use of HOLDRITE Stout Bracket in conjunction with the HOLDRITE #265
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Hanger Rods shall be threaded both ends, or continuous threaded rods of circular cross section. Use adjusting locknuts at upper attachments and hangers. No wire, chain, or perforated straps are allowed.
B. Shields shall be 180 degree galvanized sheet metal, 12 inch minimum length, 18 gage minimum thickness, designed to match outside diameter of the insulated pipe, B-Line B3151.
C. Pipe protection saddles shall be formed from carbon steel, 1/8 inch minimum thickness, sized for insulation thickness. Saddles for pipe sizes greater than 12 inch shall have a center support rib.
2.6 FINISHES
A. Indoor Finishes: 1. Hangers and clamps for support of bare copper piping shall be coated with copper colored epoxy paint, B-Line Dura-Copper®. Additional PVC coating of the epoxy painted hanger shall be used where necessary. 2. Hangers for other than bare copper pipe shall be zinc plated in accordance with ASTM B633 OR shall have an electro-deposited green epoxy finish, B-Line Dura-Green®. 3. Strut channels shall be pre-galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653 SS Grade 33 G90 OR have an electro-deposited green epoxy finish, B-Line Dura-Green®.
B. Outdoor and Corrosive Area Finishes 1. Hangers and strut located outdoors shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123. All hanger hardware shall be hot dip galvanized or stainless steel. Zinc plated hardware is not acceptable for outdoor or corrosive use. 2. Hangers and strut located in corrosive areas shall be type 304 stainless steel with stainless steel hardware.
2.7 SLEEVES
A. Pipe Sleeves: 1. Non-Fire Rated Floor: 18 gage galvanized steel. 2. Non-Fire Rated Walls: 18 gage galvanized steel. 3. Fire Rated Penetrations: UL Listed prefabricated fire rated sleeves, equal to Metraflex or HOLDRITE HydroFlame Series sleeves.
15140 - 6 Hangers and Supports Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
B. Exterior Wall Pipe Sleeves: 1. Mechanical Pipe Seal: a. Pipe wall penetration seals shall be of the modular link type. b. Seals shall consist of a series of interlocking, molded synthetic rubber links, with heavy-duty plastic pressure plates, and corrosion resistant nuts and bolts. c. Seals shall be designed to provide a hydrostatic seal between the pipe and wall penetration. d. Seals shall be sized and selected per manufacturer recommendations. e. Mechanical pipe seals shall be fabricated of an EPDM elastomer for general service. f. Provide stainless steel hardware as required. g. Mechanical pipe seals shall be equal to Metraflex model Metraseal. 2. Wall Sleeve (steel): a. Cast in place concrete wall sleeves shall be fabricated from galvanized heavy wall welded or seamless carbon steel pipe. b. All sleeves to have a 2 inch wide, full perimeter water stop, welded on both sides. c. Wall sleeves shall be equal to Metraflex model WSCSG.
C. Duct Sleeves: 1. Round Duct: 18 gage galvanized steel. 2. Rectangular Duct: 18 gage galvanized steel. 3. Rated Duct Penetration (without damper): a. At all rated wall penetrations without a damper, install 2.5 inch 18 gage galvanized metal flange at point of penetration. Install UL Listed firestop, complying with ASTM E814, per FireStop Section.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Install per International Mechanical Code, International Plumbing Code, and manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Pipe shall be adequately supported by pipe hanger and supports specified in PART 2 PRODUCTS. Hangers for insulated pipes shall be sized to accommodate insulation thickness.
C. Horizontal steel piping shall be supported in accordance with MSS SP-69 Tables 3 and 4, excerpts of which follow below:
NOMINAL PIPE SIZE (INCHES) ROD DIAMETER (INCHES) MAXIMUM SPACING (FEET)
½ to 1-1/4 3/8 7
1-1/2 to 2 3/8 10
2-1/2 to 3 1/2 12
3-1/2 to 4 1/2 14
5 to 6 3/4 16
8 3/4 19
10 7/8 20
12 7/8 20
14 1 20
16 1 20
15140 - 7 Hangers and Supports Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
D. Horizontal copper tubing shall be supported in accordance with MSS SP-69 Tables 3 and 4, excerpts of which follow below:
NOMINAL PIPE SIZE (INCHES) ROD DIAMETER (INCHES) MAXIMUM SPACING (FEET)
½ to 3/4 3/8 5
1 to 1-1/4 3/8 6
1-1/2 to 2 1/2 8
2-1/2 1/2 9
3 1/2 10
4 1/2 11
5 1/2 13 6 5/8 14
8 3/4 16
E. No direct contact of dissimilar metals. Provide means of preventing dissimilar metal contact such as HOLDRITE isolated steel loop hangers model #300 - #310, HOLDRITE isolated steel J-hanger model #320 - #330. HOLDRITE #270 isolated liner may also be applied to steel loop hangers or HOLDRITE #271 isolation liner may be applied to clevis hangers. Also
approved are plastic coated hangers, copper colored epoxy paint, or non adhesive isolation tape B-Line Iso-pipe. Galvanized felt isolators sized for copper tubing may also be used, B-
Line B3195CT.
F. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers. Cast iron pipe and fittings shall be braced in accordance with CISPI 301-09 by use of HOLDRITE #117 No-Hub Pipe Restraints or approved equal.
G. Install hangers to provide a minimum of 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.
H. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
I. Trim hanger rod where maximum 1 inch of rod is exposed.
J. Support vertical piping independently of connected horizontal piping. Support vertical pipes at every floor. Wherever possible, locate riser clamps directly below pipe couplings or shear
lugs.
K. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at the same elevation, provide trapeze hangers as specified in Part 2. Trapeze hangers shall be spaced according to the smallest pipe size, or install intermediate supports according to schedule in section 3.1.
L. Do not support piping from other pipes, ductwork or other equipment that is not building structure.
M. Makeshift, field devised methods of plumbing pipe support, such as with the use of scrap framing materials, are not allowed. Support and positioning of piping shall be by means of engineered methods that comply with IAPMO PS 42-96. These shall be HOLDRITE support systems or approved equal.
3.2 SLEEVES
A. Floors:
1. One inch stub above floor and caulk. 2. Future level floor plate, caulk.
B. Walls: Stuffing insulation and caulk pipe or duct to adjacent wall.
C. Finished Surfaces: Chrome escutcheons.
D. Rated Penetrations: UL Listed system equal to fire rating.
END OF SECTION
15410 - 1 Plumbing Piping Systems Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 15410
PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish and install the following as shown on Contract Drawings for a complete, code compliant system. 1. Natural gas piping systems. 2. Plumbing specialties.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15050 – Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
B. Section 15075 - Mechanical Identification.
C. Section 15140 – Hangers and Supports
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's technical data for the following: 1. Pipe, fittings, and joints 2. Natural gas valves and regulators
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NATURAL GAS PIPE, FITTINGS AND JOINTS
A. Exterior Below Ground: 1. Pipe: Thermoplastic polyethylene tubing, PE 2406 or PE3408, ASTM D1248 and ASTM D3350, SDR-11, rated for 80- psig working pressure at 73°F, ASTM D2513. 2. Fittings: ASTM D2683, socket fusion (2” and smaller), ASTM D3261, butt fusion (2-1/2” and larger). Use transition fitting at joints between polyethylene tubing and steel with protective coating. Transition fittings shall have socket joint on polyethylene tubing side and plain beveled end on steel side. 3. Joints: Socket fusion. 4. Trace Wire: No. 12, copper 600 volt, THHN insulation.
B. Above Ground (2” and Smaller):: 1. Pipe: Carbon steel, ASTM A53, Type F, Schedule 40, carbon steel. 2. Fittings: ASTM A197/ANSI B16.3 Class 150, black malleable iron, threaded. 3. Joints: Threaded.
C. Above Ground (2-1/2" and Larger): 1. Pipe: Carbon steel, ASTM A53, Grade B, Type E or S, Schedule 40, carbon steel. 2. Fittings: ASTM A234 Grade WPB/ANSI B16.9, Schedule 40, seamless, carbon steel, welded. 3. Joints: Welded.
D. Service Entrance Pipe Covering: 1. Coat service entrance pipe with flexible polymer film with coal tar and synthetic elastomeric coating of 36 mil thickness or extruded high density polyethylene factory applied coating of 30 mil thickness. 2. Fittings shall be wrapped with 10 mil polyethylene tape, ANSI A21.5, double layer, half-lapped. 3. Minimum dielectric strength shall exceed 12 kV. 4. Apply primer below polymer film or polyethylene tape.
15410 - 2 Plumbing Piping Systems Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
2.2 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
A. Natural Gas Pressure Regulators 1. Outdoor and Indoor Vented Applications: a. Valve Body: Cast iron with 125 psig working pressure. b. Spring and Lower Case: Die cast aluminum. c. Orifice: Stainless Steel. d. Fulcrum Pin: Aluminum or brass. e. Valve Seat/Stem: One piece molded Buna-N seat pad and fiberglass reinforced nylon stem. f. Throat Support Stem Guide: Cast aluminum integral to lower case. g. Diaphragm Plate: Plated steel. h. Diaphragm: Nylon fabric reinforced Buna-N. i. Vent and Valve: Precision fit polyethylene valve and seat. j. Corrosion Protection: Cases dip primed chromate conversion coating and topcoat enamel. k. Internal Relief Valve: Set to relieve at approximately 7 inch WC above normal outlet pressure setting. l. Individual or branch line pressure regulation shall be equal to Sensus (formally Rockwell) model 143-80. m. Building service pressure regulation shall be equal to Sensus model 243. n. Contractor shall select unit capacity and spring range based on gas flow and pressure data on Contract Drawings. o. Install full size vent to exterior. p. Install per manufacturer’s instructions and provide gas shut off valve prior to regulator.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Install pipe and fittings in accordance with applicable codes, manufacturer's instructions and standard industry practices.
B. Install piping parallel with building lines and at heights, which do not obstruct any architectural feature. Install overhead piping as high as possible.
C. All penetrations of rated walls, floors, or assemblies shall include fire stopping seal complying with ASTM E814.
D. Offset or reroute piping as required to clear interferences. Coordinate locations of plumbing piping with piping, ductwork, conduit and equipment of other trades to allow sufficient clearances.
E. Do not route piping through electrical rooms and avoid routing above panel boards, or switchboards.
F. set true and level and located within the limits of code requirements.
G. Provide dielectric, non-conducting connections when joining dissimilar metals.
H. No direct contact of dissimilar metals. Provide means of preventing dissimilar metal contact from pipe to hanger.
I. Install shut off valve at each equipment connection.
J. Install gas shut off valve at each gas meter, building pipe entrance, pressure regulator, and at each equipment connection.
K. Install natural gas regulator when required to provide manufacturer’s equipment inlet gas pressure. Vent all interior gas regulators full size to the exterior.
L. Do not install natural gas pipe below a building or structure.
15410 - 3 Plumbing Piping Systems Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
3.2 BACKFILL
A. Loose earth free from rocks, broken concrete, and other rubble, shall be placed in the trench in 6-inch layers and tamped in place until the crown of the pipe is covered by 12 inches of tamped earth. The backfill under and beside the pipe shall be compacted for pipe support. Backfill shall be brought up evenly on both sides of the pipe so that the pipe remains aligned. Install per manufacturer’s instructions.
3.3 TESTING
A. Natural Gas System: The entire natural gas system shall be tested and proved tight under a air pressure not less than 150% the working pressure of the system or 50 psi for a continuous period of 24 hours. The water utilized for tests shall be obtained from a potable source of supply.
3.4 UTILITY CONNECTIONS
A. Natural Gas Service 1. Coordinate new natural gas serving and meter location with local gas company. 2. Plumbing contractor shall install all gas piping after meter. 3. Provide pressure regulators as noted on Contract Drawings.
END OF SECTION
15580 - 1 Gas Fired Heaters Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 15580
GAS FIRED HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish and install natural gas fuel fired heaters as scheduled on Contract Documents for a complete, functioning, code compliant system.
1. Unit Heaters
1.2 REGULATORY
A. International Mechanical Code.
B. International Fuel Gas Code.
C. American Gas Association.
D. Underwriter’s Laboratories: Unit shall include affixed label.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GAS FIRED SEPARATED COMBUSTION DUCT HEATERS
2.2 UNIT HEATERS
A. General:
1. Gas fired unit heater shall be gravity vented, with propeller fan.
2. Units are designed to take combustion air from the indoor space and gravity vent to outdoors.
3. Units shall perform at 80% thermal efficiency.
4. Units shall be fueled by natural gas as scheduled on Contract Drawings.
B. Acceptable Manufacturer’s
1. Reznor
2. Sterling
3. Modine
C. Cabinet:
1. Cabinet shall be equipped with a full safety fan guard and horizontal louvers for directing airflow.
2. Unit shall be suspended from structure with four-point threaded rod hanger connections.
D. Heat Exchanger and Burner:
1. The heat exchanger shall be aluminized steel.
2. Die formed burners shall be aluminized steel and include flare prots and a stainless steel insert.
E. Controls:
1. Provided 120 volt, single phase power supply.
2. Controls shall be a single stage gas control system.
15580 - 2 Gas Fired Heaters Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
3. Controls shall include:
a. 24 volt control power transformer.
b. Intermittent spark pilot with electronic flame supervision and timed lockout.
c. Fan and limit safety controls.
d. Open drip proof fan motor with internal overloads.
e. Blocked vent switch system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install gas fired heaters per manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Maintain manufacturer’s required clearance from combustibles and minimum mounting heights.
END OF SECTION
15820 - 1 Ductwork Accessories Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 15820
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish and install all ductwork accessories as required for a complete air distribution system. 1. Manual Balancing Dampers 2. Duct Access Doors 3. Turning Vanes
1.2 REGULATORY
A. Products and materials shall conform to NFPA Section 90A, having flame spread rating less than 25 and smoke developed rating less than 50.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. 15050 – Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
B. 15075 – Mechanical System Identification
C. 15140 – Hangers and Supports
D. 15890 – Ductwork
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit for approval manufacturer’s product data sheets.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUAL BALANCING DAMPERS
A. Frame shall be minimum 20 gage roll formed, galvanized steel with beads at each end. Blade shall be minimum 20 gage galvanized steel. Bearings shall be molded synthetic sleeve, turning in hole in frame. Axle shall be minimum 3/8 inch square, plated steel mechanically attached to blade.
B. Dampers shall be properly stiffened and fabricated to prevent vibration, flutter or other noise.
C. Provide damper operators with locking devices and damper position indicators. Sheet metal screws are not allowed in construction or installation of dampers. Use rivets or tack welds.
D. Extend damper shafts through duct insulation. Tie color plastic indicator strip onto handle for easy identification.
E. Dampers shall have a temperature rating of 250 degrees Fahrenheit. Closed position maximum pressure capacity shall be 3 inches w.g.
F. At inaccessible locations, such as gypsum ceilings or architectural features, furnish cable operated remote controlled volume dampers. 1. Dampers shall be adjustable through the diffuser face with standard tools, providing positive balancing of multiple airflows to maintain design air throw and noise criteria. 2. Galvanized steel radial damper shall be direct actuated by a brass plated rotary cable which is fixed at the damper end in an integral support bracket. Rotary cable shall have a minimum torque service factor of 200% when installed in accordance with manufacturer furnished instructions. Entire assembly shall be furnished as one piece for installation with no linkage adjustment required or miscellaneous small parts. 3. Each unit shall be factory tested as a complete assembly prior to shipment. Accessible cable end shall be secured with a factory furnished nylon clamp, allowing
15820 - 2 Ductwork Accessories Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
maximum placement flexibility. Positive, direct, two-way damper control shall be provided without sleeves, springs, or screw adjustments. 4. Cable operated dampers shall be equal to Metropolitan Air Technology model Roto-Twist RT-150.
2.2 DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A. Metal Access Doors: 1. Access doors and frame shall be fabricated from 24 gage, galvanized steel. The door shall be 1 inch thick, double wall construction and insulated with gaskets between panel and frame. Frame shall have knock over edges for attaching to duct. Hinge shall be a continuous piano type. Cam latch shall be self tightening and hand operated. 2. Duct access door shall be minimum 12”x12” and shall be large enough for maintenance access for inspection, damper reset, and be sufficient size for intended access purpose including required maintenance. Provide insulated or acoustical lined doors where duct is of the same construction. 3. Systems designed for 3 inch w.g. and less (SMACNA Seal Class B or C) shall utilize a hinged, cam, or hinged and cam square-framed access door. 4. Systems designed for 4 inch w.g. and above (SMACNA Seal Class A) shall utilize a sandwich type access door. 5. Grease exhaust duct doors shall be grease and air tight, UL 1978 listed, meet NFPA 96 standards and all mechanical codes. Grease duct access doors can be sandwich type or with a weld on frame, with/without hinge. Approved Ductmate F2 Ultimate Door or approved equal. 6. Manufacturer to provide an installed neoprene gasket around perimeter of access door for sealing purposes. 7. Access doors constructed in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standard, equal to Elmdor/Stoneman model DT.
B. Sandwich Access Doors: 1. Panels: a. The insulated Sandwich Access Door consists of three layers of precision stamped steel. b. The inside panel consists of two layers of metal which are spot welded together along the rim encapsulating high density fiberglass insulation; UL classified FHC25/50. c. Un-insulated doors have similar construction without the backing plate and insulation.
2. Gasket: a. Closed cell neoprene gasket is UL94HF1 listed with a service temperature range of (ASTM D746) -20° F to 200° F. The gasket is bonded to the inside of the door to insure consistent installations. 3. Springs: a. Zinc plated conical springs are installed, between the inner and outer door, to
facilitate opening. 4. Knobs: a. Red polypropylene molded knobs have threaded metal inserts to eliminate thread stripping. Knobs are easily turned by hand. Knobs are UL94HB listed.
5. Bolts: a. Zinc plated carriage bolts are clinched and sealed to the inner door.
6. Template: a. Self-adhesive template is provided for the exact size of duct opening required. 7. Equal to Ductmate Sandwich Access Doors.
2.3 TURNING VANES
A. Turning vanes shall be a true airfoil design; smoothly rounded entry nose with extended trailing edge. Generated sound power level shall not exceed 54 decibels in band 4 at 2,000
15820 - 3 Ductwork Accessories Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
FPM with duct size 24 x 24. Assemblies shall be fabricated with side rails. Vanes shall be installed on design centers across the full diagonal dimension of the elbow.
B. Square Throat Elbow Turning Vanes (Vane Runner Length up to 18" and Vane Length up to 36"): 1. Use single blade type vanes having 2" radius and 1-1/2" spacing, 24 gage minimum. Construct vanes in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. 2. If duct size changes in mitered elbow, use single blade type vanes with trailing edge extension.
C. Square Throat Elbow Turning Vanes (Vane Runner Length over 18" or Vane Length over 36"): 1. Use double wall airfoil type with smoothly-rounded entry nose and extended trailing edge on 2.4" center spacing. 2. Vanes shall be equal to HEP (High Efficiency Profile) vanes as manufactured by Aero/Dyne Co.
D. Radius Elbow Splitter Vanes: 1. Splitter vanes for radius elbows shall be extended entire length of fitting and constructed in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
2.4 DUCT FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. Material shall be a heavy woven fabric with double coating of polymer resistant to abrasion and exhibits good flexibility. Material shall be fire retardant, waterproof, air tight and comply with UL Standard 214 and NFPA 90A and 90B. 1. Material for indoor use to be 30 ounce per square yard, double coated with neoprene, suitable for -20 to 200°F continuous operation equal to Ventglas manufactured by Ventfabrics.. 2. Material for outdoor use shall be combination of inner layer of Ventglas and outer layer of 26 ounce per yard, double coated with Hyphalon, UV resistant, suitable for -10°F up to 250°F, equal to Ventlon manufactured by Ventfabrics.
2.5 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Ruskin
B. Greenheck
C. Pottorff
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Penetrations of rated walls not requiring a damper shall have minimum 20 gage metal frame surrounding duct. Seal with fire stop per Fire Stopping Section and complying with ASTM E814.
B. Label dampers and access doors per Mechanical Identification Section.
C. Install manual balancing damper at branch duct serving each individual supply, return or exhaust air device. Use remote balancing device at inaccessible locations.
D. Install flexible duct connectors at equipment duct connections.
E. Install access doors in ductwork, ceilings, and equipment where required for maintenance or inspection.
F. Turning vanes shall be installed in rectangular 90 degree elbows where recommended by SMACNA Guidelines.
END OF SECTION
15830 - 1 Power Ventilators Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 15830
POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish and install power ventilator equipment as indicated on Contract Drawings for a complete, code compliant, functioning system.
1. In-Line Fans
2. Wall Propeller Fans
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. 15050 – Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
B. 15890 – Ductwork
C. Electrical Disconnect shall be integral to fan and furnished by manufacturer. Coordinate with Electrical Contractor.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fan shall be manufactured at an ISO 9001 certified facility. Fan shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories UL 705 with affixed label. Fan shall bear the AMCA certified ratings seal for sound and air performance.
B. Unit shall bear an engraved aluminum nameplate which shall indicate manufacturer, model number, serial number, design CFM, static pressure, and maximum fan RPM.
C. Fan wheel shall be balanced in accordance with AMCA Standard 204-96, Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit for approval the equipment manufacturer’s product data sheets of specific equipment being provided.
B. Each equipment selection shall be clearly identified with tag number from Contract Drawings.
C. Include manufacturer’s computerized selection for each piece of equipment based on project specific conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Loren Cook
B. Greenheck
C. Broan
2.2 IN-LINE FANS
A. Fan shall be duct-mounted, direct-driven centrifugal square inline.
B. The fan shall be of bolted construction utilizing corrosion resistant fasteners. Housing shall be minimum 18 gage galvanized steel with integral duct collars. Bolted access doors shall be provided on three sides, sealed with closed cell neoprene gasketing. Pivoting motor plate shall utilize threaded L bolt design for positive belt tensioning. Housing shall be pre-drilled to accommodate universal mounting feet for vertical or horizontal installation.
15830 - 2 Power Ventilators Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
C. Wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of 100% aluminum, including a precision machined cast aluminum hub. Wheel inlet shall overlap an aerodynamic aluminum inlet cone to provide maximum performance and efficiency.
D. Motor shall be heavy duty type with permanently lubricated sealed ball bearings and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. Bearings shall be designed and individually tested specifically for use in air handling applications. Construction shall be heavy duty regreasable ball type in a pillow block cast iron housing selected for a minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum cataloged operating speed. Belts shall be oil and heat resistant, non-static type. Drives shall be precision machined cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and motor shafts. Drives shall be sized for 150% of the installed motor horsepower. The variable pitch motor drive must be factory set to the specified fan RPM.
E. Provide gravity backdraft damper and integral electrical disconnect.
F. Direct drive, 120 volt fans shall include manufacturer’s speed control for balancing.
G. Suspend in-line fans from building structure.
2.3 WALL PROPELLER FANS
A. Fan assembly shall be a wall mounted, belt driven steel propeller fan with integral housing, interlocked motorized damper and OSHA safety guard.
1. Exhaust fans shall include wall discharge hood.
2. Supply fans shall include intake weather hood and angle filter section.
3. Provide transformer for motorized damper control power.
B. The fan shall be of bolted and welded construction utilizing corrosion resistant fasteners. The motor, bearings and drives shall be mounted on a tubular steel power assembly. The power assembly shall be bolted to a minimum 14 gage wall panel with continuously welded corners and an integral venturi. Fan shall be enclosed in minimum 18 gage galvanized steel wall housing with factory installed motorized interlocked dampers and OSHA safety guard.
C. All non-galvanized steel fan components shall be treated with an electrostatically applied, baked polyester powder coating. Each component shall be subject to a five stage environmentally friendly wash system, followed by a minimum 2 mil thick baked powder finish. Paint must exceed 1,000 hour salt spray under ASTM B117 test method.
D. Propeller shall be a high efficiency fabricated steel design with blades securely fastened to a minimum 7 gage hub. The hub shall be keyed and locked to the fan shaft utilizing two setscrews.
E. Motor shall be heavy duty type with permanently lubricated sealed ball bearings and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. Bearings shall be designed and tested specifically for use in air handling applications. Construction shall be heavy duty regreasable ball type in a cast iron pillow block housing selected for a minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum cataloged operating speed. Belts shall be oil and heat resistant, non-static type. Drives shall be precision machined cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and motor shafts. Drives shall be sized for 150% of the installed motor horsepower. The variable pitch motor drive must be factory set to the specified fan RPM.
F. Provide factory 18 gage steel wall mounting sleeve. Install bottom support angle to wall and ½ inch threaded rod from fan top corners to building structure.
G. Provide factory painted steel weather hood with 1/2 inch by1/2 inch hardware cloth on end.
H. Provide 120 volt motorized pivot damper internal to fan assembly.
I. Three phase powered fans shall include transformer for 120 volt control power supply for motorized damper. Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate with Electrical Contractor.
J. Direct drive, 120 volt fans shall include manufacturer’s speed control for balancing.
15830 - 3 Power Ventilators Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
K. Include manufacturer’s integral electrical disconnect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Ventilators shall be installed per manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Fans shall have flexible duct connections.
C. Electrical disconnect shall be integral to fan by manufacturer. Coordinate with Electrical Contractor.
D. Where fans are located above hard surface ceilings, Contractor shall install access panel.
E. Suspend In-Line/Cabinet fans from building structure with spring vibration isolators.
F. Fans shall be controlled as scheduled on Contract Drawings. Connect to building digital time clock.
END OF SECTION
15850 - 1 Air Inlets and Outlets Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 15850
AIR INLET AND OUTLET DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish and install all air devices as scheduled on Contract Drawings. 1. Louvers
B. All mechanical louvers shall be furnished and installed by the mechanical contractor.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. 15050 – Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
B. 15820 – Ductwork Accessories
C. 15890 - Ductwork
1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Noise Criteria values representing the device’s NC curve shall be published by the manufacturer. Throw values for terminal velocities of 150, 100, and 50 fpm shall be published along with corresponding pressure drop.
B. Performance tests shall have been conducted in accordance with ASHRAE Standards 70-91 and 113-90.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit for approval manufacturer’s product and performance data for each piece of equipment.
B. Equipment selections shall clearly identify equipment or device tag number from the Contract Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Greenheck
B. Ruskin
C. Pottorff
2.2 PAINTING
A. The finish shall be #26 white. The finish shall be an anodic acrylic paint, baked at 315°F for 30 minutes. The pencil hardness must be HB to H.
B. The paint must pass a 100-hour ASTM B117 Corrosive Environments Salt Spray Test without creepage, blistering, or deterioration of film. The paint must pass a 250 hour ASTM D870 Water Immersion Test. The paint must also pass the ASTM D2794 Reverse Impact Cracking Test with a 50-inch pound force applied.
2.3 LOUVERS
A. Furnish and install extruded aluminum, wind driven rain resistant, stationary drainable louvers with horizontally mounted sight proof blades as sized on Contract Drawings.
15850 - 2 Air Inlets and Outlets Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
B. Frame and blades shall be constructed of extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T5. Minimum wall thickness shall be nominal 0.081 inches. Coordinate depth of frame with installation location. Frame shall have a minimum a depth of 5 inches. All louver components shall be assembled in factory.
C. Blades shall be sight proof, double drainable, horizontally mounted on 2 inch nominal centers.
D. Bird Screen shall be aluminum 3/4 inch x 0.051 inch expanded, flattened mesh.
E. Louver performance data shall be based on testing 48 inch x 48 inch size unit accordance with AMCA 500-L: 1. Free Area: 44 percent, nominal. 2. Free Area Size: 6.99 square feet . 3. Maximum Recommended Air Flow Thru Free Area: 1,139 fpm. 4. Air Flow: 7,962 cfm. 5. Maximum Pressure Drop (at 1,139 feet per minute): 0.21 inches w.g.
F. Wind Driven Water Penetration Performance shall be based on testing 39 inch x 39 inch core area, 41 inch x 44 inch nominal size unit in accordance with AMCA 500-L. 1. Wind Velocity: 29 mph. 2. Rainfall Rate: 3 inches/hour. 3. Air Volume: 6,207 cfm. 4. Core Velocity: 588 fpm. 5. Free Area Velocity: 1,139 feet per minute. 6. Water Resistance Effectiveness: 99.3% (AMCA Class A). 7. Discharge Loss Classification (Intake Test): Class 2. 8. Airflow velocity shall be below the louver’s tested water penetration point.
G. Install sheet metal blank-offs where louver openings exposed.
H. Louver color shall be selected by Architect prior to ordering. Architect may have contractor paint louvers to match building trim.
I. Louver shall be equal to Ruskin model EME520DD.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
1.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install air devices as shown on Contract Drawings and according to manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install manual air balancing dampers at the branch duct serving each individual supply air device, return air devices, and exhaust air device.
C. Install insulation on the backs of all supply and return air devices.
D. Provide trim kit for all air devices installed in hard surfaces.
E. Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate actual louvewr locations with architectural elevations. If there is a conflict, the contractor shall submit a formal request for information (RFI) for direction before installing devices.
END OF SECTION
15890 - 1 Ductwork and Vents Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 15890
DUCTWORK AND VENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish and install ductwork and vents shown on Contract Drawings to industry standards as part of a complete, functional, code compliant system.
B. Contractor shall verify dimensions at site, make field measurements and coordinate with other trades to produce ductwork shop drawings necessary for fabrication and installation.
C. Duct sizes indicated on Contract Drawings are clear inside dimensions. Contract Drawings do not show every duct transition, offset or exact equipment location. Exact system installation locations are based on Contractor’s shop drawings.
D. Duct sizes indicated on Contract Drawings may be adjusted, while maintaining equal free airflow area and following SMACNA aspect ratio guidelines.
E. All combustion air intakes and equipment exhaust vents shall be furnished and installed by the Mechanical Contractor. Coordinate with the Plumbing Contractor.
F. All ductwork and fittings must have a computer generated label affixed to each section detailing all applicable information including the duct dimensions, gage, reinforcement type/class, and connector type of systems manufacturer. In addition, galvanizing thickness and country of origin must be clearly stenciled on each duct section.
1.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. All products shall conform to NFPA 90A, and shall have a flame spread rating less than 25 and a smoke developed rating less than 50.
B. Ductwork and installation shall comply with the International Mechanical Code and any applicable local, state, and federal code.
C. Construct ductwork to meet functional criteria defined in Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. Section 11, 2005 SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible,” Third Edition, except as noted: 1. All ductwork will not exceed the deflection limits established in The International Mechanical Code.
D. All ductwork shall be minimum 26 gage galvanized steel.
E. Ductwork Classification: 1. Low Pressure ducts shall be defined as between negative 2 inches water gauge WG and positive 2 inches water gauge WG. 2. Medium Pressure ducts shall be defined as less than negative 2 inches water gauge WG or greater than 2 inches positive water gauge WG. 3. Refer to Duct Schedule in Part 3.
F. Duct dimensions shown on Contract Drawings are clear inside dimensions.
G. Duct transverse joints and reinforcement material, including angle ring flanges and stiffeners, shall be of same material as duct.
H. Refer to Ductwork Insulation Section for internal duct liner specification and locations.
I. Fiberglass ductwork is not permitted.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. 15050 – Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
B. 15140 – Hangers and Supports.
15890 - 2 Ductwork and Vents Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
C. 15290 – Ductwork Insulation.
D. 15820 – Ductwork Accessories.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to fabrication or installation, Contractor shall submit ductwork shop drawings for Engineer review and approval. Ductwork shop drawings shall include all actual duct dimensions, offsets, elevations, etc. that have been coordinated with field conditions and other trades.
B. Submit duct materials, fabrication methods, supports, and sealants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL DUCT MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel: Cold rolled, open hearth soft steel sheet capable of double seaming without fracture, ASTM A924 or ASTM A653. Galvanized coating shall be G90.
B. Aluminum: Aluminum alloy, ASTM B209, Type 3003H-14 capable of double seaming without fracture.
C. Stainless Steel: Type 316, cold-rolled, annealed, pickled, ASTM A240 and A480, Finish No. 2B for concealed work and Finish No. 4 for exposed work.
2.2 FLEXIBLE DUCT
A. General: 1. Factory fabricated, UL listed under UL-181 as Class 1 duct, meeting requirements of NFPA 90A with flame spread less than 25 and smoke developed rating less than 50. 2. Insulation shall be minimum R6 fiberglass insulation blanket with maximum thermal conductance of 0.23 K at 75°F. Vapor barrier jacket shall be aluminum foil reinforced, polyethylene, or polyester film with minimum perm rating of 0.05 perm. Refer to Duct Insulation section for required duct insulating values. 3. Insulation material shall not be exposed to air stream. 4. Manufacturers: Thermaflex, Casco, or Flexmaster, equal to Thermaflex.
B. Non-Metallic Flexible Duct: 1. Flexible duct shall be nonmetallic insulated type composed of chlorinated polyethylene (CPE) liner permanently bonded to a coated spring steel wire helix and support a fiberglass insulation blanket. 2. Equal to Thermaflex Model MKE.
C. Metal Flexible Duct: 1. Flexible duct shall be continuous aluminum metal inner liner flexible ducting constructed entirely without the use of adhesive. 2. Flexible metal duct shall include fiberglass insulation blanket with vapor barrier. 3. Equal to Thermaflex Model TL-M.
2.3 LOW PRESSURE DUCTS
A. Except where otherwise noted, low pressure ductwork shall be constructed of minimum 26 gage sheet metal as follows:
B. Rectangular Ducts: 1. Rectangular ducts shall be fabricated with gages, bracing of joints and construction details in accordance with SMACNA guidelines. 2. Uninsulated panels 13 inches or more in width shall be without bead construction or cross break. 3. Fabricate square elbows where shown and include factory fabricated turning vanes per SMACNA guidelines.
15890 - 3 Ductwork and Vents Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
4. All changes in direction with rounded elbows having a centerline radius equal to 1½ times the width of the duct in the plane of the bend. 5. Fabricate transitions in duct shape or dimension with gradual slopes on all sides. Increase or decrease the duct dimension in the direction of airflow with a maximum slope of 1 inch in 7 inches on any side.
C. Spiral Round Ducts – Concealed and Exposed Applications: 1. Single Wall: a. Ducts shall be machine formed round, constructed of galvanized steel meeting ASTM A653. b. Duct and fittings shall be suitable for positive 10” WG. c. Use spiral lock seam construction. d. Use fittings as specified and as required in accordance with manufacturer's published data. e. Duct connections shall be slip type with minimum 2" insertion length or flanged joint in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. f. When flange joints are required, use angle rings welded to duct. Spiralmate and Ovalmate Connector Systems as manufactured by Ductmate Industries are acceptable. Accuflange or SPOT Flange type connectors are also acceptable. g. Internal bracing is not allowed.
D. Round Ducts with Longitudinal Seams – Concealed Locations Only: 1. Low Pressure rectangular or round duct may used to following longitudinal seam self locking methods per SMACNA Guidelines: a. Snap Lock b. Pittsburgh lock seam. c. Modified Reeves. 2. When a SMACNA seal class A or B is specified, the longitudinal seam shall be sealed with an approved sealant or pre-sealed with an encapsulated mastic or butyl E.P.D.M. rubber on all rectangular duct and round self-locking longitudinal round pipe. a. Equal to Ductmate Industries “Green Seam or Green Seam Plus” self-locking longitudinal round pipe.
2.4 RECTANGULAR TRANSVERSE JOINT CONNECTORS
A. Slide-on Transverse Joint Connectors: 1. Prefabricated slide-on transverse duct connectors and components shall be accepted. 2. Duct constructed using prefabricated systems shall refer to the manufacturer guidelines for sheet gauge, intermediate reinforcement size and spacing, and proper joint reinforcement(s). Equal to Connection Systems as manufactured by Ductmate Industries or W.D.C.I.
B. Formed-on Flanges: 1. Formed on flanges shall be accepted for use on ductwork 42 inches wide or less and subjected to 2 inch static positive pressure or less. 2. Formed-on flanges shall be constructed as T-25 A/B flanges, of which the construction guidelines are given in Figure 1-4 of the 2005 SMACNA “HVAC Duct
Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible”. No other construction standards pertaining to formed on flanges will be accepted. 3. Formed-on flanges must include the use of corners, bolts, cleat and gasket.
C. Slips and Drives: 1. Slips and drives connection systems are accepted on ductwork up to 24 inch width and 2 inch static positive pressure or less.
2. Sealing of joints is required.
2.5 DUCT SEALANT AND GASKET
A. Joint Sealant/Mastic: 1. All joints, longitudinal and transverse seams, and connections in ductwork shall be securely fastened and sealed with welds, gaskets, or mastics (adhesives).
15890 - 4 Ductwork and Vents Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
2. All ductwork sealants shall be installed per SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. 3. Sealant shall be flexible, water-based, adhesive sealant designed for use in all pressure duct systems. After curing, it shall be resistant to ultraviolet light and shall prevent the entry of water, air, and moisture into the duct system. Sealer shall be UL 723 listed and meet NFPA requirements for Class 1 ductwork. Sealant shall contain no V.O.C . 4. Low Pressure Ductwork:UL Classified liquid sealant as compounded specifically for sealing joints and seams in ductwork. 5. Medium Pressure Ductwork: a. Rectangular – All joints shall be sealed with Hard Cast or approved equal. b. Round – Sealant shall be non-hardening, mastic or liquid elastic as compounded by the manufacturer for sealing ductwork joints and seams. 6. Tape or mastic may be used over liquid sealed joint. Duct tapes are not allowed without use of liquid sealant. 7. All mastics and tapes used to seal ductwork shall be listed and labeled in accordance with UL 181.
B. Flange Gasket: 1. Flange gaskets shall be a butyl rubber gasket which complies with UL Standard 181 and 723 testing and meets Mil-C 18969B and TTS-S-001657. 2. This material, in addition to the above, shall not contain vegetable oils, fish oils, or any other type vehicle that will support fungal and/or bacterial growth. 3. Equal to Ductmate 440 Butyl gasket tape.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Fabricate and install duct, fittings, joints, seams, reinforcement, supports, sealing, liner, etc., in sizes indicated on approved shop drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's published data, SMACNA Standards, and International Mechanical Code.
B. Install ductwork parallel to building walls and ceilings and at such heights not to obstruct architectural features. Install ductwork to allow adequate maintenance access and service space for equipment. Refer to equipment manufacturer’s recommended clearances. Install vertical ductwork plumb. Where interferences develop in field, offset or reroute ductwork as required to clear such interferences. Make diverging transitions per SMACNA guidelines.
C. Install conical taps where connecting round branch ducts to the sides of rectangular ducts. 1. Straight taps are also permitted in Low Pressure duct systems 2 inch WG or less.
D. When duct penetrations are unavoidable, provide streamline shaped sleeves around such material penetrations, made airtight at ducts surfaces, except that such sleeves are not required at rods. Where obstructions are of a size to exceed 5% of the duct area, the duct shall be transformed to maintain the same duct area.
E. Size round ducts to be installed in place of rectangular based on SMACNA guidelines on equivalent areas.
F. Seal duct seams and joints to meet SMACNA Class A as minimum for all ductwork.
G. Ductwork shall be free of kinks and dents. Construct ductwork so that interior surfaces are smooth. Internal duct hangers and internal bracing are not allowed.
H. Flexible ductwork shall not exceed 6 feet in length. Do not pinch, kink or reduce airflow area. Flexible duct connections shall be perpendicular to air device for smooth airflow.
I. Support coils, filters, air terminals, dampers or other devices installed in duct systems with angles or channels, and make all connections to such equipment including equipment
furnished by others. Secure frames with gaskets, nuts, bolts and washers.
15890 - 5 Ductwork and Vents Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
J. At outside air intakes, install duct to pitch to intakes and to drain to outside of building. Solder or seal seams to form watertight joints. Blank off all unused portions of louvers.
K. Do not install ductwork over electrical panel boards, switchgear, switchboards or motor control centers.
L. When original galvanized finish is altered or damaged, apply cold galvanizing material equal to ZRC Products, Inc.
M. Install flexible connection between all equipment and ductwork systems.
N. At all rated wall penetrations without a damper, install 2.5 inch 18 gage galvanized metal flange at point of penetration. Install UL Listed firestop per FireStop Section and shall comply with ASTM E814.
O. During installation, ductwork openings shall be sealed with plastic to prevent dust and contamination of interior.
P. Refer to Ductwork Insulation Section.
3.2 DUCT SCHEDULE
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows:
B. Supply Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, DX Rooftop Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and downstream of Terminal Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6. 2. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above: a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6.
C. Return Ducts: a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6.
D. Exhaust Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air: a. Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6. 2. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above: a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6.
15890 - 6 Ductwork and Vents Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
3.3 DUCT HANGERS
A. Ducts with Long Dimension of 36 inches or Less: 1. One inch wide strips of 16 gage galvanized steel attached to the duct with sheet metal screws and to the construction above. A minimum of two screws per strap shall be utilized; one on the bottom of the duct and one at the topside of the duct. 2. Aircraft cable hanging system with easy lightweight mechanical adjustment system and 5 to 1 safety factor; equal to Ductmate Clutcher Cable Hanging System.
B. Ducts with Long Dimension of 37 inches to 60 inches: 1. One inch by 1/16 inch galvanized band iron attached to the duct with sheet metal screws to the construction above. 2. A minimum of two screws per strap shall be utilized; one on the bottom of the duct and one at the topside of the duct.
C. Ducts with a Long Dimension Greater than 60 inches: 1. Trapeze consisting of an angle iron cross member supported by 3/8 inch steel rods secured to the construction above.
D. Round Ducts up through 18 inch Diameter: 1. One inch wide strips of 16 gage galvanized steel fully encircling the duct and bolted to 1 inch by 1/8 inch galvanized band iron hangers attached to the construction above. 2. Aircraft cable hanging system with easy lightweight mechanical adjustment system and 5 to 1 safety factor; equal to Ductmate Clutcher Cable Hanging System.
E. Larger Round Ducts: 1. One inch wide strips of 12 gage galvanized steel fully encircling the duct and bolted to one inch by 1/8 inch galvanized band iron hangers attached to the construction above. 2. Aircraft cable hanging system with easy lightweight mechanical adjustment system and 5 to 1 safety factor; equal to Ductmate Clutcher Cable Hanging System. F. Support vertical ducts passing from one floor to the next at the floor line on angles riveted to the ducts and resting on the floor construction.
G. Provide angle iron framing around roof opening where duct penetrates through roof decking, to maintain roof decking structural integrity in accordance with roof decking manufacturer's recommendations.
3.4 DUCT CLEANING
A. Interior surfaces shall be free of dust and debris prior to initial start up.
B. When internally cleaning duct work prior to shipment to the jobsite, all duct ends and openings must be covered prior to transporting with a protective film. Film must be securely affixed to protect against dirt and debris and must be translucent to facilitate inspection of interior surfaces without removing film. Film must have a minimum elongation of 600%, contain no VOC and leave no residue on duct after removal.
C. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances that might cause corrosion, deterioration of the metal, or where ductwork is to be painted.
3.5 LEAKAGE TEST
A. Perform duct leakage testing on all RTU-4, 5 & 6 ductwork systems:
B. Leakage test shall be performed in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
C. Test pressure shall be equal to duct pressure class. Air leakage shall not exceed limits specified. Do not externally insulate ductwork until it has been successfully tested.
15890 - 7 Ductwork and Vents Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
D. All duct testing shall be witnessed and documented by the General Contractor. The Mechanical Contractor shall give a minimum of 72 hours notice prior to testing. Any testing not witnessed by parties indicated, shall be considered invalid and shall be redone at the contractor’s expense.
E. Leakage Criteria: 1. Constant Volume Systems: a. Supply Ductwork allowable leakage is 1% of design cfm. b. Return Ductwork allowable leakage is 2% of design cfm.
F. Test Procedures: 1. Installed ductwork shall be tested prior to installation of access doors, take-offs, etc. 2. Use a certified orifice tube and its corresponding logarithmic chart for measuring the leakage. Supply fan must have a CFM capacity greater than the allowable leakage in CFM for the section being tested. 3. Define section of system to be tested and blank off. 4. Determine the percentage of the system being tested. 5. Using that percentage, determine the allowable leakage (cfm) for the section being tested. 6. Pressurize to operating pressure and repair any significant or audible leaks. 7. Pressurize again and measure leakage. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the leakage measured is less than the allowable defined in step 5.
END OF SECTION
15950 - 1 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work included in this Section consists of the furnishing of all labor, instruments, tools and services required in connection with the Testing and Balancing (TAB) of the Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC) systems as described in the mechanical specifications and/or shown on the mechanical plans, or reasonably implied.
B. The Test and Balance (TAB) of the HVAC systems shall be performed by an independent, impartial Technical Firm who is a member of Associated Air Balancing Council (AABC) and whose operations are limited to the field of professional TAB. 1. The Mechanical Contractor shall include the cost of the TAB work in the mechanical bid.
C. Acceptable AABC Test and Balance Firms: 1. Delta T 2. Air Balancing Company 3. Air Engineering and Balance. 4. Dallas Test & Balance 5. Engineered Air Balance 6. Other AABC Firms approved by Engineer.
D. The TAB Firm is responsible to and shall submit all reports directly to the Engineer and/or Owner. TAB reports shall be certified.
E. TAB services shall result in the optimum temperature, airflow and noise levels in the conditioned spaces of the project.
F. The following basic components of the HVAC systems shall be tested, adjusted and balanced: 1. Air Distribution Systems 2. Air Moving Equipment 3. Heating Systems (HVAC)
G. Airflow at air devices shall be balanced to plus or minus 5% from design airflow quantities. Required Pressure relationships shall be maintained.
H. Document Review 1. The TAB Firm shall be responsible for reviewing the HVAC plans and specifications relating to the TAB services for proper arrangement and adequate provisions of devices for testing and balancing. 2. TAB Firm shall review all balancing and measuring device locations shown or specified in the Contract Documents. TAB Firm shall coordinate with Mechanical Contractor for additional desired devices to be installed. 3. TAB Firm shall review HVAC manufacturer's submittal data relative to balance ability. 4. TAB Firm shall review submitted HVAC automatic temperature control sequences for conformity to the specifications.
I. Prior to Construction, TAB Firm shall review documents and notify Mechanical Contractor of required locations for balancing devices for TAB Firm to perform work.
J. Prior to system start-up, the TAB Firm shall inspect the system installation and verify that all necessary balancing and measuring devices are all locations to perform a complete system balance.
K. Test and Balance Firm shall witness the performance of each unit’s sequence of operation. Documentation of this process shall be included in the final Test and Balance Report.
15950 - 2 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
L. Three (3) copies of final report shall be submitted to the Owner or his representative indicating a summary of actual operating data and any abnormal operating conditions. The report will contain all required information as described within this specification.
1.2 SERVICES OF THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR
A. The Mechanical Contractor shall start up and test all materials and equipment which normally require testing. All piping, etc., shall be tested to meet code requirements or the specification requirements, whichever is the more stringent. All equipment shall operate a sufficient length of time at the Mechanical Contractor's expense to prove to the Engineer and/or Owner that the equipment is free from mechanical defects, runs smoothly and quietly and performs satisfactorily to meet the requirements set forth in the mechanical plans and specifications.
B. In order that all HVAC systems can be properly tested, adjusted and balanced, the Mechanical Contractor shall operate the HVAC systems at his expense for the length of time necessary to properly verify their completion and readiness for TAB, and shall further operate and pay all costs of operation during the TAB period. Operating expenses to be paid for by the Mechanical Contractor will include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: 1. Utility costs; electrical, water, gas, etc. 2. Personnel costs to start, operate and stop all HVAC equipment. 3. All start-up labor and material costs. 4. All maintenance costs.
C. The plans and specifications have indicated valves, dampers and miscellaneous adjustment devices for the purpose of testing and balancing the HVAC systems to obtain optimum operating conditions. It will be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor to install these devices in a manner that will leave them accessible and readily adjustable. The TAB firm shall be consulted if there is a questionable arrangement of a control or adjustable device. Should any such device not be readily accessible, the Contractor shall provide access as required by the TAB firm.
D. Not every measuring and balancing device desired by the TAB may be indicated or noted on the Construction Documents. Prior to system start-up, the Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate with the TAB firm. Mechanical Contractor shall install, at no additional cost to Owner, any balancing dampers, temperature and pressure test ports, etc. as requested by the TAB Firm to perform complete system balance.
E. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide and coordinate the services of qualified, responsible sub-contractors, suppliers, and personnel as required to correct, repair or replace any and all deficient items or conditions found before and during the TAB period.
F. As a part of this Project Contract, the Mechanical Contractor shall make any changes in the sheaves, belts, motors, dampers, valves, pump impellers or the addition of dampers and/or valves as required to correctly balance the HVAC systems as required by the TAB firm at no additional cost.
G. Provide sufficient time in Project Contract completion schedule to permit the completion of TAB services prior to Owner occupancy of the Project.
H. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish without charge to the TAB Firm: 1. One set of mechanical specifications and all addenda. 2. All pertinent change orders. 3. Two complete sets of mechanical plans with latest revisions. 4. "As-installed" drawings. 5. Approved control diagrams and submittals.
6. Approved manufacturer's submittals for all HVAC equipment.
15950 - 3 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
I. The Mechanical Contractor shall have all HVAC systems complete and in operational readiness prior to notifying the TAB Firm that the project is ready for TAB services. So certify in writing to the Architect/Engineer and/or Owner that such a condition exists. Complete operational readiness prior to commencement of TAB Services shall include the following: 1. Construction status of building shall permit the closing of doors and windows, ceilings installed, etc., to permit the obtaining of projected actual operating conditions. 2. Air Distribution Systems: a. Verify installation for conformity to design of all supply, return and exhaust ducts. Document and certify that all duct leakage tests as required by the mechanical specifications have been performed and the test results are within specified limits. b. Verify that all volume dampers, smoke dampers and fire dampers are properly located, functional and open. c. Verify that minimum outside air, maximum outside air, return air and relief air dampers provide tight closure, open fully and have smooth and free operation. d. Verify that all supply, return, exhaust and transfer diffusers, grilles and registers are installed as indicated on the mechanical plans. e. Verify that the correct size and type of terminal boxes are installed as indicated on the mechanical plans, and that they are operational. f. Verify that all built-up air handling systems, air handling units, etc. and associated apparatus such as heating coils, cooling coils, filter sections, etc., have been blanked and sealed to eliminate bypass air around the coils, filters, etc. or leakage of air into or out of the unit. g. Install clean filters at each air handling unit and maintain these filters for the complete period that the subject system is being tested, adjusted, and balanced. h. Verify that all (supply, return, relief and exhaust) fans are operational including: proper fan rotation, free from vibrations and proper belt tension. i. Verify that all motor starter overload heater elements are of proper size and rating. j. Make a record of actual motor amperage and voltage and verify that they do not exceed nameplate ratings. 3. Automatic Controls: a. Verify that all control components are installed in accordance with project requirements and are functional, including all electrical interlocks, damper
sequences, air and water resets, firestat, safeties, etc. b. Verify that all controlling instruments are calibrated and set for designed operating conditions with the exception of room thermostats or sensors which shall be calibrated at the completion of TAB services with cooperation between TAB Firm and controls contractor. 4. Deficiency Report:
a. TAB Firm shall develop a Deficiency Report of observed items that prevent the system from properly functioning or being balanced. b. TAB Firm shall provide Deficiency Report to the Mechanical Contractor, General Contractor, and Architect.
c. The Mechanical Contractor shall correct deficiencies observed and documented by the TAB Firm in a timely manner to allow the overall project
schedule to be achieved.
J. The Automatic Temperature Control contractor and/or Energy Management System contractor shall thoroughly check all controls, sensors, operators, sequences, etc. before notifying the TAB agency that the Automatic Temperature Controls and Energy Management
System are operational. The Automatic Temperature Control contractor and/or Energy Management System contractor shall provide technical support (technicians and necessary
computers) to the TAB agency for a complete check of these systems.
15950 - 4 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
K. The scope of the TAB work as defined herein is indicated in order that the Mechanical Contractor will be apprised of his responsibility regarding the coordination and assistance required to complete the Project Requirements for final TAB. The TAB Firm will be responsible to the Engineer and/or Owner for the satisfactory execution of the TAB services.
1.3 SERVICES OF THE TAB FIRM
A. TAB Firm Qualifications 1. The Firm shall be one which is organized to provide independent professional testing, adjusting and balancing services. The firm shall have a minimum of one (1) Professional Engineer licensed in the State of the project with current registration. 2. The Firm will have operated a minimum of five (5) years, under its current Firm name. 3. All personnel used on the job site shall be either TAB engineers or TAB technicians, who shall have been permanent, full time employees of the Firm for a minimum of six (6) months prior to working on this specific project. 4. TAB Firm shall submit the following to the Engineer and/or Owner for approval prior to commencing services: a. Name and biographical data of the Professional Engineer and all personnel to be assigned to this project. b. Proof of company operation for minimum of five (5) years.
B. TAB Firm Responsibilities 1. Liaison: The TAB personnel on the job shall act as liaison between the Engineer, Owner and Contractor. 2. Early Inspection: Inspect the installation of mechanical piping systems, sheet metal work, temperature controls and other component parts of the HVAC systems during the construction phase relating to proper arrangement and adequate provisions for TAB. Prior to system start-up, TAB Firm shall notify Mechanical Contactor if any additional balancing dampers, temperature and pressure test ports, etc. are necessary to perform a complete system balance. 3. TAB Firm shall develop Deficiency Report of observed items that prevent the HVAC system from properly functioning or being balance. A copy of Deficiency Report shall be provided to the Mechanical Contractor, General Contractor, and Architect.
C. TAB Firm Services 1. The TAB personnel shall test and balance the HVAC systems to provide optimum temperature, airflow and noise conditions in the conditioned spaces in the building while the HVAC equipment is operating efficiently. 2. The Firm shall be responsible for testing, balancing and logging actual data on all air distribution and air moving equipment, pumps, heating and cooling equipment and the operating conditions of all motors, etc. as indicated in this specification. a. Exhaust Fans and Unit Heaters: 1). Verify correct fan rotation. 2). If belt driven, verify proper belt tension and that fan and motor sheaves are properly aligned. 3). Verify that all safeties and interlocks are operational.
4). Verify correct size and rating of motor overload protection. 5). Verify fan motor is not overloaded; amperage readings do not exceed nameplate rating. 6). Determine total air. Air quantities to be determined by duct traverse if duct configuration permits and air velocity is 1000 feet per minute or greater.
7). If air volume is less than design and motor capacity is available, adjust fan to design CFM. If new sheave or sheaves and belts are required, data will be submitted to the Mechanical Contractor for replacement. 8). Balance air distribution system (see Air Distribution Devices).
15950 - 5 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
3. During the balancing process, all abnormalities or malfunctions of equipment or components discovered by the TAB personnel, shall be reported promptly to the Architect/Engineer, Owner, General Contractor, and Mechanical Contractor so that the condition can be corrected expediently. After corrective measures are completed, perform any additional balancing required, as a result of the corrections. 4. The temperature controls shall be verified for calibration and proper relationship between control devices. The Mechanical Contractor shall be advised of any instruments out of calibration so that the Automatic Temperature Controls Contractor can recalibrate, using data supplied by the TAB Firm. The Controls Contractor shall assist the TAB Firm as required. 5. If comfort and/or required conditions are not being maintained after testing and balancing to design conditions, the HVAC system shall be rebalanced within the limitations of the equipment installed to obtain comfort and/or required conditions. The design intent is to provide air conditioning equipment to meet the design criteria. Conditions may vary from the initial design criteria, which could include but not be limited to, general construction, mechanical installation, actual occupancy conditions, etc. It is the intent of this specification that the maximum capacity of the equipment installed be utilized to compensate for these variations in trying to obtain comfort and/or required conditions. If comfort and/or required conditions cannot be obtained, submit a report giving specific data regarding the problem condition. 6. Make a total of three (3) inspections within ninety (90) days after occupancy of the building, and rebalance if required, to insure that satisfactory conditions are being maintained throughout. Inspections to be coordinated with Architect/Engineer and Owner and shall be documented with a supplemental report containing data and information as required. 7. Make an inspection during the opposite season from that in which the initial balancing was made and at that time make any necessary modifications to the initial adjustment required to produce optimum operation of the systemic components to produce the proper conditions in each conditioned space. The opposite season inspection shall be coordinated with the Architect/Engineer and Owner. This inspection shall be documented with a supplemental report containing any pertinent data and information regarding any modified balance.
D. The TAB Report 1. The TAB report shall incorporate all performance data for the HVAC systems. The intent of the final report is to provide a reference of actual operating conditions for the Owner's operating personnel.
2. All measurements and recorded readings (of air, water, electricity, etc.) that appear in the report must be made on site by the permanently employed technicians or engineers of the TAB Firm. 3. The TAB report shall include but not be limited to the following: a. Title b. Index
c. Preface: A general discussion of the system, an outline of normal and ventilation modes of operation, any unusual operating conditions and any deficiencies not corrected. d. Instrumentation List: A list of instruments used by type, model, range and
calibration date. All instruments must be calibrated within 6 months prior to starting date of TAB services. Calibration of all instruments shall be maintained
throughout the TAB services. e. Data: All test and balance data indicating design and actual conditions of operation for each device and/or piece of HVAC equipment. f. Unit Heaters:
1). Manufacturer, model, size and serial number. 2). Design and actual CFM (Supply, Return and Outside).
3). Design and actual RPM. 4). Static pressure entering and leaving filters, coils and fan.
5). Motor nameplate data. 6). Motor starter data and motor overload protection size and rating.
15950 - 6 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
7). Actual motor amperage and voltage (all phases). 8). Filter; type, size and quantity. g. Exhaust Fans 1). Manufacturer, model and size. 2). Design and actual CFM. 3). Design and actual RPM. 4). Design and actual static pressure. 5). Motor nameplate data. 6). Motor starter data and motor overload protection size and rating. 7). Actual motor amperage and voltage (all phases).
E. Instructions to Operating Personnel 1. TAB Firm shall instruct the operating personnel regarding the following: a. Systems Operation. b. Unusual Operating Conditions. c. System Troubleshooting Procedures.
F. Guarantee 1. Provide extended warranty of twelve (12) months after occupancy during which time the Engineer and/or Owner may, at his discretion, request check of the balance of any HVAC equipment. Provide TAB technicians to assist as required in making such tests. When any device is found not balanced in accordance with the mechanical plans and specifications, that HVAC system shall be completely rebalanced as directed by the Architect/Engineer and/or Owner at the TAB firm's expense.
END OF SECTION
Division Sixteen
Electrical
Division 16
Table of Contents
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion
NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16000 General Electrical Requirements
16060 Grounding and Bonding
16070 Supporting Devices
16080 Electrical Identification
16120 Conductors and Cables
16130 Raceways and Fittings
16140 Wiring Devices
16405 Enclosed Motor Controllers
16420 Lighting and Appliance Panelboards
16500 Lighting Fixtures
END
16000 - 1
General Electrical Requirements
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 16000
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCE
A. The Work under this Section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents including the
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and sections under Division 1 General
Requirements.
1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. Intent of drawings and specifications is to obtain complete systems tested, adjusted, and ready
for operation.
B. Include incidental details not usually shown or specified, but necessary for proper installation and
operation.
C. Check, verify and coordinate work with drawings and specifications prepared for other trades.
Include modifications, relocations or adjustments necessary to complete work or to avoid
interference with other trades.
D. Included in this contract are electrical connections to equipment provided by others. Refer to
Architectural, Mechanical, and final shop drawings for equipment being furnished under other
sections for exact locations of electrical outlets and various connections required.
E. Where architectural features govern location of work, refer to architectural drawings.
F. All work shall be performed in “neat and workmanlike” manner as defined in ANSI/NECA 1,
Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Utility Services:
1. Determine utility connection requirements and include in base bid all costs to Owner for
coordinating utility service.
2. Include costs for temporary service, temporary routing of service or any other
requirements of a temporary nature associated with utility service.
B. Temporary Services:
1. Provide temporary power distribution for construction efforts requiring power for tools,
lighting, and start-up/testing of permanent electrical powered equipment prior to
permanent connection to the electrical system. All 120 volt and 240 volt temporary power
receptacles for tools and equipment shall be protected by ground fault circuit interrupters.
C. Continuity of Service:
1. No service shall be interrupted or changed without permission from Architect and Owner.
Obtain written permission before any work is started.
2. When interruption of services is required, all persons concerned shall be notified and shall
agree upon a time.
D. Demolition:
1. Perform demolition as required to accomplish new work.
16000 - 2
General Electrical Requirements
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
a. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply.
b. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above
accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with inaccessible walls and floors,
and patch surfaces.
c. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices.
d. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed.
e. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets that are not removed.
f. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization
equipment that has been removed.
g. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaries. Remove brackets, stems,
hangers, and other accessories.
h. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal.
2. Accomplish work in neat workmanlike manner to minimize interference, annoyance or
inconvenience such work might impose on Owner or other contractors.
3. Unless otherwise noted, remove from premises materials and equipment removed in
demolition work.
4. Equipment noted to be removed and turned over to Owner shall be delivered to Owner at
place and time Owner designates.
5. Where materials are to be turned over to Owner or reused and installed by Contractor, it
shall be Contractor's responsibility to maintain condition of materials and equipment equal
to that existing before work began. Repair or replace damaged materials or equipment at
no additional cost to Owner.
E. Cleaning and Repair
1. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment that remain or are to be reused.
2. Panelboards.
a. Clean exposed surfaces and check proper torque of electrical connections.
b. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions.
c. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement.
F. Concrete Work:
1. Provide cast-in-place concrete as required by contract documents unless otherwise noted.
2. Concrete shall comply with Division 3 - Concrete.
3. Provide anchor bolts, metal shapes and templates required to be cast in concrete or used
to form concrete for support of electrical equipment.
G. Painting:
1. Painting of electrical equipment will be done under Division 9 unless specified otherwise
or is to be furnished with factory applied finish coats.
2. Furnish equipment with factory applied prime finish unless otherwise specified.
3. If factory finish on equipment furnished by Contractor is damaged in shipment or during
construction, refinish equipment to satisfaction of Architect.
1.4 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Rules and regulations of Federal, State and local authorities and utility companies, in force at
time of execution of contract shall become part of this specification.
1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Agencies or publications referenced herein refer to the following:
16000 - 3
General Electrical Requirements
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
1. ANSI American National Standards Institute
2. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
3. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
4. EIA Electronic Industries Association
5. FCC Federal Communications Commission
6. ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association
7. IEEE Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers
8. IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
9. NEC National Electrical Code
10. NECA National Electrical Contractors Association
11. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
12. NFPA National Fire Protection Association
13. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
14. TIA Telecommunications Industries Association
15. UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
B. Work shall be in accordance with latest edition of codes, standards or specifications unless
noted otherwise.
1.6 LISTING
A. All material installed on project shall bear UL label or be UL listed, unless UL label or listing is
not available for that type of material.
B. Other nationally recognized testing agencies, acceptable to AHJ, are approved.
1.7 ENCLOSURES
A. Typical NEMA Enclosures and Usage
1. NEMA 1 - Indoors. Falling dirt.
2. NEMA 2 - Indoors. Falling dirt. Falling liquids. Light splashing.
3. NEMA 3 - Outdoors. Sleet, snow, rain. Windblown dust.
4. NEMA 3X - Same as NEMA 3 plus corrosion resistant.
5. NEMA 3S - Same as NEMA 3 plus mechanism operable when ice covered.
6. NEMA 3SX - Same as NEMA 3S plus corrosion resistant.
7. NEMA 3R - Outdoors. Rain, snow, sleet.
8. NEMA 3RX - Same as NEMA 3R plus corrosion resistant.
9. NEMA 4 - Outdoors. Rain, sleet, snow. Wind blown dust. Hose down.
10. NEMA 4X - Same as 4 plus corrosion resistant.
11. NEMA 4 - Indoors. Falling dirt. Falling and light splashing liquids. Flying dust, lint and
fibers. Hose down.
12. NEMA 4X - Same as NEMA 4 plus corrosion resistant.
13. NEMA 5 - Indoors. Falling Dirt. Falling Liquids. Settling dust, lint and fibers.
14. NEMA 6 - Outdoors. Rain, snow, sleet. Windblown dust. Hose down. Temporary
submersion.
15. NEMA 6P - Same as NEMA 6 plus corrosion resistant. Prolonged submersion.
16. NEMA 6 - Indoors. Falling dirt. Falling and light splashing liquids. Flying dust, lint and
fibers. Hose down. Temporary submersion.
17. NEMA 6P - Same as NEMA 6 plus corrosion resistant. Prolonged Submersion.
16000 - 4
General Electrical Requirements
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
18. NEMA 7 - Indoors. Class I, Division 1 or 2, Groups A, B, C or D. (Flammable gas).
19. NEMA 9 - Indoors. Class II, Division 1 or 2. Groups E, R, or G. (Combustible dust).
20. NEMA 12 - Indoors. Falling Dirt. Falling liquids. Flying dust, lint and fibers. Oil or
coolant seepage.
21. NEMA 13 - Same as NEMA 12 plus oil or coolant spraying or splashing.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings (Product Data):
1. Refer to Division 1 requirements for submittal procedures.
2. Submit shop drawings for equipment and systems as requested in the respective
specification sections.
3. Mark general catalog sheets and drawings to indicate specific items submitted.
4. Include proper identification of equipment by name and/or number, as indicated in
specification and shown on drawings.
5. When manufacturer's reference numbers are different from those specified, provide
correct cross-reference number for each item. Submittals shall be clearly marked and
noted accordingly.
6. When luminaires, equipment and items specified include accessories, parts and additional
items under one designation, submittals shall be complete and include all required
components.
7. Submit electrical equipment room layouts drawn to scale, including equipment, raceways,
accessories and clearance for maintenance.
8. Submit shop drawings or product data within thirty (30) days after signing contracts.
Submittals must be approved before installation of materials and equipment.
9. Submittals, which are not complete, not permanent, or not properly checked by
Contractor, will be returned without review.
B. Certificates and Inspections:
1. Obtain and pay for inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and deliver
certificates approving installations to Owner unless otherwise directed.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. Refer to Division 1 requirements.
2. Upon completion of work but before final acceptance of system, submit to Architect for
approval, 3 copies of operation and maintenance manuals in loose-leaf binders. If "one
copy" is larger than 2" thick or consists of multiple volumes, submit only one set initially for
review. After securing approval, submit all 3 copies to Owner.
3. Manuals shall be organized by specification section number and shall have table of
contents and tabs for each piece of equipment or system.
4. Manuals shall include the following:
a. Copies of all shop drawings.
b. Manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions. Include parts lists of all
items or equipment. Where manufacturer's data includes several types or models,
applicable type or model shall be designated.
c. CD ROM's of O&M data with exploded parts lists where available.
d. Phone numbers and addresses of local parts suppliers and service companies.
e. Internet/WEB page addresses where applicable.
f. Wiring diagrams.
g. Start up and shut down procedure.
16000 - 5
General Electrical Requirements
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
h. Factory and field test records.
i. Additional information, diagrams or explanations as designated under respective
equipment or systems specification section.
5. Instruct Owner's representative in operation and maintenance of equipment. Instruction
shall include complete operating cycle on all apparatus.
6. O&M manuals and instructions to Owner shall be provided prior to request for final
payment.
D. Record Documents:
1. Refer to General Conditions of Contract. Prepare complete set of record drawings.
2. Use designated set of prints of contract documents as prepared by Architect to mark-up
for record drawing purposes.
1.9 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Building Access:
1. Arrange for necessary openings in building to allow for admittance of all apparatus.
B. Coordination:
1. Provide power wiring and motor control wiring, except temperature control wiring, for
motors and electrically powered or electrically controlled equipment, as indicated on
electrical contract documents.
2. Connect and wire equipment complete and ready to operate according to wiring diagrams
furnished by various trades.
3. Starters, disconnects, relays, wire, conduit, pushbuttons, pilot lights and other devices
required for power and control of motors or electrical equipment shall be provided by
Electrical Contractor except as specifically noted elsewhere in these specifications.
4. Where starters or other devices are furnished by others they shall be connected and wired
by this Contractor.
5. This Contractor's drawings and/or specifications shall show number and rating of motors
furnished by others, together with their actuating devices. Should any change in size,
rating or means of control be made to any motor or other electrical equipment after
contracts are awarded, Contractor responsible for change shall immediately notify this
Contractor. Additional costs due to these changes shall be the responsibility of Contractor
initiating the change.
6. Equipment and wiring shall be selected and installed for conditions in which it will be
required to perform. (i.e., general purpose, weatherproof, rain tight, explosion proof, dust
tight, or any other special type as required.)
C. Cutting and Patching:
1. Perform cutting and patching required for complete installation of systems unless
otherwise noted. Patch and restore all work cut or damaged to original condition. This
includes openings remaining from removal or relocation of existing system components.
2. Provide all materials required for patching unless otherwise noted.
3. Do not pierce beams or columns without permission of Architect and then only as
directed. If openings are required through walls or floors where no sleeve has been
provided, hole shall be core drilled to avoid unnecessary damage and structural
weakening.
4. Where alterations disturb lawns, paving, walks, etc., replace, repair or refinish surfaces to
condition existing prior to commencement of work. This may include areas beyond
construction limits.
D. Housekeeping and Cleanup:
16000 - 6
General Electrical Requirements
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
1. Periodically as work progresses and/or as directed by Architect, remove waste materials
from building and leave area of work broom clean. Upon completion of work, remove
tools, scaffolding, broken and waste materials, etc. from site.
1.10 GUARANTEE
A. Guarantee for one year after acceptance by Owner all equipment, materials, and workmanship to
be free from defect.
B. Repair, replace or alter systems or parts of systems found defective at no extra cost to Owner.
C. In any case, wherein fulfilling requirements of any guarantee, if Contractor disturbs any work
guaranteed under another contract, restore such disturbed work to condition satisfactory to
Architect and guarantee such restored work to same extent as it was guaranteed under such
other contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Direct reference on the drawings or in the specifications of model numbers of a certain
manufacturer is not intended to imply exclusion from consideration of similar or equivalent
products of other manufacturers provided they comply with the following:
1. The item shall physically conform to the space constraints and the surrounding conditions
and completely fulfill the function for which it is intended.
2. Complete catalog cut-sheets, specification sheets, and descriptive data shall be submitted
for Engineering approval prior to the purchase of such items.
2.2 HOISTING AND RIGGING
A. Each contractor shall furnish all required rigging and hoisting equipment and personnel for the
installation of his work and for any removal of existing equipment. Each contractor shall be
responsible for ensuring that any equipment that is too large to pass through doorways and
access ways, or is too heavy to transport across the structure, is brought to the job and set in
place before the spaces are enclosed and in pieces as required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Verify elevations and measurements prior to installation of materials.
B. Electrical drawings are diagrammatic, indicating general arrangement, approximate sizes,
general locations of equipment and outlets. Electrical contractor shall verify dimensions in field;
adjust to manufacturer’s Shop Drawings. Do not scale from drawings.
C. Architectural and structural drawings supersede electrical drawings. Electrical contractor shall
determine that work of this Division can be accommodated within spaces provided. Architect
shall be notified of any interference before starting installation.
3.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to the site under provisions of Division 1.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Division 1
16000 - 7
General Electrical Requirements
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
C. Store in a clean, dry space.
D. Maintain factory wrapping or provide cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris,
and traffic.
E. Handle in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
F. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosure, and finish. Lift only with lugs
provided for the purpose.
3.3 FLOOR, WALL, ROOF AND CEILING OPENINGS
A. Coordinate location of openings, chases, furred spaces, etc. with appropriate Contractors.
Provide during progress of construction all sleeves and inserts that are to be built into structure.
B. Temporary sleeves, if used to form wall openings, shall be removed prior to installation of
permanent materials. Permanent sleeves for wall penetrations shall be minimum 24 ga
galvanized sheet metal unless otherwise noted.
C. Steel sleeves, when required, shall be Schedule 40 carbon steel pipe with integral water stop.
D. For core drilled holes, size and location shall be reviewed and approved by Structural Engineer
prior to execution.
E. Submit product data and installation details for penetrations of building structure. Submittal shall
include schedule indicating penetrating materials, (steel conduit, PVC conduit, cables, cable tray,
etc.), sizes of each, opening sizes and sealant products intended for use.
F. Where penetrations of fire-rated assemblies are involved, seal penetrations with appropriate
firestopping systems as specified.
G. Submit complete penetration layout drawings showing openings in building structural members
including floor slabs, bearing walls, shear walls, etc. Indicate and locate, by dimension, all
required openings including those sleeved, formed or core drilled. Drawings shall be approved
prior to preparing openings in structural member.
H. Openings for penetrations shall be minimum 1/2" larger on all sides than outside dimensions of
raceways or cables. However, where fire resistant penetrations are required, size openings in
accordance with recommendations of firestopping systems manufacturer.
I. Seal non fire-rated floor penetrations with non-shrink grout equal to Embeco by Master Builders,
or urethane caulk, as appropriate.
J. Seal non-rated wall openings with urethane caulk.
K. Where penetrations occur through exterior walls into building spaces, use steel sleeves with
integral water stop, similar to type "WS" wall sleeves by Thunderline Corporation. Seal annular
space between sleeves and pipe with "Link-Seal" modular wall and casing seals by Thunderline
Corporation, or sealing system by another manufacturer approved as equal by Architect. Sealing
system shall utilize Type 316 stainless steel bolts, washers and nuts.
L. Provide chrome or nickel plated escutcheons where raceways pass through walls, floors or
ceilings and are exposed in finished areas. Size escutcheons to fit raceways for finished
appearance. Finished areas shall not include mechanical/electrical rooms, janitor’s closets,
storage rooms, etc., unless suspended ceilings are specified.
16000 - 8
General Electrical Requirements
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
3.4 EQUIPMENT ACCESS
A. Install raceways, junction and pull boxes, and accessories to permit access to equipment for
maintenance. Relocation of raceways, or accessories as required, to provide access shall be
provided at no additional cost to Owner.
B. Install equipment with ample space allowed for removal, repair or changes to equipment.
Provide ready accessibility to equipment and wiring without moving other equipment, which is to
be installed or which is already in place.
C. Access doors in walls, chases, or inaccessible ceilings will be provided under other sections of
the specifications, unless otherwise indicated. Access doors shall be for the purpose of
providing access where equipment requiring servicing, repairs or maintenance is located in walls,
chases or above inaccessible ceilings.
D. Locate electrical outlets and equipment to fit details, panels, decorating or finish at space.
Architect reserves the right to make minor position changes of outlet locations before work has
been installed.
E. Verify door swings before installing room lighting switch boxes and install boxes on latch side of
door unless otherwise noted
3.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Provide supporting steel not indicated on drawings as required for installation of equipment and
materials including angles, channels, beams, hangers, etc.
B. Concrete anchors, used for attachment to concrete, shall be steel shell with plug type. Plastic,
rawhide or anchors utilizing lead are not allowed.
C. Do not support equipment or luminaires from metal roof decking.
3.6 SUPPORT PROTECTION
A. In occupied areas, mechanical rooms and areas requiring normal maintenance access, certain
equipment must be guarded to protect personnel from injury.
B. Provide minimum 1/2" thick Armstrong Armaflex insulation or similar product applied with
Armstrong 520 adhesive on lower edges of equipment, including bus duct, cable tray, pull boxes
and electrical supporting devices suspended less than 7 ft above floors, platforms or catwalks in
these areas.
C. Threaded rod or bolts shall not extend beyond supporting element and shall be protected as
described above.
3.7 HOUSEKEEPING PADS
A. Provide concrete housekeeping pads for all floor-mounted equipment.
B. Pads shall be minimum 4 inches high and be minimum 2 inches wider and longer than the
equipment it supports.
3.8 ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A. Contractor shall perform acceptance testing. Equipment to be tested is noted as "Testing By
Electrical Contractor" in technical specification sections. Tests shall be as outlined in technical
specification sections.
16000 - 9
General Electrical Requirements
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
B. When testing is to be witnessed by Architect/Engineer or Inspector, notify them at least 10 days
prior to testing date.
C. When equipment or systems fail to meet minimum test requirements, replace or repair defective
work or materials as necessary and repeat inspection and test. Make repairs with new materials.
D. This Contractor is responsible for certifying in writing equipment and system test results.
Certification shall include identification of portion of system tested, date, time, test criteria and
name and title of person signing test certification documents.
E. Maintain copies of certified tests, including those for any failed tests, at project site. At
completion of project, include copies of test records and certifications in O&M Manuals.
3.9 START-UP
A. All systems and equipment shall be started, tested, adjusted and turned over to Owner ready for
operation.
1. This includes "Owner-Furnished, Contractor-Installed" (OFCI) and "Contractor-Furnished,
Contractor-Installed" (CFCI) systems and equipment.
B. Follow manufacturer's pre-start-up checkout, start-up, trouble shooting and adjustment
procedures.
C. Contractor shall provide services of technician/mechanic knowledgeable in start-up and checkout
of types of systems and equipment on project.
D. Provide start-up services, by manufacturer's representative where specified or where Contractor
does not have qualified personnel.
E. Coordinate start-up with all trades.
3.10 CLEANING
A. After installation is complete, Contractor shall clean all systems.
B. Vacuum debris from panelboards, switchboards, motor starter and disconnect switch enclosures,
junction boxes and pull boxes two weeks before energization and again prior to completion.
C. Where louvers are provided in switchgear or transformer enclosures, vacuum louvers free of dust
and dirt.
D. Clean luminaire lenses and lamps at time of installation and clean lens exteriors just prior to final
inspection.
E. Thoroughly clean equipment of stains, paint spots, dirt and dust. Remove temporary labels not
used for instruction or operation.
END OF SECTION
16060 - 1
Grounding and Bonding
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 16060
GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCE
A. The Work under this section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents including the
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and sections under Division 1 General
Requirements.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Provide a complete grounding system for services and equipment as required by State Codes,
NEC, applicable portions of other NFPA codes, and as indicated herein.
B. Maximum resistance to ground shall be less than 5 ohms.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. UL 467 Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Ground rods shall be 5/8” diameter x 10’-0” length copper clad steel.
B. Ground connectors shall be irreversible compression type above grade and exothermic welded
type below grade.
C. Grounds in concealed, outdoor or in damp/wet locations shall meet IEEE 837 requirements and
shall be UL 467 listed.
D. Grounded conductors (system neutral) shall be copper with white or gray insulation.
E. Equipment grounding conductors shall be copper with green insulation for conductor sizes #6
AWG and smaller. Equipment grounding conductors larger than #6 AWG shall have black
insulation wrapped with green tape at the terminations and at every point where the conductor is
accessible.
F. The main bonding jumper, system bonding jumper, and grounding electrode conductor shall be
copper regardless of the conductor type used for the phase conductors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SEQUENCING, SCHEDULING
A. Equipment grounds shall be permanently attached prior to energizing equipment.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Connections shall be exposed and visible for inspection at all times. Do not install insulation
over ground connections.
16060 - 2
Grounding and Bonding
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
B. Metal water pipe, by itself, is not an adequate grounding electrode and must be supplemented by
another electrode system. Bond system together.
C. Install ground rods 1 ft minimum below grade. Where multiple ground rods are installed,
minimum spacing between adjacent rods shall be 10’-0”.
D. Grounding connections shall be made on surfaces, which have been cleaned of paint, dirt, oil,
etc., so that connections are bare metal to bare metal contact.
E. Grounding connections shall be tight and shall be made with UL listed grounding devices,
fittings, bushings, etc.
F. Duplex receptacles of any amperage shall be grounding type and shall have separate grounding
contact. Install separate jumper between grounding terminal on device and metallic box.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Green wire grounding conductor shall terminate in panelboard at green wire ground bus.
B. Multiple conductors on single lug shall not be permitted. Each grounding conductor shall
terminate on its own terminal lug.
C. An equipment grounding conductor shall be provided with phase conductors in conduit,
regardless of the type of conduit used.
1. Conductor to provide ground continuity between equipment or device and conduit-
raceway system.
D. Provide separate green wire grounding conductor for each branch circuit neutral originating from
panelboards.
E. Bond equipment ground to components of raceway system, such as junction boxes, starter or
disconnect switch enclosures, equipment cases, etc.
F. Grounding conductors for branch circuits shall be size indicated in NEC, except minimum size
grounding conductor shall be No. 12 AWG.
G. Each branch panel feeder shall have an identified equipment grounding conductor originating at
the point of service and terminating at ground bus in panelboard.
1. Size as indicated in NEC except in no instance smaller than No. 8 AWG.
H. Grounding conductor is in addition to neutral conductor and in no case shall neutral conductor
serve as grounding means.
I. Bond lower end of exhaust ducts, vent stacks, etc., which pass through roof.
J. Provide No. 6 AWG grounding conductor from telephone service entrance equipment to
grounding electrode system.
K. Provide No. 6 AWG grounding conductor from each telephone terminal cabinet or telephone
terminal backboard to grounding electrode system.
3.4 TESTING
A. Test ground resistance before connecting to existing ground system or grounded piping system.
16060 - 3
Grounding and Bonding
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
3.5 INSPECTION
A. Prior to backfilling, completed system shall be inspected by the Authority Having Jurisdiction,
unless specifically waived in writing.
END OF SECTION
16070 - 1
Supporting Devices
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 16070
SUPPORTING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16130 - Raceways and Fittings
1.2 REFERENCE
A. The Work under this Section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents including the
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and sections under Division 1 General
Requirements
1.3 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide all supporting devices as specified and as required for proper support of conduit and
electrical equipment.
B. Support for all conditions of operation to prevent excess stress and allow for proper expansion
and contraction.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings for all applicable equipment:
1. Manufacturer's name
2. Model numbers
3. Materials of construction and load ratings (lbs)
4. Schedule of hangers and support devices with support spacing
5. Details for supplementary steel utilized for trapeze or special designed supports.
6. Structural attachments, inserts and concrete anchors
7. Equipment mounting devices
8. All other appropriate data
1.5 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Support materials shall be steel or stainless steel unless specifically indicated.
B. Hangers, support devices and hardware shall be steel and shall have factory standard primed,
galvanized or electroplated finish for indoor application, and hot-dipped galvanized finish for
outdoor application. Coat cut edges, welds or any damaged finish with galvanized paint.
C. Where conduit can be conveniently grouped to allow trapeze type supports, supporting steel
shall be by means of standard structural shapes.
D. Punching, drilling, or welding of building structural steel is not allowed unless approved by
Structural Engineer.
E. Application of concrete inserts and concrete anchors shall be reviewed and approved by
Structural Engineer prior to installation.
F. Any proposed weld attachments to building structure shall be reviewed by Structural Engineer
prior to execution of work. Execution of this work may be assigned to General Trades
16070 - 2
Supporting Devices
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
responsible for building structural steel. Cost for this work, however, will remain the
responsibility of this Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS
A. Provide all supporting steel, not indicated on structural drawings, that is required for installation
of Electrical equipment and materials, including angles, channels, beams, etc. to suspend or
floor support equipment.
2.2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS (Metallic)
A. Manufacturers: Erico, B-Line, or approved equal.
2.3 HANGER RODS (Metallic)
A. Rods shall conform to the latest MSS Standards. Furnish rods complete with adjusting and lock
nuts.
B. Rods shall have electro-plated zinc or hot dip galvanized finish.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, size rods for individual hangers and trapeze supports as indicated in
the following schedule. Total weight of equipment shall not exceed limits indicated.
Maximum Load (lbs.) Rod Max. Pipe Size
Not exceeding 650°F Service
Temp.
Diameter (inches) With Single Rod
610 3/8 2"
1130 1/2 3"
1818 5/8 5"
2.4 BEAM CLAMPS
A. Beam Clamps: Anvil Fig. 218, 228 and 292.
B. Top Beam Clamps: Anvil Fig. 227.
C. C-Clamps: Anvil Fig. 86, 92 or 93. Provide clamps with retaining clips.
D. Proset system, proseal plug and fire-fill for sleeved and cored holes.
2.5 CONCRETE ANCHORS
A. Manufacturers: Hilti, Powers or Red Head.
B. Flush or shell type, meeting description in Federal specification FF-S-325, Group VIII, Type 1 for
expansion shield anchors, similar to Hilti HDI/HDI-L. Anchors shall be zinc plated in accordance
with ASTM B633, Sc. 1, and Type III.
C. Select anchors with minimum safety factor of 8.0.
2.6 CONTINUOUS INSERT CHANNELS
A. Manufacturers: Unistrut, Anvil, B-Line, or Kindorf. Brackets inserts and accessories shall be
suitable for channel insert selected.
16070 - 3
Supporting Devices
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
B. Length and support capabilities to be suitable for supporting in vicinity.
2.7 METAL FRAMING SUPPORT SYSTEM (STRUT SYSTEM)
A. Manufacturers: Unistrut, B-Line Strut Systems, Power-Strut, and Kindorf.
B. Channels shall have epoxy paint or electro-galvanized finish.
C. Channels shall not be lighter than 12 ga.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Support conduit from building structural members using concrete inserts, beam clamps, ceiling
plates, wall brackets. At no time shall hangers and supports overload building structural
members.
B. Select and size building attachments properly in accordance with manufacturer's published load
rating information.
C. Coordinate hanger and support installation to avoid work of other trades.
D. Suspend hangers by means of hanger rods. Perforated band iron and flat wire (strap iron) are
not allowed.
E. Conduit shall not be supported by other conduit.
F. Conduit shall not be supported by wire.
G. Do not support equipment or conduit from metal roof decking.
H. Refer to Section 16000 - General Electrical Requirements for requirements of personnel injury
protection guards for supporting devices.
I. Conduits within metal framed walls shall be supported within 2’-0” of each box or fitting and on
6’-0” centers or less.
3.2 BEAM CLAMPS
A. Provide locknut for hanging rod at clamp.
B. C-clamps are allowed for rod size 1/2" or smaller.
C. C-clamps are not allowed for project having seismic hazard level A, B or C.
3.3 TRAPEZE SUPPORTS
A. Construct trapeze supports with struts, angles, or channels and hang them by inserts or welded
beam attachments and rods.
3.4 CONCRETE ANCHORS
A. Anchor application, size, and placement shall be reviewed and approved by Structural Engineer
prior to installation.
END OF SECTION
16080 - 1
Electrical Identification
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 16080
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16120 - Conductors and Cables
B. Section 16130 - Raceways and Fittings
C. Section 16140 - Wiring Devices
D. Section 16420 - Lighting and Appliance Panelboards
1.2 REFERENCE
A. The Work under this Section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents including the
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and sections under Division 1 General
Requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product.
B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate color, lettering style, and graphic features
of identification products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 IDENTIFYING DEVICES
A. Stencil Paint:
1. Oil-based, alkyd enamel, black unless otherwise noted.
B. Marker System:
1. Manufacturers: Brady USA, Ideal, Marking Services Inc. (MSI), Seton, or approved equal.
C. Laminated Plastic Nameplates:
1. ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, phenolic-resin-laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2,
black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore.
2. Nameplates shall have minimum 1/4" high lettering.
3. Face of nameplate to be black and letters to be white, except emergency power
equipment nameplates are to have red face with white letters, except as specified
otherwise.
4. Fasteners shall be small metal screws, pop rivets or contact-type with permanent
adhesive.
16080 - 2
Electrical Identification
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. After painting is completed, identify equipment as indicated. Locate identification as
conspicuously as possible except where such would distract from finished area.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Nameplates shall be securely attached to non-concealed junction box covers of the following:
1. Electrical Distribution System
B. Engraved plastic nameplates shall be securely attached to:
1. Panelboards
2. Motor Starters
3. Each separately mounted circuit breaker or disconnect switch
4. Each overcurrent device in distribution panelboards
C. 4" round, 4" square and 4-11/16" junction boxes concealed above ceilings shall be identified with
circuits contained using neat lettering on cover with permanent type black marking pen. Label
shall include panel name along with branch circuit numbers included.
D. Nameplates shall identify equipment or load controlled and/or function and shall be the same as
indicated on contract documents. Voltages shall be shown on panelboard nameplates.
E. Motor starter nameplates shall include motor designation and horsepower.
F. Submit identification to Engineer for approval. Engineer reserves the right to modify
identifications prior to shop drawing approval.
G. Group conductors as to circuits and arrange in neat manner in pull boxes, cabinets and
panelboards. Group, bind together with nylon ties and identify conductors as to feeder or branch
circuit. Phase identification shall be consistent throughout system.
H. Identify each conductor of all systems at each panel, pull box and at each outlet with
permanently attached, wrap around, adhesive markers.
I. Identification of junction boxes and conductors shall include panelboard, switchboard or motor
control center, circuit number, phase, control circuit number or other appropriate number or letter
that will expedite future tracing and trouble shooting.
3.3 PANEL CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION
A. Furnish typewritten indices for each branch circuit and lighting panelboard clearly identifying the
load served by each circuit.
END OF SECTION
16120 - 1
Conductors and Cables
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 16120
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16080 - Electrical Identification
B. Section 16130 - Raceway and Fittings
1.2 REFERENCES
A. The Work under this section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents including the
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and sections under Division 1 General
Requirements.
1.3 DESCRIPTION
A. Conductor and conduit sizes in these contract documents are based on copper wire, and only
copper wire shall be used.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. UL83 - Thermoplastic - Insulated Wires and Cables.
B. UL44 - Rubber-Insulated Wires and Cables
C. UL486A - Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for use with Copper Conductors.
D. UL4868 - Wire Connectors for use with Aluminum Conductors.
E. UL486C - Splicing Wire Connectors.
F. UL1569 - Metal-clad cable.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings for:
1. Wire
2. Connectors
3. Supports
4. Pulling Compounds
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURER:
A. Conductors for use at 600 volts or below shall have 600 volt rated insulation.
1. Wire No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be solid.
2. Wire No. 8 AWG and larger shall be stranded only.
16120 - 2
Conductors and Cables
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
B. Motor control wiring:
1. Type THHN insulation.
2. Shall be stranded copper.
C. Wiring in lighting fixture channels:
1. Type THHN insulation.
D. Feeder Circuit Wiring:
1. Type THWN or XHHW insulation rated for wet location.
2. 75°C rated cable, or 90°C rated cable sized at 75°C rating for connection to 100% rated
devices.
E. Branch Circuit Wiring:
1. Use Type THHN, THW-2, THWN-2 or XHHW-2 insulation.
F. Metal Clad Cable (Type MC)
1. Metal clad cable may be used for:
a. Interior use, where concealed in dry locations. Do not use where exposed, except
as lighting fixture whips as indicated below.
b. Branch circuits as lighting fixture whips no longer than 6'.
c. Metal clad cable shall not be used for homerun wiring.
2. Metal clad cable shall have:
a. Impervious, corrugated, continuous, seam welded metal sheath.
b. Single grounding conductor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SEQUENCING-SCHEDULING
A. Do not install conductors until building is enclosed and weather tight.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Color code power wiring as follows:
1. 208Y/120 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire: phase A-black, phase B-red, phase C-blue, neutral-white,
ground conductor-green, isolated ground conductor – green with yellow stripe.
2. 480Y/277 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire: phase A-brown, phase B-orange, phase C-yellow, neutral-
gray, ground conductor-green.
3. The insulation color for conductors #10 AWG and smaller shall match the color code
described above throughout the entire length of the conductor.
4. Conductors #8 AWG and larger shall be color coded with plastic tape as described above
on each end, in each enclosure,, and at every joint, tap, or splice.
B. Install conductors in conduits and raceways in such manner that insulation will not be damaged
or undue strain placed on conductors.
1. Lubricants shall be UL listed.
C. Branch circuit wires in panels shall be neatly arranged with surplus wire cut off and wires tied
with non-metallic ties.
1. Metallic ties not permitted.
2. Splices within panels shall not be permitted.
16120 - 3
Conductors and Cables
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
D. Conductors shall be attached to terminal screw or lug per UL listing.
E. Joints, taps and splices sizes No. 10 and smaller:
1. Ideal-Nut Connectors or Scotchlok Spring connectors of appropriate size and type.
2. Provide label on each conductor to identify panel name and circuit number.
F. Joints, taps and splices sizes No. 8 AWG and larger:
1. Aluminum/copper compression connectors.
a. Install with hydraulic compression tool.
b. Provide label on each conductor to identify panel name and circuit number.
G. Plastic snap-on splice insulators are not allowed.
H. Support conductors in vertical raceways, exceeding 20’-0” above finished floor, using OZ type
"S" cable supports for 600 volt conductors.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Wire, cable boxes and reels shall bear the date of manufacture.
1. Date of manufacture shall not precede contract date by more than one year.
B. Minimum conductor sizes shall be as follows:
1. No. 12 - Branch circuits of any kind.
C. Limit conduit fill to a maximum of 6 current carrying conductors, unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
3.4 BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING
A. 208Y/120 volt circuits over 100 ft in length: Increase wire size one size for each 100 ft of length.
Increase conduit size as required.
B. 480Y/277 volt circuits over 150 ft in length: Increase wire size one size for each 150 ft of length.
Increase conduit size as required.
3.5 ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A. Testing shall be performed by Electrical Contractor
B. Perform electrical acceptance testing on all 600 volt feeders serving panelboards, switchboards
and secondary voltage service entrance equipment.
1. Acceptance testing shall include the following:
a. Verify tightness of bolted connections to manufacturer’s specified torque values.
b. Perform insulation-resistance test on each conductor with respect to ground and
adjacent conductors.
1) Applied potential to be 1000 volts DC for one minute.
2) Minimum insulation resistance shall be 50 megohms.
3) Correct any deviations between adjacent phases and values below
minimum.
c. Perform continuity test to insure correct cable connection.
d. Perform phase rotation test.
C. Cables, which are found defective, shall be replaced by Contractor at no expense to Owner.
16120 - 4
Conductors and Cables
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
END OF SECTION
16130 - 1
Raceways and Fittings
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 16130
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16070 - Supporting Devices
1.2 REFERENCE
A. The Work under this section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents including the
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and sections under Division 1 General
Requirements.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. UL 1 - Flexible Metal Electrical Conduit
B. UL 6 - Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit
C. UL 360 - Liquid-tight Flexible Steel Conduit, Electrical
D. UL 514B - Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes
E. UL 651 - Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduits
F. UL 651A - Type EB and A PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit
G. UL 1242 - Intermediate Metal Conduit
H. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies
I. NEMA FB 2.10 - Selection and Installation Guidelines for Fittings for Use with Non-Flexible
Electrical Metal Conduit and Tubing
J. NEMA FB 2.20 - Selection and Installation Guidelines for Fittings for Use with Flexible Electrical
Metal Conduit and Tubing
K. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chlorides (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and
Intermediate Metal Conduit
L. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit
M. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing
N. ANSI C80-1 - Rigid Steel Conduit - Zinc Coated (GRS)
O. ANSI C80-3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing Zinc Coated (EMT)
P. ANSI C80-5 - Rigid Aluminum Conduit
Q. ANSI C80-6 - Intermediate Metal Conduit - Zinc Coated (IMC)
16130 - 2
Raceways and Fittings
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for:
1. Conduit
2. Couplings and fittings
3. Boxes
4. Floor boxes
5. Conduit seals
B. Provide list of conduit types indicating where each type is used.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Rigid Galvanized Steel (RGS) Conduit:
1. Heavy wall tubing with hot dipped galvanized coating
2. Connections shall be made with double locknuts and bushings. Bushings to be steel with
integral insulator except conduits 2" and below may have high impact thermoset Phenolic
insulating bushings.
3. Couplings shall be threaded steel.
B. Intermediate Metallic Conduit (IMC) Conduit:
1. Intermediate grade metallic tubing with zinc coating
2. Connections shall be made with double locknuts and bushings. Bushings to be steel with
integral insulator except conduits 2" and below may have high impact thermoset phenolic
insulating bushings.
3. Couplings shall be threaded steel.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) Conduit:
1. Thin wall tubing with zinc coating
2. Couplings and connectors shall be threaded steel, watertight gland compression type or
steel, concrete tight, set screw type.
3. All connectors shall have insulated throat.
D. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit:
1. Heavy wall rigid, schedule 40 or schedule 80, listed for underground encasement and
above ground applications.
2. Use primer/cleaner on glued joints.
E. PVC Coated Conduit:
1. RGS or IMC Conduit
2. 40 MIL PVC exterior coating
3. 2 MIL Urethane coating on interior and threads
4. Plastic tread protector caps
F. Flexible Metal Conduit:
1. Electro-galvanized single strip steel.
G. Liquid Tight Flexible Metal Conduit:
1. Electro-galvanized single strip steel with PVC coating.
16130 - 3
Raceways and Fittings
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
2.2 BOXES
A. Galvanized steel or cast type outlet boxes to accommodate device indicated by symbol, in
conformance with code requirements, number and size of conductors and splices and consistent
with type of construction.
B. Surface mounted boxes shall have the appropriate cover, raised device covers on 4" square and
4-11/16" boxes and handy box covers on handy boxes, etc.
C. Boxes in block shall have device covers that are square drawn or square cut.
D. Boxes in tile shall have square cornered tile covers.
E. Use round drawn device covers on boxes in lath and plaster walls or dry wall only.
F. Front edge of device boxes must be set flush with the finished wall surfaces except on walls of
non-combustible materials where the boxes may have maximum set back of 1/4".
G. Exterior wall boxes or wet location boxes shall be gasketed type cast boxes with matching cover.
H. Gangable type boxes shall not be used.
I. Box ears, with tapped holes, must turn into the box opening.
J. Floor outlet boxes:
1. Moisture-proof, fully adjustable, stamped steel with brass duplex flap and brass carpet
flanges, as required, for finished floor.
K. Junction or pull boxes and covers:
1. Code gauge steel with galvanized or sheradized finish with covers secured by galvanized
machine screws.
2. Sufficient size to allow code required minimum cable bending radii to be rolled.
3. Knock out punches shall be used for required holes.
4. Use factory manufactured boxes only.
5. Field fabricated boxes not allowed without prior approval of local Authority Having
Jurisdiction (AHJ).
L. Conduit Bodies:
1. For use with RGS, IMC or EMT
2. Malleable Iron
3. Cast aluminum - copper free
4. PVC coated
5. Covers
a. Stamped steel
b. Cast steel or aluminum
c. Stainless Steel Screws
d. Neoprene Gaskets
2.3 SUPPORT
A. Conduit supports for horizontal or vertical single runs:
1. Hot dipped galvanized heavy-duty sheet steel straps, mineralac clamps or channel system
with appropriate components.
16130 - 4
Raceways and Fittings
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
2. Spring type pressure clamps may be used with conduit through 3/4".
B. Conduit supports for horizontal and vertical multiple runs:
1. Channel systems with appropriate components.
a. Horizontal runs to be supported with appropriate sized rods.
b. Vertical runs anchored to structure.
2. Spring type pressure clamps may be used with conduit through 3/4".
C. Vertical conduit runs 1-1/4" and larger passing through floors shall be supported at each floor
with pipe riser clamps.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION
A. Furnish information to General Contractor as to size and location of built-in openings required.
B. Do not cut, remove or pierce general or mechanical insulation, fire rated walls, ceilings or
steelwork without prior permission and instruction.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Conduit
1. Provide for proper application, installation, and location of inserts, supports and anchor
bolts for satisfactory raceway system.
2. Where any component of the raceway system is damaged, replace it or provide new
raceway system.
3. Run conduits concealed to avoid adverse conditions such as heat and moisture, to permit
drainage, and to avoid materials and equipment of other trades.
4. Maintain minimum clearance of 6" from hot water pipes, flues and any high temperature
piping or ductwork.
5. Avoid exposed conduit runs. Conduit may be run exposed where it is impractical or
impossible to conceal or where specific approval is obtained.
6. Run conduit grouped and parallel or perpendicular to the building axes.
7. Do not route exposed conduits over boilers or other high temperature machinery or in
contact with such equipment.
8. Exposed conduits to be offset at boxes.
9. Conduit shall not be permitted to be installed in concrete except where noted on the
plans.
10. Conduit shall not be permitted to be installed in structural or topping floor slabs.
11. Ream conduit smooth at ends, cap upon installation, rigidly attach to structural parts of
building and securely fasten to outlet boxes, panel cabinets, junction boxes, pull boxes,
splicing chambers, safety switches and other components of the raceway system.
12. Independently support or attach raceway system to structural parts of construction.
Suspended ceiling systems shall not be considered as structural parts of the construction
for conduit support.
13. Conduit, conduit systems or boxes shall not be supported or secured by wire, but shall be
supported by devices manufactured specifically for this purpose.
a. Plastic tie-wrap is not permitted.
14. Conduits supported on channel systems shall be secured on each channel with
appropriate clamps.
16130 - 5
Raceways and Fittings
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
15. Conduit installed in metal stud walls must be secured to prevent rattling by using Caddy
clamps. Install clamps within 2’ of each box and at every 6’ on center.
16. Devices in exterior or load-bearing walls may be fed by horizontal conduit runs.
Horizontal bends in conduit around corners is not allowed. Other devices shall be fed
vertically from above.
17. Provide spare capped conduits for flush-mounted panelboards consisting of three 3/4"
conduits to the ceiling space above, and three 3/4" conduits to the ceiling space below
floor slab.
18. Provide empty raceways 2-1/2" and over with No.10 galvanized fishwire.
19. Provide nylon pull cord in conduit smaller than 2-1/2".
20. Coordinate through-roof conduits with roofing contractor.
21. Minimum conduit size: 1/2", except as noted.
22. Home runs: minimum 3/4" conduit, except as noted.
23. Minimum size for flexible metal conduit is 1/2" except where type MC cable is specifically
permitted in these specifications for lighting fixture whips.
24. Minimum size for liquid tight flexible metal conduit is 1/2".
25. Provide conduit expansion and deflection fittings in all conduit runs imbedded in or
penetrating concrete where movement perpendicular to the axis of the conduit may be
encountered.
26. Provide conduit expansion fittings complete with bonding jumpers in conduit runs, which
cross expansion joints in structure and conduit runs mechanically attached to 2 separate
structures.
27. On work exposed to weather or in damp locations fittings shall be made weathertight.
28. Conduit and boxes attached to building surfaces, which may be damp, shall be spaced
out to avoid rust and/or corrosion using fittings approved for use.
29. Provide conduit seals where conduits pass from interior to exterior of the building, in moist
areas in accordance with NEC, where conduits enter a room which at any time is subject
to lower or higher temperatures and where conduits enter a room which at any time is
subject to internal air pressures above or below normal.
30. Seal conduits entering or passing through areas that are "hazardous (classified) areas" as
defined in NEC - Art 500.
B. Boxes:
1. Set outlet boxes parallel to construction and independently attached to same.
2. Adjust flush type boxes to set level with finished surface.
3. Back to back and through-the-wall boxes are not acceptable.
4. Provide multi-ganged boxes where 2 or more devices are in same location, unless
otherwise noted.
5. Box Support:
a. Mount boxes straight.
b. In stud walls provide horizontal bracing at top or bottom of box for 3 or more gang
device boxes.
c. For up to 2 gang device boxes, provide stud support one side, with short piece of
stud.
d. Boxes in masonry walls shall be solidly mortared in.
e. Tie wire supported boxes are not acceptable.
f. For one and two gang box support, manufactured bracket supports shall be an
accepted alternate.
16130 - 6
Raceways and Fittings
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
6. Provide partitions in multi-ganged boxes where different types of devices are installed, or
devices installed operate at different voltages.
7. Mount boxes in block walls at block joint nearest to indicated height.
C. With prior approval by the Engineer, raceway runs may be field changed to obtain better
installation.
D. Provide PVC coated conduit in areas with corrosive atmosphere as noted on plans.
E. Conduit clamps, mounting hardware, supports, hangers, etc., shall be made of stainless steel
when located in "wet" or wash-down areas.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Rigid Galvanized Steel (RGS) Conduit:
1. RGS Permitted:
a. Installations below grade.
b. All locations except corrosive atmospheres.
B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) Conduit:
1. EMT conduit shall be permitted:
a. Interior dry locations
C. Intermediate Metallic Conduit (IMC) Conduit:
1. IMC conduit permitted:
a. Interior partitions
b. Hazardous locations
c. Locations exposed to weather
d. Locations requiring mechanical protection.
D. Nonmetallic Rigid Conduit:
1. Nonmetallic rigid conduit shall be permitted for:
a. Direct burial, concrete encased.
b. Direct burial, in sand fill on bottom and top, minimum burial depth of 36”.
c. Corrosive atmospheres.
E. Liquid Tight Flexible Metal Conduit:
1. Use liquid tight flexible conduit, not over 4 ft in length, for final connections to:
a. Equipment in wet locations.
b. Equipment with vibration isolation mounting.
c. Equipment housing ferromagnetic cores or with integral moving components,
capable of generating noise or vibrations including transformers and motors.
d. Pumps and associated equipment.
e. Instruments and control devices.
F. Flexible Metal Conduit:
1. Use flexible metal conduit not over 6 ft in length for final connections for:
a. Equipment in dry locations.
b. Equipment in dry locations with vibration isolation mounting.
c. Final connections to recessed luminaires in lengths not to exceed 6 ft.
16130 - 7
Raceways and Fittings
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
G. PVC Coated Conduit
1. PVC coated conduit shall be used:
a. In corrosive atmospheres as noted on plans.
b. In exterior environments needing additional protection.
2. Use PVC coated elbows.
END OF SECTION
16140 - 1
Wiring Devices
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16060 - Grounding and Bonding
B. Section 16130 - Raceways and Fittings
1.2 REFERENCE
A. The Work under this section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents including the
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and sections under Division 1 General
Requirements.
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
A. Provide devices such as switches, receptacles, plates, etc., as shown on drawings and specified.
B. All openings shall be covered with either devices and matching plates, solid blank plates or blank
plates with bushed opening.
C. Unless otherwise noted, wiring devices of same type shall be from same manufacturer.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Federal Spec. W-C-596F Federal Specifications for Electrical Power Connections.
B. ANSI NEMA WD-6 Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements.
C. NEMA WD-1 General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices.
D. UL 20 - General Use Snap Switches.
E. UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings for equipment under this Section.
B. Plate sample.
C. Weatherproof cover plate samples.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Items specified:
1. Toggle Switches
2. Duplex Receptacles
3. Plates
16140 - 2
Wiring Devices
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Leviton part numbers are indicated throughout this specification.
This is provided with the intent of showing the level of quality required for each device. Unless
specifically stated otherwise, products from alternate manufacturers will be accepted provided
they are a comparable product of the same level of quality and capable of performing the
intended function.
1. Leviton
2. Pass & Seymour
3. Hubbell
4. General Electric
5. Arrow Hart
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Switches:
1. Switches shall be commercial grade 20 ampere, 120-277 volt, AC, quiet type, unless
otherwise noted.
a. Single pole - Leviton 1221-2
b. Double pole - Leviton 1222-2
c. Three-way - Leviton 1223-2
d. Four-way - Leviton 1224-2
2. Switches shall be white colored. Switches shall be UL verified to Federal Specification W-
S-896.
3. Lighted handle switches shall be 20 ampere, 120-277 volt, AC, with red handle.
a. Single pole – Leviton 1221-LH.
B. Receptacles
1. Receptacles shall be commercial grade 20 ampere, 125 volt, duplex, nylon face,
grounded, with separate grounding screw and NEMA 5-20R plug configuration.
a. Standard receptacle shall be Leviton 5362
2. Receptacles shall be white colored.
3. Receptacles shall be grounded.
4. Switched receptacles shall have upper half switched and lower half not switched.
5. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) receptacles 20 ampere, 125 volt, duplex, with
feed-through design to protect downstream devices.
a. GFCI receptacles shall be commercial grade equal to Leviton 7899..
6. Isolated Ground (IG) receptacles, 20 ampere, 125 volt, duplex, with orange nylon faces,
unless otherwise noted.
a. IG receptacles shall be Leviton 5362-IG.
2.3 WALL PLATES
A. Wall plates shall be smooth, 302 stainless steel.
B. Weatherproof covers, which are weatherproof when receptacle is in use, shall be commercial
grade powder-coated cast zinc and shall be suitable to type of box to be covered.
1. Vertical weatherproof receptacle covers shall be Leviton M5979-0GY.
2. Horizontal weatherproof receptacle covers shall be Leviton M5999-0GY.
16140 - 3
Wiring Devices
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Indicated dimension are to center line of device.
B. Install devices at heights scheduled below, and as indicated on drawings.
1. Switches 48” to top of device
2. Receptacles 48” to top of device
C. Install duplex wall receptacles vertically with ground contacts up except where shown otherwise
or where space problem occurs.
D. Install special purpose receptacles and switches and fixed equipment connections according to
shop drawings and rough-in drawings to be furnished by trade(s) providing such equipment.
Verify locations prior to rough-in.
E. Install lighting switches vertically on latch side of door within 6" of frame edge.
F. Install devices plumb, level with finished surfaces and free from blemishes.
G. Identify receptacles, other than 20A, 120V with "Brady" clear vinyl polyester tape with black
lettering.
1. Label shall indicate receptacle voltage, phase, and amperage at top of cover plate, and
panel and circuit number at bottom of cover plate.
H. Identify all 20A, 120V duplex receptacles with "Brady" clear vinyl polyester tape with black
lettering.
1. Label shall indicate receptacle panel and circuit number at bottom of cover plate.
END OF SECTION
16405 - 1
Enclosed Motor Controllers
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 16405
ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Manual motor controllers
B. Combination magnetic motor controllers
1.2 REFERENCES
A. NFPA® 70 - National Electrical Code® (NEC®).
B. UL® 198C - High-Interrupting Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Type.
C. UL 198E - Class R Fuses.
D. NECA, "Standard of Installation" - published by National Electrical Contractors Association.
E. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
F. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies.
G. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.
H. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size, ratings and size of
switching and overcurrent protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and enclosure
details.
B. Test Reports: Indicate field test and inspection procedures and test results.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include
instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting
of Product.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with
minimum three years documented experience.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
16405 - 2
Enclosed Motor Controllers
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose
specified and indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS: FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER MANUAL MOTOR CONTROLLER
A. Square D - Class 2510 Type F.
1. Description: NEMA ICS 2, ac general-purpose Class A manually operated, full-voltage
controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, with thermal overload unit, and
toggle operator.
2. Enclosure: ANSI®/NEMA ICS 6, Type 1.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS: DISCONNECT SWITCH TYPE COMBINATION MAGNETIC MOTOR
CONTROLLERS - NON-REVERSING
A. Square D - Class 8538 Type S.
1. Description: Magnetic Motor Controllers: NEMA ICS 2, ac general-purpose Class A
magnetic controller for induction motors rated in horsepower
2. Coil operating voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hz.
3. Coil: Be of encapsulated type.
4. Poles: as indicated.
5. Size: as indicated.
6. Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium-oxide power contacts. Contact
inspection and replacement shall be possible without disturbing line or load wiring.
7. Wiring: Straight-through wiring with all terminals clearly marked.
8. Overload Relay: NEMA ICS
a. Melting Alloy: With one-piece thermal unit construction. Thermal units shall be
interchangeable. Overload relay control circuit contact shall be replaceable.
Thermal units shall be required for starter to operate.
b. Solid State: Trip current rating will be established by selection of overload relay and
shall be adjustable (3 to 1 current range). The overload shall be self-powered,
provide phase loss and phase unbalance protection, have a permanent tamper
guard and be ambient insensitive. It will also be available in Trip Class 10 or 20
and have a mechanical test function.
c. Outputs: Unit will be designed for addition of either a normally open or normally
closed
d. auxiliary contact and be field convertible.
e. Reset: Unit shall offer both manual reset and remote reset using an external
module.
9. Enclosure: ANSI/NEMA ICS 6, Type as required to meet conditions of installation.
B. Product Options and Features:
1. Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, 2 field convertible contacts in addition to seal-in contact.
2. Cover Mounted Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 2, heavy duty type.
3. Pilot Device Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, Form Z, rated A150.
4. Push Buttons: Unguarded type.
5. Indicating Lights: LED type.
6. Selector Switches: Rotary type.
7. Relays: NEMA ICS 2.
16405 - 3
Enclosed Motor Controllers
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
8. Control Power Transformers: 120 volt secondary, 100 VA minimum, in each motor starter.
Provide fused primary and secondary, and bond unfused leg of secondary to enclosure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install enclosed controllers where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install enclosed controllers plumb.
C. Height: 5 ft (1.6 m) to top.
D. Install fuses in fusible switches.
E. Select and install overload heater elements in motor controllers to match installed motor
characteristics.
F. Provide a laminated label on each motor controller door identifying motor served, nameplate
horsepower, along with panel name and circuit number.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test each enclosed controller to NEMA ICS 2.
END OF SECTION
16420 - 1
Lighting and Appliance Panelboards
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 16420
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16060 - Grounding and Bonding
B. Section 16070 - Supporting Devices
C. Section 16080 - Electrical Identification
D. Section 16120 - Conductors and Cables
E. Section 16130 - Raceways and Fittings
1.2 REFERENCE
A. The Work under this section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents including the
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and sections under Division 1 General
Requirements.
1.3 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide Lighting and Appliance panelboards as indicated on drawings and as scheduled.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NECA 407 - Recommended Practice for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards.
B. NEMA AB-1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches.
C. NEMA AB-3 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Their Application.
D. NEMA PB-1 - Panelboards.
E. NEMA PB-1.1 - General Instructions For Proper Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of
Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
F. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
G. UL486A - Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors.
H. UL486B - Wire Connectors for Use with Aluminum Conductors
I. UL 489 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures.
J. UL 67 - Electric Panelboards.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit shop drawings for all equipment provided under this specification section.
B. Shop drawings shall include:
16420 - 2
Lighting and Appliance Panelboards
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
1. Manufacturers data on panelboards including, but not limited to, voltage, number of
phases, frequency, and short-circuit and continuous current ratings.
2. Layout drawings, including dimensions and circuit breaker arrangement, of all
panelboards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Square D, Siemens, Cutler Hammer, or General Electric.
B. A single source manufacturer is required for all electrical equipment.
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards
1. Panelboards shall:
a. Have copper or aluminum bussing.
b. Have full ampacity bussing throughout and shall be full size in regard to number of
possible pole spaces. 42 poles per section except where shown to be less.
c. Be identified with phases reading left to right, and circuits alternately numbered left
to right - odd number on left, even on right.
d. Be door-in-door construction.
e. Have fully rated short circuit rating equal to or greater than equipment rating shown
in documents. Series rating shall not be permitted.
f. Be labeled with short circuit current rating.
g. Be factory assembled.
B. Minimum dimensions shall be 20" wide x 5 3/4" deep.
C. Provide gutter and wiring space to meet codes and standards requirements.
D. Electrical Contractor shall instruct manufacturer as to where additional wiring gutter space is
required, i.e., top, bottom, right, left or combination.
E. Panelboards mounted adjacent to one another in finished exposed spaces shall have identical
panel and trim height.
F. Fronts shall be complete with cylinder type lock and catch and all cylinders shall be keyed alike.
Provide 2 keys per panelboard to Owner at project completion.
G. Panelboard cabinets including boxes and fronts shall be code gage galvanized steel.
H. The ampere rating of all devices shall be visible without removal of the dead front cover.
I. Panelboards used as service equipment shall be so labeled.
2.3 FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURER
A. Lugs for incoming feeders shall be for use with copper or aluminum conductors.
B. Main lugs or main breakers may be top or bottom mounted to coordinate with incoming feeder
entrance location selected by Electrical Contractor.
C. Circuit breakers shall be molded case quick-make, quick-break, with thermal magnetic trip.
16420 - 3
Lighting and Appliance Panelboards
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
D. Multi-pole breakers shall have common internal trip. Handle-ties are not permitted.
E. All circuit breakers used on multi-wire branch circuits shall have a common trip mechanism.
F. Breakers shall have ampere rating as scheduled.
G. All circuit breakers shall be bolt-on type.
H. Provide uninsulated grounding bus bar in each panel.
1. Bus bar shall have lug or lugs for grounding conductor from switchboard or distribution
panel.
2. 42 or same number as poles in panel, screw type terminals for connection of equipment
grounding conductors.
3. Terminals shall be sized for No.12 through No. 6 wire.
4. Bus bar shall be welded or bolted to back of panel cabinet.
I. Neutral bus shall not be used as grounding bus or vice versa. Neutral conductors shall terminate
in neutral bus and grounding conductors shall terminate in grounding bus.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Final locations, sizes and mounting of panelboards shall be reviewed to verify the existence of
code required minimum working space clearances prior to installation.
B. Install panelboards and enclosures, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and
in compliance with recognized industry practices.
C. Fasten enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring they are permanently and
mechanically anchored.
D. Top breaker handle: Maximum of 6 ft above finished floor.
E. Tighten connectors and terminals in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque
tightening values.
F. Prior to energization of panelboards, check phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground insulation
resistance levels.
G. Prior to energization, check panelboards for electrical continuity of circuits and for short-circuits.
H. Panelboard shall have typewritten circuit schedule installed inside cover of each panelboard.
I. Schedule shall be covered with clear plastic and shall include description of connected loads,
room numbers, room name, area, or item served for each branch circuit.
J. Label spare circuits as "SPARE".
K. Room numbers used shall be those used by Owner except as otherwise directed by Architect.
L. All panelboards shall be identified with a phenolic label to match the designation used in the
contract drawings. Refer to Specification Section 16080 – Electrical Identification for label
requirements.
M. Leave spare breakers in OFF position.
16420 - 4
Lighting and Appliance Panelboards
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
N. Flush panels in finished areas shall have factory applied primer coat painted trim for finish
painting by others.
O. Surface panels to have enamel finished trim in manufacturer's standard color.
3.2 ADJUSTMENTS AND CLEANING
A. Prior to final inspection clean panelboard interiors, adjust trims, covers, hinges and locks and
refinish marred or scratched covers to original condition.
B. Submit ammeter readings for all lighting panelboard feeders indicating normal operating load and
phase balance.
END OF SECTION
16500 - 1
Lighting Fixtures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16060 - Grounding and Bonding
B. Section 16070 - Supporting Devices
C. Section 16130 - Raceways and Fittings
D. Section 16140 - Wiring Devices
1.2 REFERENCE
A. The Work under this section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents including the
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and sections under Division 1 General
Requirements.
1.3 DESCRIPTION
A. Refer to drawings for Lighting Fixture Schedule.
B. Luminaires shall be provided complete with necessary accessories for proper installation.
C. Catalog numbers shown in luminaire schedule are basic luminaire types. Additional features,
accessories and options not specified or scheduled shall be included.
D. Provide lamps for luminaires of size and type as recommended by luminaire manufacturer and
as scheduled.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NECA/IESNA 500 - Recommended Practice for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting
Systems (ANSI).
B. NECA/IESNA 501 - Recommended Practice for Installing Exterior Lighting Systems (ANSI).
C. NEMA LE 4 - Recessed Luminaries, Ceiling Compatibility.
D. UL 935 - Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts.
E. UL 1029 - High Intensity Discharge Lamp Ballast.
F. UL 1598 - Luminaires
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. In addition to complying with requirements of Section 16000 - General Electrical Requirements
shop drawings shall include the following:
1. Shop drawings shall be submitted for all equipment provided under this specification
section.
16500 - 2
Lighting Fixtures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
2. Where specific finish or color is not specified and options exist, submit color or finish
samples to Architect for selection.
3. Shop drawings shall include manufacturer's product data, installation instructions,
maintenance data, parts list for each luminaire accessories, and mounting details for
linear and suspended luminaries.
4. Lamp cut sheet for each lamp used referencing luminaire type(s).
5. Detailed drawings of all linear and suspended luminaries including dimensions, support
spacing, suspension type, power feed type and locations, ballast locations, luminaire joint
locations and end plates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Luminaires:
1. Shall be as specified on luminary schedule on the drawings. Comparable items of
luminary manufacturers other than that listed on the luminary schedule will be considered
if complete information, including photometric data, is submitted.
B. LED Fixtures
1. LED fixture Manufacturers shall provide the LED specified in the Lighting Fixture
Schedule or meet (or exceed) the performance specifications of the LED Manufacturers
listed below.
a. Lumiled
b. Cree
c. Nichia
d. Toyoda Gosei
e. GelcoreOsram Sylvania – OptoSemiconductor
C. Product Substitution:
1. Approval of other manufacturers considering their products equal will be subject to the
following:
a. Equal manufacturers are required to meet specifications of specified luminaires
and lenses in regard to ceiling opening size and shape, housing, trim/door
appearance and construction, general overall appearance, efficiency,
manufacturer's published photometric data, lamp size, lamp quantity, lens
thickness, brightness control and lamp hiding characteristics.
b. Provide equivalent performance to specified luminaries considering application in
environment and intended usage by Owner.
c. Manufacturers shall submit complete luminaire, lamp, and lens data for evaluation
and/or submit sample luminaires for approval.
d. Samples shall:
1) Be submitted only at request of Engineer
2) Be complete with specified lamp(s)
3) Be ready for installation, and inspection
4) Be shipped prepaid
5) Remain available as example of construction, finish, color tolerance,
photometrics, and general quality of other luminaires of respective type to be
installed on project.
e. Luminaries inferior to the specified products, as judged by Architect/Engineer, will
be rejected and their installation will not be permitted.
16500 - 3
Lighting Fixtures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
f. Submit complete photometric report of submitted sample with specified lamp type
and wattage including tabulated candlepower, coefficient of utilization, and iso-
footcandle diagram.
g. Photometric report shall be in accordance with published IES testing procedures, in
independent testing laboratory, and certified by registered Electrical Engineer.
Data may also be supplied in the form of a data file on a CD in IES format for use
in a recognized computer lighting program.
2.2 FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURER
A. Luminaires:
1. Verify types of ceiling construction with General Contractor prior to releasing luminaires
for fabrication and delivery and provide luminaires adapted to ceiling construction used.
2. Coordinate recessed luminaire mounting appurtenances, flanges and trims with
construction of ceiling in which luminaire is to be recessed. Provide correct luminaire
mounting assembly.
3. Provide luminaries with finish as described in the luminaire schedule. Finish shall be
applied by the luminaire manufacturer unless noted otherwise. Verify final finish
requirements before releasing luminaires for fabrication.
4. Painted recessed luminaries and surface luminaires shall be painted after fabrication or
"post painted".
5. Acrylic lenses shall be 100% virgin acrylic material.
6. Recessed troffers with doors shall have spring-loaded door cam latches.
7. Luminary schedule shows required style of outdoor luminaire, pole heights where poles
are required, and basic IESNA distribution pattern required. Include fittings, brackets,
mounting plates, etc., for proper installation.
8. Provide poles as shown in luminaire schedule.
a. Poles shall have hand holes.
B. LED Luminaires
1. All Solid-State Lighting Products in the form of Luminaires, including LED lamps, shall be
manufactured and tested based on Approved Methods for the Electrical and Photometric
Measurements of Solid-State Lighting products as stated in the LM-79-08
2. Manufacturer shall provide photometric performance data on luminaires in accordance
with ANSI/IES LM-63-02: ANSI Approved Standard File Format for Electronic Transfer of
Photometric Data and Related Information.
3. The LED luminaire manufacturer shall provide the name of the LED source manufacturer
incorporated into the luminaire.
4. All LED luminaire manufacturers shall provide luminaire efficacy calculated from the initial
lumen output of the luminaire that has reached thermal stability operating in an ambient
temperature of 25°C and based on the total power of the LEDs and driver circuit.
5. The LED luminaire shall have a complete 5 year warranty from date of installation.
6. The LED Luminaire manufacturer shall keep a detailed record of the LED’s bin version
and all of its associated components in order to match specification and performance in
the future, shall it be necessary to replace any of its parts should the equipment
malfunction.
7. Lumen depreciation and failure shall be derived from extrapolation or calculation in
accordance with TM-21-11 (Lumen Depreciation Lifetime Estimation Method for LED Light
Sources) based on performance data collected per IES-LM-80.
a. Temperature cycle shock test
b. Voltage switching test
16500 - 4
Lighting Fixtures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
c. Ambient temperature test at 45°C
8. LED fixture Manufacturers shall provide specified LED fixture characteristics such as:
a. Color Temperature for “White” LEDs
b. LED Distribution Angle
c. Quantity of LEDs per PCB
d. Luminous Intensity or Luminous Flux per device
e. Operating current and voltage
f. Dimming Capability
g. Input and System Wattage
9. LED fixture Manufacturers shall meet LED source manufacturer’s recommendations for:
a. Thermal dissipation
b. Operating temperature range for both the LED and Power Supply
c. Storage temperature range for both the LED and the Power Supply
d. Operating Voltage & Current
e. Peak Pulse Forward Current
10. LED fixture Manufacturers shall provide a Driver (power supply) that supplies required
current with voltage range covering the forward voltage as well as variability.
11. Fixtures shall be constructed to allow for the PCB, Driver and electrical components to be
easily accessed and replaced without being removed from the mountings or
disassembling adjacent construction
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Delivery, Storage and Handling:
1. Deliver luminaries in factory-fabricated containers or wrappings.
2. Store luminaires in original packaging.
3. Store inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme
temperatures, humidity, laid flat and blocked off ground.
4. Handle luminaries carefully to prevent damage, breaking, and scoring of finishes. Do not
install damaged units or components; replace with new.
B. Sequencing and Scheduling:
1. Coordinate with other work including wires/cables, electrical boxes and fittings, and
raceways, to properly interface installation of luminaries with other work.
2. Sequence lighting installation with other work to minimize possibility of damage and
soiling during remainder of construction.
C. Installation of Outdoor Pole Bases
1. General Contractor shall provide bases for luminaires.
2. Electrical Contractor shall rough-in conduits and furnish all information to General
Contractor for spacing, base dimensions, heights relating to finish grade, orientation of
bases, etc., so as not to delay pouring of concrete.
D. Installation of Luminaries:
1. Install luminaires, lamps, lenses, etc., after building is enclosed, weather tight and
environmental conditions are nominally same as expected for complete spaces.
2. Lens, reflectors, and refractors shall be clean and free of chips, cracks and scratches.
16500 - 5
Lighting Fixtures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
3. Install luminaires at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with luminaire
manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices.
4. Recessed luminaries shall be supported from the structure with 12 gage wire hangers, 2
per luminaire, at diagonally opposite corners. Additionally, luminaries shall be attached to
ceiling grid to resist horizontal force equal to weight of luminaire.
5. Luminaires over 55 lbs shall be supported with 12 gage wire hangers from the structure, 4
per luminary, 2 at 45 degree diagonals, and two perpendicular to structure. Wire hangers
and attachment to structure shall be capable of supporting 4 times luminaires weight.
6. Provide luminaries and/or luminary outlet boxes with hangers to properly support
luminaire weight.
7. Coordinate with General Contractor to provide additional ceiling grid support wires to
support luminaire weight.
8. Metal decking shall not be pierced for luminaire support.
9. Provide channel and support for recessed luminaires in gypboard ceilings. Provide
required frames. Brace frames temporarily to prevent distortion during handling.
10. Provide approved fire rated enclosures around luminaires in fire rated ceilings.
11. Recessed downlight type luminaires installed in grid ceilings shall be supported by Caddy
517 Series suspension bars or similar support from luminaire manufacturer.
12. Recessed troffers shall be held in place by Caddy 515 Series support clips or similar clips
from luminaire manufacturer.
13. Recessed luminaries in suspended ceilings shall have final connections made with a
length of ½” minimum flexible metal conduit not in excess of 72" in length with THHN
conductors and green ground conductor.
14. Install flush mounted luminaires properly to eliminate light leakage between luminaire
frame and finished surface.
15. Industrial type luminaries in unfinished areas which are near obstructions, such as ducts
and pipes, shall be suspended so that bottom of luminaire is no higher than bottom of
obstruction.
16. Lighting outlets shall not be located until locations of obstructions are determined and
outlets shall be accessible after installation of other equipment.
17. Brace pendant hung luminaires installed near ducts or other construction so they do not
swing into obstructions.
18. Tighten connectors and terminals to equipment manufacturer's published torque
tightening values. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten
connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486
A and B.
19. An additional support is required for surface mounted luminaries greater than 2 ft in length
in addition to the outlet box luminary stud.
20. Surface luminaires installed on grid ceilings, non-feed support, shall be by Caddy IDS
independent support clips and 12-gage wire installed to structure.
21. Exit signs and surface luminaires installed in grid ceilings shall be supported and fed from
Caddy 512 Series electrical box hangers, on similar support from luminaire manufacturer,
with additional 12 gage wire installed from box to structure.
22. Coordinate stem, rod, chain, or aircraft cable hanger lengths with job conditions to obtain
proper mounting height of pendant hung luminaires.
23. Luminaires shall be installed level.
24. Wall mounted luminaries including exit lights shall be fed through luminaire
Stud/Hickey/Nipple assembly with provisions to prevent luminaire turning.
25. Provide inscription for exit and stairway signs to conform to codes or as scheduled.
16500 - 6
Lighting Fixtures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Flush Truck Storage Expansion NMA 18023 Issued for Bidding and Construction April 4, 2019
26. Furnish templates, layout data, and material weights to General Contractor for use in
providing outdoor luminaire bases. Data shall be supplied in sufficient time so work is not
delayed.
27. Install luminaires, poles, hardware, etc., for complete system.
E. Field Quality Control:
1. At Date of Substantial Completion, replace lamps which are not working and lamps which
are not operating properly, as judged by Architect/Engineer.
2. Verify proper orientation of directional luminaires prior to installation. This includes wall
washers, cove lighting, floodlights, exterior area lights and adjustable accent luminaires.
Where orientation cannot be ascertained from drawings or manufacturer's literature,
request clarification in writing from the Architect/Engineer.
F. Adjusting and Cleaning:
1. Clean luminaires of handling marks, dust, dirt, construction debris, etc. This includes
lamps, lenses, reflectors, and louvers, in addition to finished surfaces.
2. Cleaning and touch-up work shall be performed in accordance with luminaire
manufacturer's recommendations with particular efforts made to avoid marring or hazing
specular finishes.
3. Damaged luminaires or components shall be replaced with new.
4. Keep luminaires clean and protected for remainder of construction period.
5. Luminaries having adjustable aiming settings shall be initially set according to drawing
requirements and/or Engineer's instruction prior to substantial completion. Provide final
aiming adjustment in presence of Owner's representative per Architect/Engineer’s
guidance.
END OF SECTION